Manual de Comunicacion GT1030 Allan Bradley

Series
Connection Manual
(Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3
HITACHI IES PLC
HITACHI PLC
FUJI FA PLC
FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
YASKAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
GE FANUC PLC
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER
SIEMENS PLC
HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER
MURATEC CONTROLLER
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone
out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s)
remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to
operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
<When using the GT1655-V, Handy GOT, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, or GT105 >
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, or GT1662>
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed.
<When using the GT104 >
The monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT103 or GT102 >
The monitor screen appears dimmed.
● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type
touch panel.
If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.
Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time.
CAUTION
● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
A-2
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT to/from the panel.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the
GOT.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist
strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity.
CAUTION
● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's
Manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension
interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact.
Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.
● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector
until you hear a click.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector.
● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of
GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access
switch off in advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in
advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card.
A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it may
pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT(GT14) and break.
● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to
the USB interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for
removal.
After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch
firmly to comply with the protective structure.
● Remove the protective film of the GOT.
When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
● Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
● When using the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11, GT10) in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the
protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION
● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT
power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is
used exclusively for the GOT.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
A-5
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

Doing so may damage the unit.
● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

Mitsubishi electric Co. only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
● Dispose of used battery promptly.

Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
A-6
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However,
the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use
elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute
the touch panel calibration.
● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case
of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when
using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user).
Not doing so can cause an electric shock.
Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or
control panel to drop, resulting in an injury.
CAUTION
● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the
user.
Not doing so can cause an injury.
● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT
with the backlight replaceable by the user.
Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be
used.)
A-7
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.)
● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the
User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
A-8
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9
MANUALS............................................................................................................................................... A - 17
QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. A - 19
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 21
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................. A - 26
1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface............................................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.2 I/F communication setting................................................................................................... 1 - 13
1.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 1 - 15
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT............................................................................. 1 - 16
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT................................................................... 1 - 16
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT ............................................................ 1 - 17
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection ............................................................................. 1 - 18
1.3.1 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 1 - 18
1.3.2 Option unit .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.3.3 Conversion cable ................................................................................................................ 1 - 19
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter ........................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.3.5 Serial multi-drop connection unit ........................................................................................ 1 - 19
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter .............................................................................. 1 - 19
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) ............................ 1 - 20
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection ....................................................................... 1 - 27
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ............................................................................................ 1 - 27
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method ...................................................................... 1 - 30
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ............................................................................................. 1 - 31
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor ............................................................ 1 - 34
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment........................................................................ 1 - 35
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring .................................................................................................... 1 - 40
1.6.1 Check on the GOT.............................................................................................................. 1 - 40
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ............. 1 - 43
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) ............ 1 - 45
A-9
CONNECTIONS TO NON-MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS
2.CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC
2.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1 Connection to large-sized H series....................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.2 Connecting to H-200 to 252 series, H series board type or EH-150 series .......................... 2 - 4
2.3 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 5
2.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 5
2.3.2 RS-422 cable ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 5
2.4 GOT Side Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 7
2.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)................................................. 2 - 7
2.4.2 Communication detail settings.............................................................................................. 2 - 7
2.5 PLC Side Setting ............................................................................................................................. 2 - 9
2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 2 - 10
2.6.1 HITACHI HIDIC H Series.................................................................................................... 2 - 12
3.CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC

3.2.1 Connecting to S10V.............................................................................................................. 3 - 3
3.2.2 Connecting to S10mini.......................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 5
3.3.2 RS-422 cable ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 5
3.4 GOT Side Settings ........................................................................................................................... 3 - 7
3.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)................................................. 3 - 7
3.4.2 Communication detail settings.............................................................................................. 3 - 7
3.5 PLC Side Setting ............................................................................................................................. 3 - 8
3.5.1 Connecting to communication module.................................................................................. 3 - 8
3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ........................................................................................................ 3 - 9
3.6.1 HITACHI S10mini/S10V........................................................................................................ 3 - 9
4.CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC

4.2.1 Connecting to MICREX-F55 ................................................................................................. 4 - 3
4.2.2 Connecting to MICREX-F70 ................................................................................................. 4 - 5
4.2.3 Connecting to MICREX-F120S/140S/15[]S .......................................................................... 4 - 8
4.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.3.2 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 12
4.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 14
4.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 4 - 14
4.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 4 - 14
4.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
4.5.1 Connecting to NV1L-RS2, NC1L-RS2 ................................................................................ 4 - 15
A - 10
4.5.2 Connecting to NC1L-RS4 ................................................................................................... 4 - 16
4.5.3 Connecting to FFU120B ..................................................................................................... 4 - 17
4.5.4 Connecting to FFK120A-C10 ............................................................................................. 4 - 18
4.5.5 Station number setting........................................................................................................ 4 - 19
4.6 Device Range that Can Be Set...................................................................................................... 4 - 20
4.6.1 FUJI MICREX-F Series ...................................................................................................... 4 - 20
4.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 4 - 22
5.CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.2.1 Connecting to PXR3, PXR4, PXR5 or PXR9........................................................................ 5 - 3
5.2.2 Connecting to PXG4, PXG5, PXG9 or PXH9 ....................................................................... 5 - 4
5.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 6
5.3.2 RS-485 cable ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 7
5.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 5 - 11
5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ............................................................................................. 5 - 13
5.5.1 Connecting to PXR3/4/5/9 .................................................................................................. 5 - 13
5.5.2 Connecting to PXG4, PXG5 or PXG9 ................................................................................ 5 - 13
5.5.3 Connecting to PXH9 ........................................................................................................... 5 - 14
5.5.4 Connecting to interface converter (RC-77) ......................................................................... 5 - 14
5.5.5 Connecting to interface converter (SI-30A) ........................................................................ 5 - 15
5.5.6 Connecting to interface converter (KS-485) ....................................................................... 5 - 16
5.5.7 Connecting to interface converter (K3SC-10)..................................................................... 5 - 16
5.6.1 FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH........................................................................................................... 5 - 19
5.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 19
6.CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

6.2 Serial Connection ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 3
6.2.1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL130..................................................... 6 - 3
6.2.2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S, GL60H or GL70H ...................................... 6 - 4
6.2.3 System configuration for connecting to MP-920/930, CP-9300MS/9200(H) or PROGIC-8.. 6 - 5
6.2.4 System configuration for connecting to MP-940 ................................................................... 6 - 7
6.2.5 System configuration for connecting to CP-9200SH, CP-317 .............................................. 6 - 8
6.2.6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200, MP2300 or MP2300S.............................. 6 - 9
6.2.7 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................... 6 - 10
6.2.8 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 6 - 14
6.2.9 PLC Side Settings .............................................................................................................. 6 - 16
6.3 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 19
6.3.1 System configuration for connecting to MP-920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or MP2300S
or CP-9200SH or CP-312 or CP-317 ................................................................................. 6 - 19
6.3.3 PLC side setting (MP2000 series, MP920 series) .............................................................. 6 - 22
A - 11
6.3.4 PLC side setting (CP-9200SH series, CP-312, CP-317 series) ......................................... 6 - 27
6.3.5 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 30
6.4.1 YASKAWA GL/PROGIC8 ................................................................................................... 6 - 31
6.4.2 YASKAWA CP9200SH/MP900........................................................................................... 6 - 32
6.4.3 YASKAWA CP9200 (H) ...................................................................................................... 6 - 32
6.4.4 YASKAWA CP9300MS (MC compatible) ........................................................................... 6 - 32
6.4.5 YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH Series ................................................................. 6 - 33
7.CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

7.2 Serial Connection ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.2.1 System configuration for connecting to FA-M3..................................................................... 7 - 3
7.2.2 System configuration for connecting to FA500 ..................................................................... 7 - 5
7.2.3 System configuration for connecting to STARDOM.............................................................. 7 - 5
7.2.4 Connection diagram.............................................................................................................. 7 - 6
7.2.5 GOT side settings ................................................................................................................. 7 - 8
7.2.6 PLC side setting.................................................................................................................... 7 - 9
7.2.7 Connecting to CPU port/D-sub 9-pin conversion cable, SIO port adapter cable ................ 7 - 10
7.2.8 Connecting PC link module (F3LC01-1N, F3LC11-1N, F3LC11-2N) ................................. 7 - 10
7.2.9 Connecting PC link module (F3LC11-1F, F3LC12-1F)....................................................... 7 - 11
7.2.10 Connecting PC link module (LC01-0N, LC02-0N) .............................................................. 7 - 12
7.2.11 Connecting to STARDOM................................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.2.12 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 15
7.3.1 System configuration for connecting to FA-M3................................................................... 7 - 16
7.3.3 PLC side setting.................................................................................................................. 7 - 19
7.3.4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module (F3LE01-5T, F3LE11-0T).................................. 7 - 19
7.3.5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module (F3LE12-0T)...................................................... 7 - 20
7.3.6 Connecting to F3SP66, F3SP67, F3SP71-4N (built-in Ethernet interface) ........................ 7 - 21
7.3.7 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 21
7.4.1 YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3 Series.................................................................................... 7 - 23
7.4.2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA-M3 Series ............................................................................ 7 - 23
8.CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

8.2.1 Connecting to GREEN Series............................................................................................... 8 - 3
8.2.2 Connecting to UT100 Series................................................................................................. 8 - 5
8.2.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series............................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.2.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series....................................................................................... 8 - 7
8.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.3.2 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 11
A - 12
8.5.1 Connecting to GREEN Series ............................................................................................ 8 - 33
8.5.2 Connecting to UT100 Series .............................................................................................. 8 - 34
8.5.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series ............................................................................................ 8 - 34
8.5.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series .................................................................................... 8 - 34
8.5.5 Connecting to RS232C/RS485 converter (ML2-[]) ............................................................. 8 - 35
8.6.1 YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000/UTAdvanced ......................................................... 8 - 37
8.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 38
9.CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

9.2.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J ........................................................................................................ 9 - 4
9.2.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A or H-PCP-B................................................................................... 9 - 7
9.2.3 Connecting to SRZ ............................................................................................................... 9 - 9
9.2.4 Connecting to CB Series (CB100, CB400, CB500, CB700, CB900) .................................. 9 - 13
9.2.5 Connecting to FB series (FB100, FB400 or FB900) ........................................................... 9 - 14
9.2.6 Connecting to RB Series (RB100, RB400, RB500, RB700, RB900) .................................. 9 - 17
9.2.7 Connection to PF900/901, HA400/401, HA900/901, RMC500, MA900/901,
AG500, SA100/200............................................................................................................. 9 - 18
9.2.8 Connection to THV-A1........................................................................................................ 9 - 20
9.2.9 Connection to SRX ............................................................................................................. 9 - 23
9.2.10 Connecting to SB1.............................................................................................................. 9 - 24
9.2.11 Connecting to B400 ............................................................................................................ 9 - 26
9.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 27
9.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 28
9.3.3 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 31
9.5.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J ...................................................................................................... 9 - 40
9.5.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B ..................................................................................... 9 - 41
9.5.3 Connecting to Z-TIO, Z-DIO, Z-CT ..................................................................................... 9 - 42
9.5.4 Connecting to Z-COM......................................................................................................... 9 - 43
9.5.5 Connecting to CB Series .................................................................................................... 9 - 44
9.5.6 Connecting to FB Series..................................................................................................... 9 - 44
9.5.7 Connecting to RB Series .................................................................................................... 9 - 45
9.5.8 Connecting to PF900/900 ................................................................................................... 9 - 45
9.5.9 Connecting to HA400/401, HA900/901 .............................................................................. 9 - 45
9.5.10 Connecting to AG500 ......................................................................................................... 9 - 46
9.5.11 Connecting to RMC500 ...................................................................................................... 9 - 46
9.5.12 Connecting to MA900, MA901............................................................................................ 9 - 46
9.5.13 Connecting to THV-A1........................................................................................................ 9 - 46
9.5.14 Connecting to SA100/SA200 .............................................................................................. 9 - 47
9.5.15 Connecting to X-TIO Module .............................................................................................. 9 - 47
9.5.16 Connecting to SB1.............................................................................................................. 9 - 48
A - 13
9.5.17 Connecting to B400 ............................................................................................................ 9 - 48
9.6.1 RKC SR Mini HG ................................................................................................................ 9 - 52
9.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 9 - 52
10.CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

10.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.2 Serial Connection .......................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
10.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series..................................................... 10 - 4
10.2.2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series ....................... 10 - 5
10.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to Control/Compact/FlexLogix Series ...................... 10 - 6
10.2.6 PLC Side Setting .............................................................................................................. 10 - 12
10.3 Ethernet Connection .................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.3.1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix ........................... 10 - 13
10.3.2 GOT Side Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 14
10.3.3 PLC side setting................................................................................................................ 10 - 16
10.3.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 16
10.4 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 10 - 17
10.4.1 AB SLC500 ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 18
10.4.2 AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series ............................................................................. 10 - 19
10.4.3 AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series (Device extended) ............................................... 10 - 19
10.4.4 AB Control/CompactLogix ................................................................................................ 10 - 19
11.CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC

11.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.2.1 Connecting to Series90-30 ................................................................................................. 11 - 3
11.2.2 Connecting to Series90-70 ................................................................................................. 11 - 6
11.2.3 Connecting to VersaMax Micro........................................................................................... 11 - 7
11.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 11 - 9
11.3.2 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
11.4 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 11 - 14
11.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.5 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 11 - 15
11.5.1 Connecting to Series 90-30 .............................................................................................. 11 - 15
11.5.2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro.......................................................................................... 11 - 15
11.5.3 Connecting to IC693CMM311 .......................................................................................... 11 - 16
11.5.4 Connecting to IC697CMM711 .......................................................................................... 11 - 16
11.5.5 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 11 - 16
11.6.1 GE Fanuc Automation Series 90 ...................................................................................... 11 - 17
11.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 17
A - 14
12.CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
12.2.1 Connecting to K80S or K120S............................................................................................ 12 - 3
12.2.2 Connecting to K200S.......................................................................................................... 12 - 5
12.2.3 Connecting to K300S.......................................................................................................... 12 - 6
12.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 7
12.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 8
12.5 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 12 - 10
12.5.1 Connecting to PLC CPU ................................................................................................... 12 - 10
12.5.2 Connecting to Cnet I/F module ......................................................................................... 12 - 10
12.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 12 - 11
12.6.1 LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K ................................................................................... 12 - 11
13.CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER

13.2.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft ..................................................................................................... 13 - 2
13.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
13.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.5.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft ..................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.6 Device Range That Can Be Set..................................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.6.1 SICK Safety Controller (SICK Flexi Soft)............................................................................ 13 - 7
14.CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

14.2 Serial Connection .......................................................................................................................... 14 - 3
14.2.1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-300/400 series................................. 14 - 3
14.2.2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-200 .................................................. 14 - 4
14.2.5 PLC Side Setting ................................................................................................................ 14 - 7
14.2.6 Connecting to HMI Adapter ................................................................................................ 14 - 7
14.2.7 Connecting to SIMATIC S7-200 ......................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.2.8 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.3.1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-300/400 series................................. 14 - 9
14.3.2 GOT Side Settings............................................................................................................ 14 - 10
14.3.3 PLC side setting ............................................................................................................... 14 - 12
A - 15
14.3.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 14 - 13
14.4.1 SIEMENS S7-300/400 Series........................................................................................... 14 - 15
14.4.2 SIEMENS S7-200 Series.................................................................................................. 14 - 15
14.4.3 SIEMENS S7(Ethernet) .................................................................................................... 14 - 15
15.CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER

15.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
16.CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER

16.5 MURATEC Controller Side Setting ................................................................................................ 16 - 2
INDEX
REVISIONS
A - 16
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
 Connection manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080868ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC2)
SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080860ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA9)
A - 17
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)
 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7M23)
 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D44801
(09R823)
 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D17501
(09R815)
JY997D20101
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20102
(09R817)
 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 18
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for
Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function) GT Works3
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Products 2) for GT Works3
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

Reading data from the GOT
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 19
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

Operating the utility
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Functions) for GT Works3
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 20
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GOT1000 GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,
GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT104
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 21
GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
 Communication unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
A - 22
 Option
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
For GT15 GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
Protective Sheet GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11
GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 23
 Software
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA
GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller
GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2
MT Works2
(SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)
NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 24
 Others
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
MODBUS/RTU
communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 25
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual.
BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name

Not connectable model name
5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2

Applicable model name
Shows GT16.
Shows GT15.
Shows GT14.
Shows GT12.
Shows GT11.
Shows GT11 (BUS).
Shows GT11 (SERIAL).
Shows GT10.
Shows GT105 ,GT104 .
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V).
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V).
1. 2. 3. …
Indicates the operation steps.
2.
[ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on
the software and GOT screen.
3.
4.
Refers to the information required.
Refers to information useful

Click! for operation.
Indicates the location of related content.
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 26
 About system configuration
The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual.
The configuration of The cable connecting The configuration of

equipment connected the GOT to the the GOT connected to
to GOT is shown. equipment is shown. equipment is shown.
For the option devices,
refer to the following.
1.3 Option Devices
for the Respective
Connection
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion Cable
A representative example
Connection cable of the system configuration
is described with an
illustration.
Indicates the connection diagram Indicates the maximum distance between

number of cables to be prepared by the PLC and GOT.
the user.
Refer to the connection diagram
section in each chapter.
System Configuration Examples
(When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable)
1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q].
Indicates the commercially available 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16].
cable models that can be used. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P].
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 27
A - 28
1
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES
FOR MONITORING 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18 4
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 27
CONNECTION TO
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 35
FUJI FA PLC
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
1-1
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
MONITORING
The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.
Setting the communication interface

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and
Each chapter GOT Side Settings
perform the communication setting.
Writing the project data and OS

Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
Verifying the project data and OS

Verify the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
OS, project data and communication settings are properly
written onto the GOT.
Attaching the communication unit and 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
connecting the cable 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
Each chapter System Configuration
Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the
Each chapter Connection Diagram
connection cable according to the connection type.
Verifying GOT recognizes connected

equipment 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication
Settings] of the Utility.
Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally

Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
etc.
1-2 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment.
When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication
driver before writing to GOT.
Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.
 Setting
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.
2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.
6
3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.
CONNECTION TO
POINT YASKAWA PLC
Channel No.2 to No.4

Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. 7
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Mitsubishi Products 20. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-3

 Setting item
This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F.
When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].
Item Description
Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Type
(2)Setting [Controller Type]
Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following.
I/F
(3)Setting [I/F]
Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT.For the settings, refer to the following.
Driver
(1)Setting [Driver]
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
(1) Setting [Driver]

The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
For the settings, refer to the following.
[Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

(2) Setting [Controller Type]
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used.
For the settings, refer to the following.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Type Model name
Type Model name
PXR3
H-302
PXR4
H-702
PXR5 2
H-1002
PXR9
FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH
CONNECTION TO
H-2002
HITACHI IES PLC

PXG4
H-4010
PXG5
H-300
PXG9
H-700
PXH9
H-2000
H-200
PROGIC-8 3
GL120
CONNECTION TO
H-250
GL130
H-252 YASKAWA GL/PROGIC8
HITACHI PLC
GL60S
H-252B
GL60H
H-252C
GL70H
HITACHI HIDIC H Series H-20DR
H-28DR
MP920 4
MP930
H-40DR YASKAWA CP-9200SH/MP-900 Series
CONNECTION TO
MP940
H-64DR
FUJI FA PLC
CP-9200SH
H-20DT
YASKAWA CP-9200 (H) CP-9200(H)
H-28DT
YASKAWA CP-9300MS (MC compatible) CP-9300MS
H-40DT
H-64DT
MP2200 5
MP2300
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
HL-40DR
MP920
HL-64DR
CONTROLLER
YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH MP930
EH-CPU104
Series MP940
EH-CPU208
CP-9200SH
EH-CPU308
EH-CPU316
CP-312 6
CP-317
LQP510
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
LQP520
LQP800
HITACHI S10mini/S10V LQP000
LQP010
LQP011
7
LQP120
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
F55
F70
FUJI MICREX-F Series F120S
F140S
F15 S
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

Type Model name Type Model name
FA500 UT320
F3SP05 UT321
F3SP08 UT350
F3SP10 UT351
F3SP20 UT420
F3SP30 UT450
F3FP36 UT520
F3SP21 UT550
YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3 Series F3SP25 UT551
F3SP35 UT750
F3SP28 UP350
F3SP38 UP351
F3SP53 UP550
F3SP58 UP750
F3SP59 UM330
F3SP66 UM331
YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000
F3SP67 UM350
/UTAdvanced Series
NFCP100 UM351
NFJT100 US1000
F3SP05 UT130
F3SP08 UT150
F3SP10 UT152
F3SP20 UT155
F3SP30 UP150
F3FP36 UT2400
F3SP21 UT2800
YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA-M3 Series
F3SP25 UT32A
F3SP35 UT35A
F3SP28 UT52A
F3SP38 UT55A
F3SP53 UP35A
F3SP58 UP55A
F3SP59 UM33A
F3SP66 DMC10
F3SP67 SDC15
SDC25
SDC26
SDC35
SDC36
YAMATAKE SDC/DMC Series SDC20
SDC21
SDC30
SDC31
SDC40A
SDC40B
SDC40G

1
PROCEDURES FOR
H-PCP-J 1761-L10BWA
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
H-PCP-A 1761-L10BWB
H-PCP-B 1761-L16AWA
Z-TIO 1761-L16BWA
Z-DIO 1761-L16BWB
Z-CT 1761-L16BBB
2
CB100 1761-L32AWA
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CB400 1761-L32BWA
AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series
CB500 1761-L32BWB
CB700 1761-L32BBB
CB900 1761-L32AAA
FB100 1761-L20AWA-5A
3
FB400 1761-L20BWA-5A
CONNECTION TO
FB900 1761-L20BWB-5A
HITACHI PLC
RB100 1762-L24BWA
RKC SR Mini HG RB400 1764-LSP
RB500 1756-L
RB700 1756-L1M1
4
RB900 1756-L1M2
CONNECTION TO
PF900 1756-L1M3
FUJI FA PLC
PF901 1756-L61
HA400/401 1756-L62
HA900/901 1756-L63
RMC500 1756-L55M12
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
MA900 1756-L55M13
SYS TEMPERATURE
MA901 1756-L55M14
CONTROLLER
AG500 AB Control/CompactLogix 1756-L55M16
THV-A1 1756-L55M22
SA100 1756-L55M23
SA200 1756-L55M24 6
X-TIO 1769-L31
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
SLC500-20 1769-L32E
SLC500-30 1769-L32C
SLC500-40 1769-L35E
SLC5/01 1769-L35CR
AB SLC500
SLC5/02 1794-L33 7
SLC5/03 1794-L34
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
SLC5/04
SLC5/05
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

IC693CPU311 K7M-D S(/DC)

IC693CPU313 K7M-D U
LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K
IC693CPU323 K3P-07 S
IC693CPU350 K4P-15S
IC693CPU360 FX3-CPU000000
SICK Flexi Soft
IC693CPU363 FX3-CPU130002
IC693CPU366 SIMATIC S7-300
SIEMENS S7-300/400 Series
IC693CPU367 SIMATIC S7-400
IC693CPU374 SIEMENS S7-200 SIMATIC S7-200
IC697CPU731
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782
IC697CPX928
IC697CPX935
IC697CPU780
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
IC697CPU788
IC697CPU789
IC697CPM790
IC200UAA003
GE Fanuc Automation Series 90
IC200UAL004
IC200UAL005
IC200UAL006
IC200UAA007
IC200UAR028
IC200UDD110
IC200UDD120
IC200UDD212
IC200UDR005
IC200UDR006
IC200UDR010
IC200UDD064
IC200UDD164
IC200UDR164
IC200UDR064
IC200UAR014
IC200UDD104
IC200UDD112
IC200UDR001
IC200UDR002
IC200UDR003

(3) Setting [I/F]
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used.
Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(a) GT16
Extension interface 1
3rd stage Extension interface 2 2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Standard interface 3
2nd stage (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
1st stage 3
CONNECTION TO
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
(Example: In the case of the GT1685)
FUJI FA PLC
(USB interface built in the GOT)
(b) GT15
Extension interface 1 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Extension interface 2
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
3rd stage
2nd stage 6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
1st stage
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(Example: In the case of the GT1575) Standard interface 2

(USB interface built in the GOT)
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(c) GT14
[Front view]] [Rear view]

Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
[Under view]
(d) GT12
[Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 4

(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

(e) GT11 1
• GT11 Serial
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
[Front view] [Rear view] 3
CONNECTION TO
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
HITACHI PLC
• GT11 Bus
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
[Front view] [Rear view]
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) 6
CONNECTION TO
(GOT built-in Bus interface)
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 11

(f) GT105
[Rear view]

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
(g) GT104

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
(h) GT1020, GT1030
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2
or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

1.1.2 I/F communication setting 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces.
MONITORING
Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.
 Setting
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.
CONTROLLER
2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 Setting item
The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting.
Item Description
Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.
GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4
Standard I/F Setting
GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11, GT105 , GT104 : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.
The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
CH No.
8: Used for barcode reader connection, RFID connection, PC remote operation (serial), fingerprint
authentication device connection, Printer (serial), or GOT (extended computer)
9: Used for connecting Host (PC)
*: Used for gateway function, MES interface function, and Ethernet download
Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection
I/F The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.
Set the driver for the device to be connected.
Driver
None Host (PC) Each communication driver for connected devices
Detail Setting
To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox.
The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases.
RS232 Setting • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] in GT15 and 16.
• CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] or [8] in GT14.
• For GT12, GT11 and GT10

Item Description
1
Extend I/F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT.
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.
PREPARATORY
The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
MONITORING
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
CH No. setting)
5 to 7: Used for barcode reader connection, RFID connection, and PC remote operation connection
* : For the gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download, report function,
hard copy (For printer output), video/RGB input, RGB output, multimedia function, 2
CF card unit, CF card extension unit, sound output, and external I/O or operation panel
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Set the driver for the device to be connected.
Driver
None Each driver for connected devices
Detail Setting
3
POINT
CONNECTION TO
Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting]
HITACHI PLC
(1) Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Products 20. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 4
(2) Drivers
CONNECTION TO
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
FUJI FA PLC
[Setting the communication] section in each chapter
(3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14
Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor.
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
For details, refer to the following manual.
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor
CONTROLLER
6
1.1.3 Precautions
CONNECTION TO
 Precautions for changing model YASKAWA PLC
(1) When devices that cannot be converted are included.

When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot
be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges) as [??]. In this case, set the device 7
again.
CONNECTION TO
(2) When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network.
YOKOGAWA PLC
The network will be set to the host station.

(3) When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None]
The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again.
Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device
Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List]. 8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual.
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
1. Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
3. The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box.
Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data.
4. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and
Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button.
POINT
Writing communication driver onto GT10
When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver. under F or a standard monitor OS
Ver. under 01.08.00 is written, turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT10 User's Manual
(Operating of transmission mode)
Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched.

1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are
MONITORING
properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3.
For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
1. Select [Communication] [Read from GOT…] from the menu.
CONTROLLER
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.
Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
3. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. 6
Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data.
CONNECTION TO
4.
YASKAWA PLC
Click the [Info Reception] button.
5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type.
For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.
1.3.1 Communication module
Product name Model Specifications
For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)

GT15-QBUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2
For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-ABUS

GT15-ABUS2
Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-75ABUSL

GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))
Serial communication unit GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))
GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)
GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-422 side connector 9-pin

RS-422 conversion unit RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25-pin
MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

Communication module GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
MELSECNET/10 GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Communication module GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
CC-Link IE controller
GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
network communication unit
GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

1.3.2 Option unit 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connecting printer 1 ch
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie
GT16M-V4
Video input unit
GT15V-75V4
For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch
2
GT16M-R2
CONNECTION TO
RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch
HITACHI IES PLC

GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
Video/RGB input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit
GT15V-75ROUT
For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
3
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject
CONNECTION TO
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject
HITACHI PLC
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common
GT15-DIOR
Input/Source Type Output)
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common
Input/Sink Type Output)
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
1.3.3 Conversion cable
RS-422 connector conversion

GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-422 conversion cable (D-sub 9-pin)
5
cable
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
RS-485 terminal block RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block)
CONTROLLER
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10
conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter 6
CONNECTION TO
Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block) YASKAWA PLC
1.3.5 Serial multi-drop connection unit 7

CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Serial multi-drop GOT multi-drop connection module

GT01-RS4-M
connection unit Mitsubishi Products 18. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter 8


CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
RS-232/485 signal
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)
conversion adapter

1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit.
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are
using. For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used
 Calculating consumed current

For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
Current supply Current supply

GOT type capacity GOT type capacity
(A) (A)
GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13
GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74
GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74
GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2
GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3
(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2,
0.275*1 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1
GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11
GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1
GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT15-CFCD 0.07
GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15
GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08
GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1
Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1
GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2
GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22
GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed
current.(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A.)

(3) Calculation example
1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
PREPARATORY
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V
MONITORING
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
2
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
3
 When using a bus connection unit
CONNECTION TO
The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used.
HITACHI PLC
(1) Wide bus units (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2,
GT15-ABUS2)
Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
4
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
CONNECTION TO
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
FUJI FA PLC
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

POINT
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2
The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are
recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Recognized as the
3rd stage of extend Recognized as the 2nd stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend Recognized as the 1st stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the 1st stage

of extend interface 1
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
Relay connector
(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)

A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit

1
 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE controller network
PROCEDURES FOR
communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE controller network communication unit, or CC-Link
communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit
2
Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H
communication unit
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
MELSECNET/H Serial communication unit
communication unit
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
POINT
Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE controller network communication unit,
4
CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
CONNECTION TO
The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication
FUJI FA PLC
unit, CC-Link IE controller network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit are recognized by the GOT
differently depending on the extension interface position.
5
Recognized as the 3rd stage
CONNECTION TO FUJI
of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
SYS TEMPERATURE
of extension interface 2
CONTROLLER
Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
6
Recognized as the 1st stage
CONNECTION TO
MELSECNET/H communication unit
Relay connector YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 When using a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z)
and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable.
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
Serial communication unit
 When using an Ethernet communication unit

An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit
Serial communication unit Ethernet

communication unit
Ethernet Serial communication unit
communication unit
 When using a serial communication unit

A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
Serial Serial
communication communication
unit unit

1
 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit
PROCEDURES FOR
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the
PREPARATORY
extension interface.
MONITORING
Example: When installing a printer unit
Communication Printer unit
unit
Communication
2
Printer unit
unit
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
 When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or
multimedia unit
Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage 4
of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the
CONNECTION TO
extension interface.
FUJI FA PLC
Communication unit Model
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
CC-Link IE controller network

5
GT15-J71GP23-SX
CONNECTION TO FUJI
communication unit
SYS TEMPERATURE
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
CONTROLLER
Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit
MELSECNET/H Video/RGB
communication unit
input unit 6
Video/RGB MELSECNET/H
CONNECTION TO
communication unit
input unit
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

POINT
Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit
When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit
recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface.
Recognized as the 3rd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
Recognized as the 2nd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
Recognized as the 1st stage of

extension interface 1
Video/RGB input unit
Relay connector
 When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit

Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last.
The following figures show how to install the CF card unit.
CF card unit
Serial communication
unit
Serial communication
unit
CF card unit

1
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are
necessary.
For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 2

The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.
 RS-232 interface
Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side
connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector specifications
3
Hardware
CONNECTION TO
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
version*1
HITACHI PLC
GT16 ― 17LE-23090-27(D4C )
GT1595-X ― DDK Ltd.
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1585V-S ―
GT1585-STBA
B or later
C
GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
4
GT1585-STBD ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
CONNECTION TO
GT1575V-S ―
FUJI FA PLC
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-STBA
C
17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575-STBD ―
D or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-VTBA
E 9-pin D-sub (male)
inch screw fixed type
5
GT1575-VTBD ―
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT1575-VN ―
GT1572-VN ―
CONTROLLER
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1565-V ―
GT1562-VN ―
DDK Ltd.
GT12 ―
GT155 ―
6
GT14 ―
GT115 -Q ―
CONNECTION TO
17LE-23090-27(D3CC)
YASKAWA PLC
GT105 -Q ―
GT104 -Q ―
GT1030, GT1020 ― 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.
GT15-RS2-9P ― 9-pin D-sub (male)
17LE-23090-27(D3CC) DDK Ltd.
GT01-RS4-M ― inch screw fixed type
7
*1 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual.
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
GT1020.
(2) Connector pin arrangement

GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , GT01-RS4-M GT1030, GT1020
GOT main part connector

see from the front
See from the back of a
GOT main part 8
1 5
CONNECTION TO
NC
NC
CS
RS
SG
DR
ER
RD
SD
6 9
CONTROLLER
9-pin D-sub (male) 9-pin terminal block

Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector model
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
9-pin D-sub (female)

RS-422 conversion unit M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT14
GT12
GT115 -Q M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT105 -Q
GT104 -Q
GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.
GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-sub (female)

M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
GT01-RS4-M fixed type
*1 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.

To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.

GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104 , GT01-RS4-M
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
SG
9 6
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use the following as the RS-485 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
PREPARATORY
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
MONITORING
(1) Connector model
GOT Hardware version*1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
GT16*2 ― 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 2

GT14 ―
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
GT12 ―
GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
F or later
fixed type
GT1150-QLBD
GT105 -Q C or later 3
GT104 -Q A or later
CONNECTION TO
GT1030 B or later
9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc
HITACHI PLC
GT1020 E or later

GT15-RS4-9S ― M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT15-RS4-TE ― ― SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc

4
*1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual.
CONNECTION TO
*2 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.
FUJI FA PLC
To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
*3 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and
GT1020.

5
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT104
CONTROLLER
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
6
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
SG
9 6
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method
The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.
CAUTION
 Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly.
Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.
Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable
External conductor
Outer sheath Insulating material
Nut Washer Gasket
Plug shell
Internal conductor
Clamp Contact
1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with

dimensions as shown below.
A
Cable in use A
Cut this portion of the outer sheath
3C-2V 15mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10mm
2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial
Clamp
cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.
Nut
Washer
Gasket
Insulating material 3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal
Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below.
Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same
dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed
C
down to the clamp.
B Clamp and external
conductor
Cable in use B C
3C-2V 6mm 3mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7mm 5mm
Solder here 4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.
5. Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug

shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.
Precautions for soldering

Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact.
• Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section.
• Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other.
• Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side.
MONITORING
When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.
 RS-422/485 communication unit  GT16

Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
2
Switch No. Switch No.
CONNECTION TO
Terminating Terminating
HITACHI IES PLC

resistor*1 resistor*1
ON
ON
1 2 SW1 1 2 SW1
1
1
100 OHM ON ON 100 OHM ON ON
2
2
Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF
*1 The default setting is "Disable". *1 The default setting is "Disable".

3
• For RS422/485 communication unit • For GT1685M-S
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
ON
SW1
1
2
ON
FUJI FA PLC
Terminating resistor setting switch
Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.
 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
For details, refer to the following.
SYS TEMPERATURE
Terminating resistor setting switch
1.4.4Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion (inside the cover)
CONTROLLER
adaptor
 GT14
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
Terminating resistor selector switch

CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 GT12  GT105
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.
 GT11 Terminating resistor selector switch

resistor setting switch.  GT104


1
 GT1030
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
 GT1020
HITACHI PLC
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.
POINT
Enable the 5V power supply
Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal
conversion adaptor.
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 8.2 Utility Function List
2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
 Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

O
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
Switch No.
Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6
2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

2-wire/4-wire
4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF
110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF
Terminating resistor OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF
330 - - OFF ON ON OFF
POINT
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter
For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

1
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility.
• Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status
• Communication unit installation status
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.

2
GT User's Manual
CONNECTION TO
 When using GT16, GT12
HITACHI IES PLC

(For GT16)
1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu]
1. [Communication setting] from the Utility.
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
2.
SYS TEMPERATURE
Touch [Communication setting].
CONTROLLER
2.
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

3. The [Communication Setting] appears.
3. 4.
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
be used is displayed in the communication
interface box to be used.
5. When the communication driver name is not

displayed normally, carry out the following
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface

1
 For GT15, GT14 or GT11
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
1.
MONITORING
After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
1.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
2. Touch [Communication setting].
(The screen on the left is not displayed on
GT11.)
4
2.
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
3. 4. 3. The [Communication Setting] appears.
6
CONNECTION TO
be used is displayed in the box for the
YASKAWA PLC
communication interface to be used.

procedure again. 7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 For GT10
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
2. Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting].

2.
3. The [Standard I/F] appears.

3. 4.
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

procedure again.

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Utility
(1) How to display Utility (at default)
When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020
2
Utility call key
1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner
Utility display
(When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
(When using GT105 ,
CONNECTION TO
When using GT1585, GT157 , (When using GT14, GT11) GT104 )
GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 ,
HITACHI PLC
GT104 or GT1030
Utility call key
Simultaneous 2-point press
4
(When using GT1030, GT1020)
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
(2) Utility call
When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
the utility call key until the buzzer sounds.For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following.
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT User's Manual
CONTROLLER
(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing
[Communication Settings] of project data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.
6
GT User's Manual
CONNECTION TO
(4) Precedence in communication settings
YASKAWA PLC
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1.6.1 Check on the GOT
 Check for errors occurring on the GOT
Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo
amplifier and communications.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT User's Manual
(When using GT15)
Error code Communication Channel No.
Error message Time of occurrence

(Displayed only for errors)
HINT
Advanced alarm popup display

With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether
an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual

1
 Perform an I/O check
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. 2
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu.
• For GT16, GT12
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check].
• For GT15, GT14, GT11
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual.
3
GT User's Manual
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen.
Touching [CPU] executes the communication
check with the connected PLC.
4
CONNECTION TO
1.
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
2. When the communication screen ends
6
successfully, the screen on the left is displayed.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 Communication monitoring function
The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual:
GT10 User's Manual
(Operation of communication monitoring function screen)
Main Menu
Touch [Comm. Setting] Touch [ ]
Communication settings
Touch [Comm. Monitor]

1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet 1
connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
 Confirming the communication state on Windows®, GT Designer3
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®.
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
3
Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64
CONNECTION TO
(b) When abnormal communication
HITACHI PLC
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
Request timed out.
(2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Communication configuration] [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display 4
[PING Test].
CONNECTION TO
1. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING
FUJI FA PLC
Test] and click the [PING Test] button.
2. The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING

Test] is finished. 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
2. 6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
Click!
1.
7
CONNECTION TO
(3) When abnormal communication

YOKOGAWA PLC
At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again.
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
• Cable connecting condition
• Confirmation of [Communication Settings]
• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14)
[PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT14 User's Manual

1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring 1
function)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
HITACHI IES PLC

When an abnormal state is detected, the function assigns the information of the faulty station to the GOT special
register (GS).
(1) No. of faulty stations
(a) For the Ethernet connection (except for the Ethernet multiple connection)
Total No. of the faulty CPU are stored. 3
Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
CONNECTION TO
GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
HITACHI PLC
(b) For Ethernet multiple connection
The total No. of the faulty devices is stored.
Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
POINT
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display 5
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
For the data operation, refer to the following manual.
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual
CONTROLLER
Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8

YOKOGAWA PLC
to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(2) Faulty station information
The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal 1: Abnormal)
The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.
(a) For the Ethernet connection (except for the Ethernet multiple connection).
GS231 bit 0
GS231 bit 1
GS231 bit 2
GS231 bit 3
Ethernet setting No.

Device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
(b) For the Ethernet multiple connection or the temperature controller connection
The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection/non
connection with Ethernet.
With Ethernet connection: 1 to 128
With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127
Example) With Ethernet connection, when PC No. 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty, GS327.b3 is set.
The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection.
Device Station No.
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS)

(3) Network No., station No. notification
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup.
If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device
Description
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)
GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

CONNECTIONS TO
NON-MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS
2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
............................................... 5-1
6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER . 9 - 1
10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 1
12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC . . . . 12 - 1
13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER . . . . . . 13 - 1
14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1
2
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
2. CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
2.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
2.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
2.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
2.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
SYS TEMPERATURE
2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
2-1
2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC
2.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type
H-302
H-702
H-1002
Large-sized H H-2002 RS-232

Series RS-422 2.2.1
H-4010
H-300
H-700
H-2000
H-200
H-250
H-200 to 252
H-252 RS-232 2.2.2
Series
H-252B
H-252C
H-20DR
H-28DR
H-40DR
H-64DR
H Series H-20DT
RS-232 2.2.2
board type H-28DT
H-40DT
H-64DT
HL-40DR
HL-64DR
EH-CPU104
EH-CPU208
EH-CPU308
EH-150 series RS-232 2.2.2
EH-CPU316
EH-CPU516
EH-CPU548
2-2 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC

1
2.2 System Configuration
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2.2.1 Connection to large-sized H series
Communication driver
Intelligent
Large-sized
H series
serial port GOT · HITACHI HIDIC H
2
module · HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2)
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
To use "transmission control procedure 2"
as a protocol, select "HITACHI HIDIC H
(Protocol2)" as a communication driver.
PLC Connection cable GOT
Model
Intelligent Commun
Cable model Max.
Number of
connectable 3
serial port ication Option device Model
name Connection diagram number distance equipment
module*1 Type
CONNECTION TO
*2
H-302
HITACHI PLC
H-702*2 - (Built into GOT)
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
H-1002*2
- RS-232 or 15m
H-2002*2
H-300 RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
H-700
H-2000 4
• Specified transmission speed:
CONNECTION TO
4800bps
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
FUJI FA PLC
or RS232 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
19200bps
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
or RS232 connection
1 GOT for 1 PLC 5
diagram 2)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
H-4010 - RS-232 38400bps*3 15m
CONTROLLER
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
or RS232 connection
diagram 2)
• Transmission speed other than
GT15-RS2-9P
the above
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m) 6
or RS232 connection
diagram 1)
CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
YASKAWA PLC
or RS232 connection
diagram 2)
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m) - (Built into GOT)

or
H-302
RS-232
RS232 connection diagram 1)
15m
7
GT15-RS2-9P
H-702
CONNECTION TO
H-1002 1 GOT
YOKOGAWA PLC
RS422 connection diagram 1) 200m - (Built into GOT)

H-2002 COMM-H for 1
H-4010 COMM-2H GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) intelligent serial
GT09-C30R40401-7T(3m)
H-300 port module
GT09-C100R40401-7T(10m)
H-700 RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
GT09-C200R40401-7T(20m)
H-2000 200m
GT09-C300R40401-7T(30m)
or GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection diagram 2) - (Built into GOT)

8
*1 Product manufactured by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact HITACHI Industrial
Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
CONNECTION TO
*2 Connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module.

CONTROLLER
*3 Can be specified with the CPU software of revision "J" or later.

*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2-3

2.2.2 Connecting to H-200 to 252 series, H series board type or EH-150 series
H-200 to 252 series,
H series board type, GOT
· HITACHI HIDIC H
EH-150 series · HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2)
Connection cable
To use "transmission control procedure 2"
as a protocol, select "HITACHI HIDIC H
(Protocol2)" as a communication driver.

Commun Number of connectable
Cable model Max. equipment
Model name ication Option device Model
Connection diagram number distance
Type
H-200*1, H-250*1
- (Built into GOT)
H-252*1, H-252B*1
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
H-20DR, H-28DR
RS-232 or 15m
H-40DR, H-64DR
H-20DT, H-28DT RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
H-40DT, H-64DT
HL-40DR, HL-64DR
4800bps
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
or RS232 connection diagram 1)
19200bps
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
H-252C*1*2 RS-232
15m
• Transmission speed other than the

above
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P

GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
1 GOT for 1 PLC
4800bps
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
or RS232 connection diagram 1) - (Built into GOT)
19200bps
EH-CPU104*3 GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
EH-CPU208*3 or RS232 connection diagram 2)

EH-CPU308*3 • Specified transmission speed:
RS-232 38400bps 15m
EH-CPU316*3
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
EH-CPU516*3
EH-CPU548*3
• Transmission speed other than the
GT15-RS2-9P
above
GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m)
GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m)
*1 To connect to H-200 to 252 series, connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module.
*2 To connect to serial port 2 of H-252C (CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC), the round connector (8 pins)/D-sub connector (15 pins)
conversion cable (CNCOM-05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.) is necessary.
*3 To connect to the EH-150 series, connect to the serial port of the CPU module.
The module jack (8 pins)/D-sub connector (15 pins) conversion cable (EHRS05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems
Co., Ltd.) is necessary.

1
2.3 Connection Diagram
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC. 2.3.2 RS-422 cable
2.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram

2
 Connection diagram GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RS232 connection diagram 1) SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RXDP
GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RXDN
R
CD/NC*1 1 1 NC RDA1(RXD1+) 3 TXDP
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD RDB1(RXD1-) TXDN
3
4
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD SDA2(TXD2+) 5 TXDG

ER(DTR) 4 7 RV2(DR) SDB2(TXD2-) RXDG
CONNECTION TO
6
SG 5 9 SG RDA2(RXD2+)
HITACHI PLC
7
DR(DSR) 6 5 CS RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RS(RTS) 7 6 RV1(ER) RSA(RTS+) 9
CS(CTS) 8 4 RS
- 9 8 PHL
RSB(RTS-) 10
4
CSA(CTS+) 11
FG FG
CONNECTION TO
CSB(CTS-) 12
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC
FUJI FA PLC
SG 13
RS232 connection diagram 2) NC 14

Shell
CD/NC*1
5
1 1 NC
SD
RD(RXD) 2 2
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
RDA 2 TXDP
CONTROLLER
ER(DTR) 4 7 RV2(DR)
RDB 7 TXDN
SG 5 9 SG
SDA 1 RXDP
DR(DSR) 6 5 CS
SDB 6 RXDN
RS(RTS) 7 6 RV1(ER)
RSA 3
R
TXDG
6
CS(CTS) 8 4 RS
RSB 8 -
CONNECTION TO
- 9 8 PHL
YASKAWA PLC
CSA 4 -
14 ER
CSB 9 -
FG FG
- - -
7
SG 5 RXDG
 Precautions when preparing a cable - - -
(1) Cable length

CONNECTION TO
FG - -
YOKOGAWA PLC
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1GOT connector specifications
(3) HITACHI IES PLC side connector 8
Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES
PLC side module.

For details, refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user's
CONNECTION TO
manual.
CONTROLLER

 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
(3) HITACHI IES PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES
PLC side module.
For details, refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user's
manual.
 Connecting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
(b) For GT14, GT11
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
1.4.3Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) HITACHI IES PLC side
When connecting an intelligent serial port module to a
GOT, a terminating resistor has to be connected to the
intelligent serial port module.
HITACHI IES PLC user's Manual

1
2.4 GOT Side Settings
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2.4.1 Setting communication
2.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
(1) HITACHI HIDIC H 2
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
2.
3
3.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4.
Item Description Range 4
Set this item when change the
4800bps,
CONNECTION TO
transmission speed used for
Transmission 9600bps,
communication with the connected
Speed 19200bps,
FUJI FA PLC
Click! equipment.
38400bps
(Default: 19200bps)
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Data Bit 7bit (fixed)
menu.
the connected equipment.
(Default: 7bit)
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Specify the stop bit length for
2.
SYS TEMPERATURE
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 1bit)
CONTROLLER
Specify whether or not to perform a
3. Set the following items.
Parity
parity check, and how it is performed
Even (fixed)
• Manufacturer: HITACHI during communication.
(Default: Even)
• Controller Type: HITACHI HIDIC H
• I/F: Interface to be used Set the number of retries to be 6
performed when a communication
• Driver: Set either of the following. Retry
error occurs.
0 to 5times
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI HIDIC H (Default: 0time)
YASKAWA PLC
HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2) Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 3sec)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the
Make the settings according to the usage
Delay Time
transmission timing of the
communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms) 7
environment. GOT.
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 0ms)
YOKOGAWA PLC
Specify whether to use the station No.

during communication.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Station No.
If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is Yes or No
Selection
fixed to "0."
(Default: Yes)
POINT
8
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].

CONNECTION TO
1.1.2I/F communication setting

CONTROLLER

(2) HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2)
POINT
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
GT User's Manual
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Item Description Range

4800bps,
Transmission 9600bps,
Speed 19200bps,
equipment.
38400bps
(Default: 19200bps)
Data Bit 7bit (fixed)
(Default: 7bit)
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
(Default: 1bit)
Parity Even (fixed)
(Default: Even)
Set the number of retries to be
Retry 0 to 5times
error occurs.
(Default: 0time)
Set the time period for a
(Default: 3sec)
Set this item to adjust the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms)
GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
Specify whether to use the station No.
Station No.
If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is Yes or No
Selection
fixed to "0."
(Default: Yes)

1
2.5 PLC Side Setting
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(2) For transmission control procedure2
POINT
Item Set value
HITACHI IES PLC
For details of the HITACHI IES PLC, refer to the
Transmission speed
Station No.
19200bps
0
2
following manual.
Data bit 7bit
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC user's Manual
HITACHI IES PLC

Stop bit 1bit
Parity bit Even
 Directly connecting to the CPU Control Method None
For RS-232 communication:
Item Set value RS-232 MODE switch 9
Transmission speed*1*2*3
4800bps, 9600bps,
Communication format
For RS-422 communication: 3
19200bps, 38400bps RS-422 MODE switch 9
CONNECTION TO
Station No. 0 Sum check Done
Data bit 7bit
HITACHI PLC
Stop bit 1bit
Parity bit Even
Control Method DTR control
Communication format RS-232 4
Sum check Done
CONNECTION TO
Protocol transmission control procedure 1
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
FUJI FA PLC
the GOT side.
*2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
2.4.2 Communication detail settings 5
*3 The setting range varies with the connected PLC.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
 Connecting to the intelligent serial port
CONTROLLER
module
(1) For transmission control procedure1
Item Set value

Transmission speed 19200bps
6
Station No. 0
CONNECTION TO
Data bit 7bit
YASKAWA PLC
Stop bit 1bit
Parity bit Even
Control Method None
Communication format
RS-232 MODE switch 2 7
RS-422 MODE switch 2
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Sum check Done
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.
 Setting item
Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.

Device
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device.
Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].
2 - 10 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device settings of HITACHI IES PLC
(1) When specifying an external I/O device
(a) When setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of module No. + slot No. + module bit No.
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Device number
Module internal bit No. (00-95):DEC
Device name Slot No. (0-A) HEX
Module No. (0-5) DEC
(b) When setting a word device
Set the device using the format of module No. + slot No. + module bit No.
For the device name setting, enter "w" before the bit device name.
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
Device number
Module internal bit No. (0-7):DEC
Device name Slot No. (0-A) HEX
Module No. (0-5) DEC
(2) When specifying a remote external I/O device
4
(a) When setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. + module bit
CONNECTION TO
No.
FUJI FA PLC
Device number
Module bit No. (00-95): DEC
Device name Slot No. (0-9) : DEC 5
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
(b) When setting a word device
CONTROLLER
Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. + module bit
No.
For the device name setting, enter "w" before the bit device name.
6
Device number
CONNECTION TO
Module bit No. (0-9): DEC
YASKAWA PLC
Device name Slot No. (0-9) : DEC
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 - 11

2.6.1 HITACHI HIDIC H Series
Device name Setting range Device No. representation
External input (X) X00000 to X05A95

Hexadecimal + Decimal
External output (Y) Y00000 to Y05A95
Remote external input (X) X10000 to X49995

Decimal
Remote external output (Y) Y10000 to Y49995
1st CPU link (L) L0000 to L3FFF
2nd CPU link (L1) L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal
Data area (M) M0000 to M3FFF
*1 TD0 to TD255
On-delay timer (TD)
Single-shot timer (SS)*1 SS0 to SS255

Bit device
Watchdog timer (WDT)*1 WDT0 to WDT255
Monostable timer (MS)*1 MS0 to MS255

Decimal
*1 TMR0 to TMR255
Retentive timer (TMR)
Up counter (CU)*1 CU0 to CU511
Ring counter (RCU)*1 RCU0 to RCU511
Up/Down counter (CT)*1 CT0 to CT511
Bit internal output (R) R0 to R7BF Hexadecimal
Rising edge detection (DIF)*1 DIF0 to DIF511

Decimal
Falling edge detection (DFN)*1 DFN0 to DFN511
Specified bit of the following word devices

Word device bit ―
timer/counter, word internal output
External input (WX) WX0000 to WX05A7

Hexadecimal + Decimal
External output (WY) WY0000 to WY05A7
Remote external input (WX) WX1000 to WX4997

Decimal
Remote external output (WY) WY1000 to WY4997
Word device
First CPU link (WL) WL000 to WL3FF
2nd CPU link (WL1) WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal
Data area (WM) WM000 to WM3FF
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value) (TC)*1 TC0 to TC511 Decimal
Word internal output (WR) WR000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal

*1 Overlapped numbers cannot be used.
*2 Do not set device outside the range.
If the set device is outside the range, the object set by the device within the range may not be displayed.
2 - 12 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC

3
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC
3.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
3.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
3.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
3-1
3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC

Communication
Type
LQP510 RS-232
S10V 3.2.1
LQP520 RS-422
LQP800
LQP000
RS-232
S10mini LQP010 3.2.2
RS-422
LQP011
LQP120
3-2 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
3.2.1 Connecting to S10V
S10V
Communication
module GOT
HITACHI S10mini/S10V
2
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Model Communication
Commun
Cable model Max.
Number of
connectable 3
*1
ication Option device Model
equipment
name module Connection diagram number distance
Type
CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R21301-9S (3m)
HITACHI PLC
or - (Built into GOT)
LQE560 RS-232 15m
RS232 connection diagram
1) GT15-RS2-9P

1)
500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 4
LQP510
communication
LQP520 GT09-C30R41301-9S (3m)
CONNECTION TO
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) module
GT09-C100R41301-9S(10m)
LQE565 RS-422
FUJI FA PLC
GT09-C200R41301-9S(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R41301-9S(30m) 500m
or GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)
2)
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
500m - (Built into GOT)
SYS TEMPERATURE
1)
GT09-C30R41301-9S (3m) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CONTROLLER
GT09-C100R41301-9S(10m)
LQP510 - RS-422 GT09-C200R41301-9S(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT09-C300R41301-9S(30m) 500m
or GT15-RS4-9S

2)
- (Built into GOT) 6
*1 Product manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.For details of the product, contact Hitachi, Ltd.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3-3

3.2.2 Connecting to S10mini
Communication
S10mini module GOT
HITACHI S10mini/S10V
Connection cable

Number of
Commun connectable
Communication Cable model Max.
Series ication Option device Model
module*1 Connection diagram number distance equipment
Type
GT09-C30R21301-9S (3m)
LQE560 or - (Built into GOT)
LQE060 RS-232 15m
LQE160
1) GT15-RS2-9P

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1
1)
S10mini communication
GT09-C30R41301-9S (3m) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) module
LQE565 GT09-C100R41301-9S(10m)
RS-422 GT09-C200R41301-9S(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
LQE165
GT09-C300R41301-9S(30m) 500m
or GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)
2)
*1 Product manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.For details of the product, contact Hitachi, Ltd.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GOT and the PLC. 3.3.2 RS-422 cable
3.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram

2
 Connection diagram GOT side PLC side
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RS232 connection diagram 1) SDA1(TXD1+) 1 2 RD-H
For the GT16, GT15
GOT side SDB1(TXD1-) 2 1 RD-L
(D-sub 9-pin) PLC side RDA1(RXD1+) 3 3 SD-H
3
CD 1 7 RS RDB1(RXD1-) 4 4 SD-L
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD SDA2(TXD2+) 5 6 -
CONNECTION TO
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD SDB2(TXD2-) 6 7 ATT-H
HITACHI PLC
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR RDA2(RXD2+) 7 8 -
SG 5 5 SG RDB2(RXD2-) 8 9 ATT-L
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER RSA(RTS+) 9 5 SG
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD RSB(RTS-) 10
4
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS CSA(CTS+) 11
CONNECTION TO
- 9 *1 9 - CSB(CTS-) 12
FUJI FA PLC
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable SG 13
shield line.
NC 14 *1
For GT14, GT12, GT11
GOT side *1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
(D-sub 9-pin) PLC side shield line.
5
NC 1 1 CD RS422 connection diagram 2)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
GOT side PLC side
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD
CONTROLLER
SDA 1 2 RD-H
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD
RDA 2 3 SD-H
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
RSA 3 6 -
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER
CSA 4 7 ATT-H
6
SG 5 5 SG
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS
CONNECTION TO
SDB 6 1 RD-L
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS
YASKAWA PLC
RDB 7 4 SD-L
- 9 *1 9 -
RSB 8 8 -
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line. CSB 9 *1 9 ATT-L
7
 Precautions when preparing a cable *1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(1) Cable length

8
(3) HITACHI PLC side connector
Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side

module.
CONNECTION TO
For details, refer to the HITACHI PLC user's manual.

CONTROLLER

(1) Cable length
(3) HITACHI PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI PLC
side module.
For details, refer to the HITACHI PLC user's manual.

(1) GOT side
(b) For GT14, GT11

to the following.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
2.
3.
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4.
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
Transmission
transmission speed used for 19200bps, 4
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 19200bps) 115200bps
FUJI FA PLC
Click!
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
(Default: 8bits)
Stop Bit communications.
(Default: 8bits)
1bit/2bits
5
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
CONNECTION TO FUJI
None
SYS TEMPERATURE
menu. parity check, and how it is performed
Parity Even
Odd
2.
CONTROLLER
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: Odd)
channel to be used from the list menu. Set the number of retries to be
Retry 0 to 5times
error occurs.
(Default: 0time)
• Manufacturer: HITACHI Set the time period for a 6
• Controller Type: HITACHI S10mini/S10V Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
• I/F: Interface to be used
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: HITACHI S10mini/S10V
YASKAWA PLC
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300m
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, GOT.
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0)
environment.
POINT
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The communication interface setting can be
POINT data.

manual.
8
GT User's Manual
1.1.2I/F communication setting
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER

3.5.1 Connecting to communication

POINT
module
HITACHI PLC
For details of HITACHI PLCs, refer to the following  Communication settings
manuals.
Make the communication settings of the
HITACHI PLC user's Manual Communication module.
Item Set value

Model name Refer to
*1*2 #0 to #3
Channel No. setting
LQE560
Protocol setting H-7338 protocol
LQE060
Transmission speed 19200bps (fixed)
Communication module LQE160 3.5.1
Data bit 8bits (fixed)
LQE565
Parity bit Odd (fixed)
LQE165
Start bit 1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
*1 The ranges of available channel No. differ depending on the

model of communication module.
*2 Avoid duplication of the channel No.
 Settings by switch
Make the communication settings using each setting
switch.
Setting switches for the channel No.

and the protocol
CN1 MODU, CN2 MODU
(1) Settings of the channel No. and the protocol

F0 12
Switch position Protocol Channel No.
B C DE
CN1
4
8 #0
5
A 6
8
MODU
9 7
9 #1
H-7338 F0 12
A #2
B C DE
CN2
4
5
6
B #3
A
8
MODU
9 7

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. 3.6.1 HITACHI S10mini/S10V
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device
No.
2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device name Setting range
represen
same series.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
tation
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
External input (X) X000 to XFFF
the controller actually used.
External output (Y) Y000 to YFFF
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Internal register (R) R000 to RFFF
may not be monitored. Keep relay (K) K000 to KFFF
3
 Setting item Extended internal register
M000 to MFFF
(M)
CONNECTION TO
Extended internal register
HITACHI PLC
A000 to AFFF
(A)
Hexadec
On-delay timer (T) T000 to T1FF
imal
One-shot timer (U) U000 to U0FF
Up-down counter (C) C00 to CFF 4

Bit device
Global link register (GL)*6 GL000 to GLFFF
CONNECTION TO
Event register (E) E000 to EFFF
FUJI FA PLC
System register (S)*1 S000 to SBFF
Item Information
Transfer register (J) J000 to JFFF
Device*1 The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit Receive register (Q) Q000 to QFFF
of word device.
Specified bit of the 5
Displays the device type and setting range which are following word devices
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Information
SYS TEMPERATURE
selected in [Device]. One-shot timer, up-down
counter, function data
*1 The uppermost bit is b0 and the lowermost bit is b15.
CONTROLLER
Word device bit register, function work ―
register, extended function
POINT work register, backup work
register, backup long-word
work register
Device settings of HITACHI PLC
External input (XW) XW000 to XWFF0
6
(1) When setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of address (word External output (YW) YW000 to YWFF0
CONNECTION TO
unit) + bit number (0 to F).
YASKAWA PLC
Internal register (RW) RW000 to RWFF0
Word device
Extended internal register

MW000 to MWFF0 Hexadec
(MW)
imal
Bit position (0 to F) Extended internal register
AW000 to AWFF0
Device name Address (word units) (AW)
7
(2) When setting a word device Keep relay (KW) KW000 to KWFF0
For external input (XW), external output (YW),
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
On-delay timer (TW) TW000 to TW1F0

internal register (RW), extended internal register
(MW, AW), keep relay (KW), on-delay timer (TW),
one-shot timer (UW), up-down counter (CW),
global link register (GW), event register (EW),
system register (SW), transfer register (JW), and
receive register (QW), set as follows.
8
CONNECTION TO
Fixed to 0
CONTROLLER
Device name Address (word units)

Device
No.
Device name Setting range
represen
tation
One-shot timer (UW) UW000 to UW0F0
Up-down counter (CW) CW00 to CWF0
Global link register (GW) GW000 to GWFF0
Event register (EW) EW000 to EWFF0
System register (SW)*1 SW000 to SWBF0
Transfer register (JW) JW000 to JWFF0
Receive register (QW) QW000 to QWFF0
On-delay timer (current

TC000 to TC1FF
value) (TC)*2
On-delay timer (set value)

TS000 to TS1FF
(TS)*2
One-shot timer (current

UC000 to UC0FF
value) (UC)*2
One-shot timer (set value)

US000 to US0FF
(US)*2
Up-down counter (current

CC00 to CCFF
Word device
value) (CC)*2
Hexadec
Up-down counter (set imal
CS00 to CSFF
value) (CS)*2
Function data register

DW000 to DWFFF
(DW)*4*5
Function work register

FW000 to FWBFF
(FW)*4*5
Extended function work

LWW0000 to LWWFFFF
register (LWW)*4*5
Backup work register

LXW0000 to LXW3FFF
(LXW)*5
Long-word work register

LLL0000 to LLL1FFF
(LLL)*3
Backup Long-word work

LML0000 to LML1FFF
register (LML)*3*4
Floating-point work register

LF0000 to LF1FFF
(LF)*3
Backup single-precision
floating-point work register LG0000 to LG1FFF
(LG)*3
*1 Only reading is possible.

*2 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed.
*4 When it is used with bit specification (bit specification of word
device), the offset function cannot be used.
*5 When bit specification (bit specification of word device) is
performed, the uppermost bit is b0 and the lowermost bit is
b15.
Higher Lower
b0 b1 .......... b14 b15

*6 Device "GL" corresponds to device "G" of the PLC.
3 - 10 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC

4
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
4.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
FUJI FA PLC
4.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
4.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
4.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
4.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
4-1
4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC

Communication
Type
RS-232
F55 4.2.1
RS-485
RS-232
F70 4.2.2
RS-485
MICREX-F
F120S
RS-232
F140S 4.2.3
RS-485
F15 S
4-2 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
4.2.1 Connecting to MICREX-F55
For details on the system configuration on the PLC side, refer to the following section.
4.7 Precautions
2
 When using the RS-232 interface card
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RS-232C
MICREX-F55 GOT
interface card FUJI MICREX-F
Connection cable
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
RS-232C Commun Number of connectable
Model Cable model Max.
interface ication Option device Model equipment
name Connection diagram number distance
card*1 Type
GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
4
or 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C
F55 NV1L-RS2 RS-232 15m
RS232 connection diagram interface card
CONNECTION TO
1) GT15-RS2-9P
FUJI FA PLC
*1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. For details of the product, contact Fuji Electric FA
Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
 When using the RS-232C/485 interface capsule 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
RS-232C/485
MICREX-F55
CONTROLLER
interface capsule
GOT
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
T-link
YASKAWA PLC
RS-232C/485 Commun Number of connectable
Model Cable model Max. equipment
interface ication Option device Model
name
capsule*1 Type
7
GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m)
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

YOKOGAWA PLC
or 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C/

F55 FFK120A-C10 RS-232 15m
RS232 connection diagram 485 interface capsule
1) GT15-RS2-9P
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4-3

 When connecting to multiple PLCs
Connection cable
GOT
RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485
interface capsule interface capsule
T-link T-link
MICREX-F55 MICREX-F55

capsule*1 Type

1)
GT09-C30R41001-6T(3m) 500m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)

GT09-C100R41001-6T(10m) 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs
F55 FFK120A-C10 RS-485 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 (RS-232C/485 interface
GT09-C200R41001-6T(20m)
GT09-C300R41001-6T(30m) capsules)
GT15-RS4-9S
or 500m
- (Built into GOT)
2)
*2 Including the cable length of the option devices.

4.2.2 Connecting to MICREX-F70 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
For details on the system configuration on the PLC side, refer to the following.
MONITORING
4.7 Precautions
 When using general-purpose interface modules

2
General-purpose
MICREX-F70 interface module GOT
CONNECTION TO
FUJI MICREX-F
HITACHI IES PLC

Connection cable
PLC Connection cable GOT 3

General-purpose Commun Number of connectable
CONNECTION TO
module*1 Type
HITACHI PLC
GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m) - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 general-
F70 NC1L-RS2 RS-232 or 15m purpose interface
RS232 connection diagram 1) module
GT15-RS2-9P
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
 When using the RS-232C/485 interface capsule
MICREX-F70
RS-232C/485
interface capsule 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GOT
SYS TEMPERATURE
Connection cable
CONTROLLER
T-link
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
capsule*1 Type
GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m) - (Built into GOT)

or 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C/485
F70 FFK120A-C10 RS-232 15m
GT15-RS2-9P
interface capsule
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 When connecting to multiple PLCs (using RS-232C/485 interface capsules)
Connection cable
GOT
RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485
interface capsule interface capsule
T-link T-link
MICREX-F70 MICREX-F70

capsule*1 Type

1)
GT09-C30R41001-6T(3m) 500m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C100R41001-6T(10m) 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs
F70 FFK120A-C10 RS-485 GT09-C200R41001-6T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 (RS-232C/485 interface
GT09-C300R41001-6T(30m) GT15-RS4-9S capsules)
or 500m
RS485 connection diagram - (Built into GOT)
2)

1
 When connecting to multiple PLCs (using general-purpose interface modules)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
General-purpose General-purpose
MICREX-F70 MICREX-F70 GOT
interface module interface module
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable

General-
Model
name
purpose
interface
ication
Cable model
Connection diagram number
Max.
distance
Option device Model equipment 3
Type
module*1
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
1 GOT for up to 31 PLCs
GT09-C30R41001-6T(3m) 500m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
(general-purpose interface
GT09-C100R41001-6T(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 modules)
F70 NC1L-RS4 RS-485 GT09-C200R41001-6T(20m)
GT15-RS4-9S
GT09-C300R41001-6T(30m)
or
500m
- (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for up to 10 PLCs
(general-purpose interface
4
modules)
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

4.2.3 Connecting to MICREX-F120S/140S/15[]S
For details on the system configuration on the PLC side, refer to the following.
4.7 Precautions
 When using general-purpose interface modules

MICREX-F General-purpose
120S/140S/ interface module GOT
FUJI MICREX-F
15□S
Connection cable

Number of
General-purpose Commun
Model Cable model Max. connectable
module*1 Type
F120S GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m) - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 general-

F140S FFU120B RS-232 or 15m purpose interface
F15 S RS232 connection diagram 1) module
GT15-RS2-9P
 When using the RS-232C/485 interface capsule

MICREX-F
RS-232C/485
120S/140S/
interface capsule
15□S
GOT
Connection cable
T-link

Number of
RS-232C/485 Commun
capsule*1 Type
F120S GT09-C30R21003-25P(3m) - (Built into GOT)

or 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C/
F140S FFK120A-C10 RS-232 15m
485 interface capsule
F15 S RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

1
 When connecting to multiple PLCs (using RS-232C/485 interface capsules)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Connection cable
MONITORING
GOT
RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485
interface capsule interface capsule 2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
T-link T-link
MICREX-F MICREX-F
120S/140S/ 120S/140S/
15□S 15□S
3
CONNECTION TO
Number of
RS-232C/485 Commun
HITACHI PLC
capsule*1 Type

1)
4
GT09-C30R41001-6T(3m) 500m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) 1 GOT for up to 6
F120S GT09-C100R41001-6T(10m) PLCs (RS-232C/
CONNECTION TO
F140S FFK120A-C10 RS-485 GT09-C200R41001-6T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
485 interface
F15 S GT09-C300R41001-6T(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
FUJI FA PLC
capsules)
or 500m
2)
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

 When connecting to multiple PLCs (using general-purpose interface modules)
MICREX-F General-purpose MICREX-F General-purpose

120S/140S/ interface module 120S/140S/ interface module GOT
15□S 15□S
Connection cable

General-
Model purpose Cable model Max.
ication Option device Model equipment
name interface Connection diagram number distance
Type
module*1

1 GOT for
*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) up to 31 PLCs
500m
GT09-C30R41001-6T(3m) (general-purpose
F120S GT09-C100R41001-6T(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
interface modules)
F140S FFU120B RS-485 GT09-C200R41001-6T(20m) GT15-RS4-9S
F15 S GT09-C300R41001-6T(30m)
500m 1 GOT for
or up to 10 PLCs
- (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection diagram 2) (general-purpose
interface modules)
4 - 10 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GOT and the PLC.
4.3.1 RS-232 cable

2
 Connection diagram
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
For GT16, GT15
GOT side
(D-sub 9-pin) PLC side
CD
RD(RXD)
1
2
4
2
RS
SD
3
CONNECTION TO
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
HITACHI PLC
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
4
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS
CONNECTION TO
- 9 1 FG
FUJI FA PLC
For GT12, GT11
GOT side
(D-sub 9-pin) PLC side
NC 1 1 FG 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD
SYS TEMPERATURE
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
CONTROLLER
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER
RS(RTS) 7 4 RS 6
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
- 9 8 CD

(1) Cable length 7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

(3) FUJI FA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the FUJI FA PLC
side module. 8
For details, refer to the user's FUJI FA PLC manual.
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 - 11

4.3.2 RS-485 cable
GOT side*2 PLC side*1 PLC side*1

SDA
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDA
SDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDB
RDA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDA
RDB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RDB
SG
SG 13 SG
FG
RSA(RTS+) 9 FG
CSA(CTS+) 11 *3 *3
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell
*1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal.

*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.
■ Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
GOT side*2 PLC side*1 PLC side*1

SDA
RDA 2 SDA
SDB
RDB 7 SDB
RDA
SDA 1 RDA
RDB
SDB 6 RDB
SG
SG 5 SG
FG
RSA 3 FG
CSA 4 *3 *3
RSB 8
CSB 9
*1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal.



1
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Cable length
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
(3) FUJI FA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the FUJI FA PLC
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
side module.
For details, refer to the user's FUJI FA PLC manual.

(1) GOT side 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
(b) For GT14, GT11
4
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor,
referFor the procedure to set the terminating resistor,
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
(2) FUJI FA PLC side
When connecting a FUJI FA PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected.
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

Make the settings according to the usage environment.
settings)
2.
3.

4. 9600bps,
19200bps,
Transmission transmission speed used for
38400bps,
Speed communication with the connected
57600bps,
equipment. (Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Click! the connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
Stop Bit 1bit/2bits
communications. (Default: 1bit)
None
Parity Even
(Default: Even)
Odd
menu. Set the number of retries to be
Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the error occurs. (Default: 0time)
channel to be used from the list menu. Set the time period for a
3. Set the following items. (Default: 3sec)
Specify the host address (station No.
• Manufacturer: FUJI of the GOT to which the PLC is
Host Address 0 to 99
• Controller Type: FUJI MICREX-F connected) in the connected network.
• I/F: Interface to be used (Default: 0)
• Driver: FUJI MICREX-F Set this item to adjust the

Delay Time 0 to 300ms
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
communication request from the
GOT. (Default: 5ms)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
environment.
POINT
4.4.2 Communication detail settings (1) Host address
When connecting to PLC by RS-232
communication, set the Host Address to "0".
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (2) Communication interface setting by the Utility
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manual.
For details, refer to the following. GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (3) Precedence in communication settings

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
4.5.1 Connecting to NV1L-RS2,
POINT
NC1L-RS2
FUJI FA PLC
For details of FUJI FA PLCs, refer to the following  Communication settings 2
manuals.
Make the communication settings using setting
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC user's Manual
HITACHI IES PLC

switches.
Item Set value

Model name Refer to
Command-setting-type start-stop
RS-232C MODE
NV1L-RS2 synchronization, nonsequence format
interface card 4.5.1
NC1L-RS2
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
3
General-purpose interface Data bit *1 8bits or 7bits
NC1L-RS4 4.5.2
module
CONNECTION TO
FFU120B 4.5.3 Even or Odd
Parity bit*1
Done, None
HITACHI PLC
RS-232C/485
FFK120A-C10 4.5.4
interface capsule Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits
Initializing method By switch
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

4
CONNECTION TO
switch.
FUJI FA PLC
(For the NV1L-RS2) (For the NC1L-RS2)
Character configuration
switches
Operation mode
setting switch
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
(Front view) (Rear view) (Front view) (Rear view) 6
(1) Setting of the MODE
CONNECTION TO
Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch.
Switch position YASKAWA PLC

MODE
NV1L-RS2 NC1L-RS2
Command-setting-type
start-stop
synchronization,
1 1 7
nonsequence format
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(2) Setting of Transmission speed, Stop bit, Data bit, 4.5.2 Connecting to NC1L-RS4
Parity bit, Initializing method
For the NV1L-RS2 For the NC1L-RS2  Communication settings
switches.
Item Set value

MODE
synchronization, nonsequence format
Data bit*1 8bits or 7bits
Switch No. Even or Odd

Setting item Set value Parity bit*1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Done, None
Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

speed 19200bps OFF ON ON Initializing method By switch
1bit ON Station No.*1*2 0 to 99
Stop bit
2bits OFF Terminating resistor *3 ON or OFF
7bits ON
Data bit *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
8bits OFF *2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
Even ON *3 Turn ON the terminating switch of a general-purpose
Odd OFF interface module which will be a terminal.
Parity bit
Done ON
None OFF
Initializing
By switch ON switch.
method
RS-485 station No.

switches Character configuration
switches
Terminator switch
MODE switch
(Front view) (Rear view)
(1) Setting of the MODE

Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch.
MODE Switch position
synchronization, nonsequence 3
format

(2) Setting of the station No. 4.5.3 Connecting to FFU120B 1
PROCEDURES FOR
Make the station No. using RS-485 station No.
switches.  Communication settings
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Station No. Make the communication settings using setting
switches.
Item Set value

0 to 99
MODE
Command-setting-type start-stop 2
CONNECTION TO
Transmission speed*1
HITACHI IES PLC

9600bps, 19200bps
(3) Connecting terminating resistors
Data bit*1 8bits or 7bits
Turn ON/OFF the terminating resistor using RS-485
terminating resistor ON/OFF switch. Even or Odd
Parity bit*1
Done, None
ON
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits
3
Station No.*1*2 0 to 99
CONNECTION TO
*3 ON or OFF
(4) Setting of Transmission speed, Stop bit, Data bit, Terminating resistor
HITACHI PLC
Parity bit, Initializing method *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Make the settings using the character configuration *2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
switches. *3 Turn ON the terminating switch of a general-purpose
interface module which will be a terminal.
4
CONNECTION TO
switch.
FUJI FA PLC
MODE switch
RS-485 station No.
5
switches
Switch No.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SYS TEMPERATURE
Terminator switch
Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON
CONTROLLER
speed 19200bps OFF ON ON
1bit ON switches
Stop bit
2bits OFF
7bits ON (Front view) (Rear view)
Data bit
8bits OFF (1) Setting of the MODE
6
Even ON Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch.
CONNECTION TO
Odd OFF
YASKAWA PLC
Parity bit MODE Switch position
Done ON
None OFF
synchronization, nonsequence
Initializing 1
By switch ON format
method RS-232C 1:1
format 2
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
RS-232C 1:1,
and RS-485 1:N
3
format
RS-485 1:N
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(2) Setting of the station No. 4.5.4 Connecting to FFK120A-C10
switches.  Communication settings
Station No. Make the communication settings using setting
switches.
Item Set value

0 to 99
RS-232C 1:1
(3) Connecting terminating Command-setting-type start-stop
resistors *4
MODE
Turn ON/OFF the terminating resistor using RS-485 RS-232C 1:1,
terminating resistor ON/OFF switch. and RS-485 1:N
ON synchronization, nonsequence format
RS-485 1:N

*1 8bits or 7bits
Data bit
(4) Setting of Transmission speed, Stop bit, Data bit, Even or Odd
Parity bit, Initializing method Parity bit*1
Done, None
Make the settings using the character configuration
*1 1bit, 2bits
switches. Stop bit
8
7 Station No.*1*2 0 to 99
6 *3
Terminating resistor ON or OFF
5
4 T-link channel switch
3 FUJI FA PLC user's Manual
2
T-link terminating resistor
1 *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
ON
*2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
Switch No. *3 Turn ON the terminating switch of a general-purpose
Setting item Set value interface module which will be a terminal.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *4 Set as necessary.
Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON
speed 19200bps OFF ON ON  Settings by switch
1bit ON Make the communication settings using each setting
Stop bit
2bits OFF switch.
7bits ON
Data bit
8bits OFF
Even ON
Odd OFF switches
Parity bit
Done ON
None OFF Baudrate setting switch
Initializing
By switch ON
method
MODE switch
RS-485 terminating resistor
T-link channel switch ON/OFF switch
T-link terminating resistor
ON/OFF switch RS-485 station No.
switches

(1) Setting of the MODE (5) Transmission speed settings
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch. Make the settings using the baudrate setting switches.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
MODE Switch position 8
7
synchronization, nonsequence 5
1
format 4
RS-232C 1:1
2
3
2
1
synchronization, nonsequence ON
CONNECTION TO
format 2
HITACHI IES PLC

RS-232C 1:1, Switch No.
and RS-485 1:N Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Transmission 9600bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
3 speed
format 19200bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
RS-485 1:N
3
(2) Setting of the station No.
4.5.5 Station number setting
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
switches.
Set each station number so that no station number
Station No. overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
0 to 99
connection order. There is no problem even if station 4
numbers are not consecutive.
CONNECTION TO
Station Station Station Station Station
No.3 No.0 No.1 No.15 No.6
FUJI FA PLC
Turn ON/OFF the terminating resistor using RS-485 GOT
terminating resistor ON/OFF switch.
ON 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Examples of station number setting
SYS TEMPERATURE
(1) Direct specification
CONTROLLER
Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when
(4) Setting of Stop bit, Data bit, Parity bit, Initializing setting device.
method
Make the settings using the character configuration Specification range
switches. 0 to 99 6
8
CONNECTION TO
7
YASKAWA PLC
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
7
Switch No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
disable OFF OFF OFF

1bit ON
Stop bit
2bits OFF
7bits ON
Data bit
8bits OFF
Even ON 8
Odd OFF
Parity bit
Done ON
CONNECTION TO
None OFF
CONTROLLER
Initializing
By switch ON
method

are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the POINT
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of FUJI FA PLC
depending on the models, even though belonging to the (1) When setting a bit device
same series. Set the device using the format of word number
(DEC) + bit No. (0 to F (HEX)).
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
Bit No.(HEX)
may not be monitored. Device name Word No.(DEC)
 Setting item (2) When setting a word device

For direct access (W24) and user file (W30 to
W109, W9), set as follows.
Word number
Device name File number
4.6.1 FUJI MICREX-F Series
Item Information Device No.

Set the device name, device number, and bit number. representation
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of I/O relay (B) B0000 to B511F
Device
word device.
The uppermost bit is b0 and the lowermost bit is b15. Auxiliary relay (M) M0000 to M511F
Displays the device type and setting range which are Keep relay (K) K0000 to K063F
Information
selected in [Device].
Special relay (F)*1 F0000 to F125F Decimal +
Set the monitor target of the set device. Hexadecimal
Annunciator relay
Network A0000 to A045F
Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of (A)
No. the specified station No.
Differential relay (D) D0000 to D063F
Bit device
Link memory (L) L0000 to L511F
Timer output
T000 to T511
(0.01s) (T)
Timer output Decimal

T512 to T999
(0.1s) (T)
Counter output (C) C000 to C511
Specified bit of the following

word devices
Word device bit*5 ―
Direct access,
user file
I/O relay (WB) WB000 to WB511
Auxiliary relay (WM) WM000 to WM511

Word device
Keep relay (WK) WK000 to WK063

Decimal
Special relay (WF)*1 WF000 to WF125
Annunciator relay
WA000 to WA045
(WA)

Device No. 1
representation
PROCEDURES FOR
Differential relay
WD000 to WD063
PREPARATORY
(WD)
MONITORING
Link memory (WL) WL000 to WL511 Decimal
Direct access
W24:0000 to W24:0255
(W24)*6*7
User file (W30)*4*6*7 2

User file (W31)*4*6*7 W30:0000 to W30:4095
CONNECTION TO
: W31:0000 to W31:4095
HITACHI IES PLC

User file :
(W108)*4*6*7 W108:0000 to W108:4095
User file W109:0000 to W109:4095
Word device
(W109)*4*6*7
Data memory
(BD)*2
BD0 to BD4095 3
Timer set value
CONNECTION TO
TS0 to TS511 Decimal
(0.01s) (TS)*2*3
HITACHI PLC
Timer current value
TR0 to TR511
(0.01s) (TR)*2*3
Timer current value

W9:0000 to W9:0487
(0.1s) (W9)*2*3
Counter set value

4
CS0 to CS511
(CS)*2*3
CONNECTION TO
Counter current
FUJI FA PLC
CR0 to CR511
value (CR)*2*3
*3 Decimal points are not displayed.
*4 To read/write data from/to a user file, set SI data for the data
format of the PLC CPU and 16 bits for data length on GT 5
Designer3.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
With any setting other than the above, the PLC does not
SYS TEMPERATURE
operate normally.
CONTROLLER
Data format of the PLC
GT Designer3 setting
CPU
SI (Binary 16-bit length) Device data bit: 16 bits
DI (Binary 32-bit length) Cannot be used

6
BD (8-digit BCD) Cannot be used
CONNECTION TO
*5 As bit specification of a word device is performed after the
GOT reads the value, do not change the value in the
YASKAWA PLC
sequence program during this period.
*6 When it is used with bit specification (bit specification of word
device), the offset function cannot be used.
*7 When bit specification (bit specification of word device) is
performed, the uppermost bit is b0 and the lowermost bit is
b15.
Higher Lower 7
b0 b1 .......... b14 b15
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

4.7 Precautions
 Station No. settings of the PLC side
In the system configuration, the PLC with the station
number set with the host address must be included.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following.
 System configuration of the PLC side

GOT can communicate in a system configuration where
NC1L-PS4, FFU120B and FFK120A-C10 are mixed.
When using FFK120A-C10, the number of PLCs that
can communicate is at most 6 units.
 GOT clock control

The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC
with the station number set with the host address.
following.

4.7 Precautions
5
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS
5.
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 11 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
5.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
5-1
5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

Communication
Type
PXR3
PXR4
RS-232 5.2.1
PXR5
Micro PXR9
Controller X PXG4
PXG5
RS-485 5.2.2
PXG9
PXH9
5-2 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
5.2.1 Connecting to PXR3, PXR4, PXR5 or PXR9
MONITORING
 When connecting via the RS-232 communication
PXR3,PXR4, PXR3,PXR4, Interface

GOT
2
PXR5,PXR9 PXR5,PXR9 converter FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable 2)
Connection cable 1) 3
Temperat
CONNECTION TO
ure Connection cable 1) Interface converter Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
HITACHI PLC
connectable
Cable model Commun Cable model equipment
Model Max. Model Max.
Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model
name distance name distance
number Type number
RS485 500m RC-77*1 RS-232 RS232 connection 15m

connection diagram 1) diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
PXR3 Up to 31
- (Built into GOT)
PXR4 RS485 RS232 connection temperature
500m SI-30A*2 RS-232 15m
PXR5 connection diagram 2) diagram 2) controllers
PXR9 GT15-RS2-9P for 1 GOT
- (Built into GOT)

5
RS485 RS232 connection
500m KS-485*3 RS-232 15m
CONNECTION TO FUJI
connection diagram 3) diagram 2)
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT15-RS2-9P
CONTROLLER
*1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact SYSMEXRA CO., LTD.
*2 Product manufactured by LINEEYE CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact LINEEYE CO., LTD.
*3 Product manufactured by System Sacom corp. For details of the product, contact System Sacom corp.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5-3

 When connecting via RS-485 communication
PXR3,PXR4, PXR3,PXR4,
GOT
PXR5,PXR9 PXR5,PXR9
Connection cable
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Model Communic Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name ation Type Connection diagram number distance
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
*1
PXR3 RS485 connection diagram 4) 500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2 Up to 31
PXR4 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2 temperature
RS-485
PXR5 controllers
RS485 connection diagram 6) 500m GT15-RS4-TE
PXR9 for 1 GOT
RS485 connection diagram 9) 500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
5.2.2 Connecting to PXG4, PXG5, PXG9 or PXH9
 When connecting to one temperature controller

PXG4,PXG5,
GOT
PXG9,PXH9 FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH
Connection cable
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT

Communic Cable model Max. Number of connectable equipment
Model name Option device Model
ation Type Connection diagram number distance
PXG4
- (Built into GOT)
PXG5
RS-232 ZZPPXH1*TK4H4563*1 3m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT
PXG9
PXH9 GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by FUJI SYS CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact FUJI SYS CO., LTD.

1
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (RS-232 communication)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
PXG4,PXG5, PXG4,PXG5, Interface
GOT
PXG9,PXH9 PXG9,PXH9 converter
Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable 1)
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter Connection cable 2) GOT
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model
name
Connection diagram
Max.
distance
Model
name
Model
name
Connection diagram
Max.
distance
Option device Model equipment 3
number number
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into
HITACHI PLC
RS485 RS232 GOT)
500m RC-77*1 RS-232 15m
connection diagram 1) connection diagram 1)
PXG4 Up to 31
GT15-RS2-9P
PXG5 temperature
PXG9 controllers 4
PXH9 for 1 GOT
- (Built into
RS485 RS232 GOT)
CONNECTION TO
500m K3SC-10*2 RS-232 15m
FUJI FA PLC
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact SYSMEXRA CO., LTD.
*2 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
5
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (RS-485 communication)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
PXG4,PXG5, PXG4,PXG5,
GOT
PXG9,PXH9 PXG9,PXH9
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
Connection cable

Number of connectable
Model Communic Cable model Max.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
*1
PXG4 RS485 connection diagram 4) 500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
PXG5 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2 Up to 31 temperature
RS-485
PXG9 controllers for 1 GOT
RS485 connection diagram 6) 500m GT15-RS4-TE
PXH9

500m
- (Built into GOT)
8
RS485 connection diagram 9) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER

The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3)
GOT and the temperature controller.
Interface
converter side
5.3.1 RS-232 cable GOT side (K3SC-10)
- 1 3 SG
 Connection diagram RD(RXD) 2 6 RD
RS232 connection diagram 1) SD(TXD) 3 5 SD

Interface ER(DTR) 4
converter side
GOT side (RC-77*1) SG 5
CD 1 1 CD DR(DSR) 6
RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD RS(RTS) 7
SD(TXD) 3 3 TXD CS(CTS) 8
ER(DTR) 4 4 DTR NC 9
SG 5 5 SG FG -
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
RS(RTS) 7 7 RTS
CS(CTS) 8 8 CTS
(1) Cable length
NC NC
9 9
FG -
*1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RS232 connection diagram 2) (3) FUJI SYS temperature controller side connector
Interface Use the connector compatible with the FUJI SYS
converter side temperature controller side.
GOT side (SI-30A*1,KS-485) For details, refer to the user's manual of the FUJI SYS
NC 1 1 FG
temperature controller.
RD(RXD) 2 3 RXD
SD(TXD) 3 2 TXD
ER(DTR) 4 20 DTR
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
RS(RTS) 7 4 RTS
CS(CTS) 8 5 CTS
NC 9 9 NC
FG - Other than NC
above
*1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode.

5.3.2 RS-485 cable 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Interface Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/2W)*2

converter Temperature Temperature
controller side
2
(RC-77) controller side
+*1
TXD+ +*1
-*1
TXD- -*1
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
FG
RXD+ *3 *3
RXD-
*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
Model of temperature controller

3
Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5/9 PXG4 PXG5/9 PXH9
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
CONNECTION TO
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
HITACHI PLC
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
Terminating resistor should be provided outside for a interface converter which will be a terminal, with the terminating switch
turned OFF.
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
(SI-30A)*2 controller side controller side
+*1
SD/RD+ +*1
-*1
SD/RD- -*1
GND
+5VIN *3 *3
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
6
Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal.
CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection diagram 3) YASKAWA PLC

(KS-485)*2 controller side
+*1
controller side
7
TRD+ 2 +*1
-*1
TRD- 3 -*1
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
SG 1
*3 *3
FG 9

8
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal.


Temperature Temperature
GOT side*3 controller side controller side
+*1
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 +*1
-*1
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 -*1
NC 1
*4
SG 2
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
NC 3
Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/2W)*2
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
NC 13
RSA(RTS+) 14
NC 15
RSB(RTS-) 16
NC 17
CSA(CTS+) 18
NC 19
CSB(CTS-) 20
*4

+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16


1
+*
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 +*1
-* 1
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 -*1
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
*4
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/2W)*2
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
NC 14
Shell
*4
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16


RS485 connection diagram 6) 1
GOT side*3
PROCEDURES FOR
controller side controller side
+*1
PREPARATORY
SDA1 1 +*1
MONITORING
SDB1 -*1
2
-*1
RDA1 3
*4 *4
RDB1 4
SDA2 5
SDB2 6 2
RDA2 7
RDB2 8
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
SG 9
FG 10
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. 3
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC


4
Interface
CONNECTION TO
(K3SC-10)*2 controller side controller side
+*1
FUJI FA PLC
+ 11 +*1
-*1
- 8 -*1
*3 *3
*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table. 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminals.

CONNECTION TO
+*1
+*1
YASKAWA PLC
SDA 1
SDB -*1
6
-*1
RDA 2
*4 *4
RDB 7
SG 5
RSA 3
7
CSA 4
RSB
CONNECTION TO
8
YOKOGAWA PLC
CSB 9
+
Pin No.
15
Pin No.
7
Pin No.
1
Pin No.
7
Pin No.
1
Pin No.
14
8
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER


+*1
SDA +*1
-*1
SDB
-*1
RDA
*4 *4
RDB
SG
+ 15 7 1 7 1 14
- 14 8 2 8 2 16
*3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 2-wire type (1Pair)
Terminating resistor : 110Ω

(1) Cable length
(3) FUJI SYS temperature controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the FUJI SYS
temperature controller side.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the FUJI SYS

(1) GOT side
(b) For GT14, GT11
to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) FUJI SYS temperature controller side
When connecting a FUJI SYS temperature controller to
the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected.
5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting
5 - 10 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
2.
3
3.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4.
Set this item when change the 9600bps, 4
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
CONNECTION TO
Speed
FUJI FA PLC
Click!
(Default: 8bits)
Specify the stop bit length for 5
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
menu. (Default: 1bit)
CONTROLLER
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Parity
None
Even
channel to be used from the list menu. during communication.
Odd
(Default: Odd)
3. Set the following items. Set the number of retries to be
• Manufacturer: FUJI Retry

error occurs.
0 to 5times 6
• Controller Type: FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH (Default: 0time)
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
• Driver: FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Specify the host address (station No.
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. of the GOT to which the temperature
Make the settings according to the usage Host Address controller is connected) in the 1 to 255
environment. connected network. 7
(Default: 1)
5.4.2 Communication detail settings Set this item to adjust the
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
GOT.
(Default: 5ms)
POINT Select the communication format.
(Default: 1)
The settings of connecting equipment can be Format 1: 8
Format Accessible to PXR/PXG/PXH 1/2

Format 2:
Accessible to PXR/PXG,
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
CONNECTION TO
Not accessible to PXH

CONTROLLER
5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 - 11

POINT
(1) Host address
Do not specify a number between 200 and 215.
(2) Format
• When connecting to PXH, specify the format 1.
• When connecting to only PXR/PXG, specifying
the format 2 is recommended.
(3) Delay Time
Set the delay time to 5ms or more.
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
5.5.2 Connecting to PXG4, PXG5 or
POINT
PXG9
(1) FUJI SYS temperature controller
For details of FUJI SYS temperature controller, 2
refer to the following manual.  Communication settings
CONNECTION TO
User's Manual of the FUJI SYS temperature
HITACHI IES PLC

Make the communication settings by operating the key
controller
of the temperature controller.
(2) Interface converter
For details on communication settings of the (1) RS-485 communication settings
interface converter, refer to the following manual.
Item Set value
User's Manual of interface converter
Transmission speed *1 9600bps, 19200bps 3
CONNECTION TO
Model name Refer to
*1 Even, Odd, None
Parity bit
PXR3, PXR4, PXR5,
HITACHI PLC
5.5.1
PXR9 Stop bit*1 1bit (fixed)
Temperature controller
PXG4, PXG5, PXG9 5.5.2 Station No. *2 1 to 255
PXH9 5.5.3 Communication Read only permission or read and overwrite
RC-77
SI-30A
5.5.4
5.5.5
permissions*3 permission
4
Interface converter *2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
KS-485 5.5.6
CONNECTION TO
units.
K3SC-10 5.5.7 *3 Set as necessary.
FUJI FA PLC
(2) RS-232 communication settings (PC loader
5.5.1 Connecting to PXR3/4/5/9 communication)
 Communication settings
Item
Set value
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
of the temperature controller. Parity bit None (fixed)
CONTROLLER
Item Set value Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Parity bit*1 Even, Odd, None

6
Stop bit 1bit (fixed)
CONNECTION TO
Station No.*2 1 to 255
YASKAWA PLC
Communication protocol MODBUS

units.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

5.5.3 Connecting to PXH9 5.5.4 Connecting to interface
converter (RC-77)
Make the communication settings by operating the key  Communication settings
of the temperature controller. Make the communication settings using setting
(1) RS-485 communication settings switches.
Item Set value Item Set value

*1 *1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Transmission speed
Data bit 8bits (fixed) MANUAL-AUTO AUTO
Parity bit*1 Even, Odd, None DCE/DTE switching DCE
Stop bit 1bit (fixed) RS-422/485 switching RS-485
*2 Terminating resistor
Station No. 1 to 255 OFF
selection
*2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other *1 Adjust with GOT and temperature controller settings.
units.
(2) RS-232 communication settings (PC loader  Settings by switch

communication) RS-485 communication
RS-422/485 switch setting switch
Item Set value
Terminating resistor
*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps DCE/DTE switch
Transmission speed selection switch
Data bit 8bits (fixed) BIT RATE
Parity bit*1
1 2 34 5 6
Even, Odd, None ON-OFF
TERMINATOR
422-485 DCE-DTE RTS-DTR
RESET
MANUAL-AUTO MONITOR

Station No. 1 (fixed)
POWER
DATA OUT
TXD+
TXD-
FG
RXD+
RXD-
DATA CH
FG
(1) Settings of transmission speed and MANUAL-AUTO
MANUAL-AUTO MONITOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
BIT RATE
Switch No.
1 2 3 4
9600bps ON ON OFF
Transmission
19200bps OFF OFF ON
speed
38400bps ON OFF ON
MANUAL-
AUTO ON
AUTO

(2) Settings of DCE/DTE, RS-422/485 and terminating 5.5.5 Connecting to interface 1
converter (SI-30A)
PROCEDURES FOR
resistor selection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
DCE/DTE DCE
DCE-DTE  Communication settings
422-485
RS-422/485 RS-485 switches.
Terminating resistor TERMINATOR Item Set value

2
OFF ON-OFF
selection Transmission speed 9600bps
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
MANUAL-AUTO AUTO
DCE/DTE switching DCE
ON/OFF
selection*1
*1 Set as necessary.
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
RS-232C/RS-485
CONVERTER
4
DCE/DTE switch RS-232C
DTE DCE
SW A
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
DIP SW B:
RS-485
DRIVER Communication
SD/RD ACTIVE setting switch
A B
SG
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
AC 100V FG
CONTROLLER
(1) Settings of transmission speed, MANUAL-AUTO
and terminating resistor selection
Switch No. of DIP SWB 6

1 2 3 4 5
CONNECTION TO
Transmission
YASKAWA PLC
9600bps ON ON OFF
speed
MANUAL-AUTO AUTO ON
Terminating Enable ON
resistor
Disable OFF
selection*1
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(2) Setting of DCE/DTE switching
DCE/DTE DCE
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

5.5.6 Connecting to interface 5.5.7 Connecting to interface
converter (KS-485) converter (K3SC-10)
 Communication settings  Communication settings

Make the communication settings using setting Make the communication settings by operating the DIP
switches. switch of the temperature controller.
Item Set value Item Set value

Transmission speed 9600bps Transmission speed *1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Terminating resistor Data bit 8bits
ON/OFF
selection*1
Parity bit*1 Odd, even, none
Stop bit 1bit
 Settings by switch Communication Type RS-232C RS-485

Echo back Without
RS-485
*1 Make the same setting as that of GOT side.
 Settings by DIP switch

Communication
setting switch
Terminal block
for RS-422/485
communication
DIP switch
RS-232C
Front Rear
(1) Settings of transmission speed and terminating

Terminal block
resistor selection for RS-232
communication
Switch No.
1 2 3 4*2 5 6*2 7 8 Front of K3SC-10 body Inside of K3SC-10 body
(When removing the front cover)
Transmission
9600bps ON OFF ON — ON —
speed (1) Transmission speed settings
Terminating Enable ON ON
resistor Transmission speed Switch No.
*1 Disable OFF OFF
selection (bps) 1 2 3
*2 Disabled. 9600 OFF OFF OFF Set these
switches.
19200 ON OFF ON
SW
38400 OFF ON ON
ON

(2) Settings of data length, parity bit, stop bit, master/ 5.5.8 Station number setting 1
PROCEDURES FOR
slave device and echoback
Set each station number so that no station number overlaps.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
connection order. There is no problem even if station
No.3 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6
2
GOT
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
SW
ON Examples of station number setting

When setting the device, specify the station number of the
Set these switches.
temperature controller of which data is to be changed. 3
Switch No. Specification range
CONNECTION TO
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 to 199
HITACHI PLC
216 to 255
Stop bit 1bit ON
Even OFF OFF

POINT
Parity bit Odd ON OFF
4
Specifying a station No. between 200 and 215
(Example of specifying the station No. 215)
CONNECTION TO
None OFF ON
1. Set the station No. to "200".
FUJI FA PLC
Communicati RS-232C
OFF OFF
on Type RS-485
2. Input "215" to the internal device GD10.
Echo back Without OFF
3. The station No. 215 is specified.
5
For details, refer to (2) Indirect specification shown
CONNECTION TO FUJI
below.
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
(2) Indirect specification
When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using
the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 200 to 215 on GT 6
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
CONNECTION TO
the temperature controller.
YASKAWA PLC
Specification Compatible
Setting range
station NO. device
200 GD10
201 GD11
202 GD12 7
203 GD13
CONNECTION TO
204 GD14
YOKOGAWA PLC
205 GD15
206 GD16 1 to 255
207 GD17 For the setting other than the above, error
208 GD18 (dedicated device is out of range) will
occur.
209
210
GD19
GD20
8
211 GD21
212 GD22
CONNECTION TO
213 GD23
CONTROLLER
214 GD24
215 GD25

not be monitored.
 Setting item
Item Description

Device*1
Information Displays the device type which is selected in [Device].(Bit/Word)
Set the monitor target of the set device.
To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No.

Network 1 to 119, 216 to 255 : To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No.
Station No.
200 to 215: To specify the station No. of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of
GOT data register (GD).*1
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register.
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range
200 GD10
201 GD11 1 to 255

(If setting a value outside the
: :
range above, a device range
214 GD24 error occurs.)
215 GD25
POINT
The device setting of FUJI SYS temperature controller
Devices are set with the coil and register numbers of the temperature controller.
For parameters (such as an address map of coil/register number and a parameter) corresponding to each number,
refer to the manual of the temperature controller to be used.

5.6.1 FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device name Setting range Device No. representation
Bit data (0) 00001 to 00001

Bit device
Decimal
Bit data (1)*1 10001 to 10016
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices ―

2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Word device
Word data (3)*1 30001 to 31398
Decimal
Word data (4) 40001 to 43776

3
5.7 Precautions
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
 Station number settings of temperature controller
In the system configuration, the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be
included. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. 4
CONNECTION TO
 FIX processing of temperature controller
FUJI FA PLC
The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX processing. Otherwise, data within the non-
volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will be unavailable.

Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of "time adjusting" or "time broad cast"
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
by GOT clock control will be disabled.
SYS TEMPERATURE
 Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment
CONTROLLER
The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device. For example, the
faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

5.7 Precautions
5.7 Precautions
6
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC
3
CONNECTION TO
6.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
6.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
6-1
6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

Model name Clock Communication *1 Refer to
GL120 RS-232
RS-422 6.2.1
GL130
GL60S
RS-232
GL60H 6.2.2
RS-422
GL70H
MP920
MP930
RS-232
CP-9300MS 6.2.3
RS-422
CP-9200(H)
PROGIC-8
RS-232
MP940 6.2.4
RS-422
CP-9200SH
RS-232 6.2.5
CP-317
MP2200
RS-232
MP2300 6.2.6
RS-422
MP2300S
MP920
MP2200
MP2300
Ethernet 6.3.1
MP2300S
CP-9200SH
CP-312
*1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
6-2 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

1
6.2 Serial Connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
6.2.1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL130
GL120, MEMOBUS 2
GOT YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
GL130 Module
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable

Commun Number of connectable 3
Model MEMOBUS Cable model Max.
name module*1 Connection diagram number distance
CONNECTION TO
Type
HITACHI PLC
GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m) Differs
- (Built into GOT)
or according to
- RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC
PLC side
specifications.
GT15-RS2-9P
4
same as
GL120 above
CONNECTION TO
GL130 GT16-C02R4-9S
FUJI FA PLC
GT09-C30R40201-9P (3m) (0.2m)
JAMSC- GT09-C100R40201-9P (10m) 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS
RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
120NOM27100 GT09-C200R40201-9P (20m) same as module
GT09-C300R40201-9P (30m) above GT15-RS4-9S
or
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
*1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation. For details of the product, contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6-3

6.2.2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S, GL60H or GL70H
GL60S,
MEMOBUS
GL60H, GOT YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
Module
GL70H
Connection cable

Model MEMOBUS Cable model Max.
Type

- (Built into GOT)
JAMSC-IF60 or according to
RS-232
JAMSC-IF61 PLC side
specifications.
GT15-RS2-9P
same as
GL60S RS422 connection diagram 1) - (Built into GOT)
above 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS
GL60H
module
GL70H GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40201-9P (3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40201-9P (10m)
JAMSC-IF612 RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R40201-9P (20m) same as
GT09-C300R40201-9P (30m) above GT15-RS4-9S
or

6.2.3 System configuration for connecting to MP-920/930, CP-9300MS/9200(H) or 1
PROGIC-8
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS YASKAWA MP
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (For GT10)

2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
MP-920/930, Communications
CP-9300MS/9200(H), GOT
Module
PROGIC-8
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
Number of
Communica
Communic Cable model Max. connectable
Model name tion Option device Model
ation Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
module

- (Built into GOT)
4
or according to
MP-920 PLC side
CONNECTION TO
- RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1)
MP-930 specifications.
GT15-RS2-9P
FUJI FA PLC
same as
above
CP-9200(H) GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m)

or same as
PROGIC-8 - RS-232
CONNECTION TO FUJI
above
(connecting to port1)
SYS TEMPERATURE
1 GOT for 1
GT15-RS2-9P PLC
CONTROLLER
GT09-C30R20202-15P (3m)
PROGIC-8 - (Built into GOT)
or same as
- RS-232
(connecting to port2) above
GT15-RS2-9P
6
CONNECTION TO
CP-9300MS
YASKAWA PLC
GT09-C30R20203-9P (3m)
(CP-9300MC - (Built into GOT)
or same as
- RS-232
compatible/non- above
compatible)
GT15-RS2-9P
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

Number of
Communica
Communic Cable model Max. connectable
Model name tion Option device Model
ation Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
module
GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m) - (Built into GOT)

or same as
above
RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
same as
above
same as
above 1 GOT for 1
MP-920
217IF GT16-C02R4-9S communicati
(connecting to 217IF)
(0.2m) on module
GT15-RS2T4-
RS-422
same as 9P*2
above GT15-RS4-9S
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection diagram same as

RS-422 - (Built into GOT)
10) above

6.2.4 System configuration for connecting to MP-940 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING

2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
MP-940 GOT
Connection cable
3
CONNECTION TO
Communi
cation Option device Model
HITACHI PLC
Type

- (Built into GOT)
or according to
RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4)

PLC side
specifications.
4
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
same as
FUJI FA PLC
above
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
MP-940 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT09-C30R40202-14P (3m)
RS-422
GT09-C100R40202-14P (10m)
GT09-C200R40202-14P (20m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GT09-C300R40202-14P (30m) 300m
SYS TEMPERATURE
- (Built into GOT)
or
CONTROLLER
GT15-RS4-9S
Differs
according to
RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 9) - (Built into GOT)
PLC side
specifications. 6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.2.5 System configuration for connecting to CP-9200SH, CP-317
CP-9200SH Communications
GOT
CP-317 Module
Connection cable

Number of
Commun connectable
Communication Cable model
Model name ication Max. distance Option device Model
module*1 Connection diagram number equipment
Type
GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m) Differs according - (Built into GOT)

CP-217IF or to PLC side
(CN1 RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1) specifications.
connection)
GT15-RS2-9P
RS232 connection diagram 6) same as above - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1
CP-9200SH
communication
CP-317
GT09-C30R20205-25P (3m) module
CP-217IF - (Built into GOT)
(CN2 RS-232 or same as above
connection) RS232 connection diagram 5)
GT15-RS2-9P
CP-217IF
(CN2 RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 8) same as above - (Built into GOT)
connection)

6.2.6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200, MP2300 or MP2300S 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING

2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
MP2200, Communications
GOT
MP2300 Module
Connection cable
3
CONNECTION TO
Number of
Communi connectable
Model Communication Cable model
HITACHI PLC
cation Max. distance Option device Model
equipment
name module*1 Connection diagram number
Type
GT09-C30R20201-9P(3m) Differs
217IF-01
or
RS232 connection
according to
PLC side
- (Built into GOT)
4
218IF-01 RS-232 specifications.
diagram 1)
CONNECTION TO
218IF-02*3 GT15-RS2-9P
FUJI FA PLC
RS232 connection same as
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 6) above

MP2200 - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1
above
5
MP2300 diagram 4) communicatio
MP2300S GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) n module
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
217IF-01 RS-422
CONTROLLER
diagram 8) above - (Built into GOT)
GT15-RS4-9S
217IF-01 RS-422
- (Built into GOT)
6
diagram 11) above
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
*3 The maximum transmission speed of 218IF-02 is 115200bps. However, the selectable maximum transmission speed of GOT is
57600bps.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.2.7 Connection Diagram
GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
GOT and the PLC. CD/NC*1 1 Clamped by hood
RD(RXD) 2 1 TXD
 RS-232 cable SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
ER(DTR) 4 12 RTS
(1) Connection diagram
SG 5 14 GND
DR(DSR) 6 2 -
RS(RTS) 7 6 CTS
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
CS(CTS) 8
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD
- 9
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC,
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
SG 5 7 GND
DR(DSR) 6 9 DTR GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
RS(RTS) 7 4 RTS
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
CS(CTS) 8 5 CTS
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD
- 9 8 EST
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC, ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 20 DTR
RS(RTS) 7 4 RS
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD
- 9 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC,
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
SG 5 7 GND
DR(DSR) 6 9 DTR GOT side
(terminal block) YASKAWA PLC side
RS(RTS) 7 4 RTS
CS(CTS) 8 5 CTS SD 3 RXD

- 9 8 NC RD 2 TXD
ER 6 DSR
DR 9 DTR
GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SG 7 GND
RS 1 FG
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
TXD CS 4 RTS
RD(RXD) 2 2
RXD NC 5 CTS
SD(TXD) 3 3
RTS NC 8 EST
ER(DTR) 4 4
SG 5 7 GND
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
RS(RTS) 7 5 OP/CTS
CS(CTS) 8 8 PWR
- 9 9 DTR
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC,
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
6 - 10 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

1
RS232 connection diagram 7)  RS-422 cable
PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
SD 3 RXD RS422 connection diagram 1)
RD 1 TXD
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 3 RDA
ER Clamped by hood
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 RDB 2
DR 12 RTS
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 2 SDA
CONNECTION TO
SG GND
HITACHI IES PLC

14
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 9 SDB
RS 6 CTS
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 PGND
CS 2 -
Receiving side
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 4 termination
NC
RDA2(RXD2+) Sending side
3
7 8
NC termination
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 7 SG
RS232 connection diagram 8) RSA(RTS+)
CONNECTION TO
9
GOT side
RSB(RTS-)
HITACHI PLC
(terminal block) YASKAWA PLC side 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
SD 3 RXD
CSB(CTS-) 12
RD 2 TXD
ER 6 DSR
SG 13
4
NC 14
DR 20 DTR
CONNECTION TO
Shell
SG 7 SG
FUJI FA PLC
RS 1 FG RS422 connection diagram 2)
CS 4 RS GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
NC 5 CS SDA1(TXD1+) 1 2 RX+
NC 8 CD SDB1(TXD1-) 2 1 RX- 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 7 TX+
SYS TEMPERATURE
(2) Precautions when preparing a cable RDB1(RXD1-) 4 5 TXR+
CONTROLLER
*1
(a) Cable length SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 NC
The maximum length of the RS-232 cable differs SDB2(TXD2-) 6 4 RXR+
*1
according to the specifications of the YASKAWA
PLC side. RDA2(RXD2+) 7 6 TX-
For details, refer to the YASKAWA PLC user's RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8 SG
6
manual.
RSA(RTS+) 9
CONNECTION TO
(b) GOT side connector
YASKAWA PLC
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. RSB(RTS-) 10
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications CSA(CTS+) 11
(c) YASKAWA PLC side connector CSB(CTS-) 12

Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA
7
SG 13
PLC side module.
For details, refer to the YASKAWA PLC user's NC 14
manual.
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Shell
*1 The terminating resistor (120 ) is valid by connecting pin

1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC
side.
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 - 11

RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 5)
GOT side YASKAWA PLC side GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 3 RX+ RDA 2 2 SDA

SDB1(TXD1-) 2 4 RX- RDB 7 9 SDB
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 1 TX+ SDA 1 3 RDA
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 2 TX- SDB 6 6 RDB
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 5 - RSA 3 1 PGND
Receiving side
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 RX- RSB 8 4
termination
Receiving side Sending side
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 7
termination CSA 4 8
termination
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8 TX+ CSB 9 7 SG
RSA(RTS+) 9 9 TX- SG 5
RSB(RTS-) 10 10 RX+ FG -
CSA(CTS+) 11 11
Sending side
termination RS422 connection diagram 6)
CSB(CTS-) 12 12 - GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
SG 13 13 VCC
RDA 2 7 TX+
NC 14 14 GND
RDB 7 5 TX-
Shell *1
SDA 1 2 RX+
RS422 connection diagram 4) SDB 6 1 RX-

GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RSA 3 3 -
*1
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 3 RX+ RSB 8 6 TXR+
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 4 RX- CSA 4 4 RXR+
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 1 TX+ CSB 9 8 SG
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 2 TX- SG 5
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 *1 5 - FG -
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 RX- *1 The terminating resistor (120 ) is valid by connecting pin

1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 7 RXR side.
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8 TX+ RS422 connection diagram 7)
RSA(RTS+) 9 9 TX- GOT side YASKAWA PLC side
*1
RSB(RTS-) 10 10 RX+ RDA 2 1 TX+
CSA(CTS+) 11 11 TXR RDB 7 2 TX-
CSB(CTS-) 12 12 - SDA 1 3 RX+
SG 13 13 VCC SDB 6 4 RX-
NC 14 14 GND RSA 3 5 -
Shell RSB 8 6 RX-

Receiving side
CSA 4 7
*1 Connect RXR with RX(-) and TXR with TX(-) of 217IF01, termination
and insert the terminating resistor. CSB 9 14 GND
SG 5 9 TX-
FG - 10 RX+
11
Sending side
termination
12 -
13 VCC
8 TX+

1
PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side YASKAWA PLC side GOT side
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RDA 2 1 TX+
SDA 2 RX(+)
RDB 7 2 TX-
SDB 1 RX(-)
SDA 1 3 RX+
RDA TX(+)
2
7
SDB 6 4 RX-
RDB 6 TX(-)
RSA 3 5 -
SG SG
CONNECTION TO
*1 *1 8
HITACHI IES PLC

RSB 8 6 RX-
RSA 3 NC
CSA 4 7 RXR
RSB 4 RXR(+)
CSB 9 8 TX+
CSA 5 TXR(+)
SG 5 14 GND
FG - 10 RX+
CSB
3
11 TXR RS422 connection diagram 11)
CONNECTION TO
12 - GOT side
HITACHI PLC
13 VCC
SDA 3 RX+
9 TX-
SDB 4 RX-
*1 Connect RXR with RX(-) and TXR with TX(-) of 217IF01,

RDA 1 TX+
4
and insert the terminating resistor. RDB 2 TX-
CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram 9) SG 14 GND
GOT side
FUJI FA PLC
(terminal block) YASKAWA PLC side RSA 6 RX-
RSB 7 RXR
SDA 3 RX+
CSA 8 TX+
SDB 4 RX-
RDA 1 TX+
CSB 9 TX- 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
10 RX+
RDB 2 TX-
SYS TEMPERATURE
11 TXR
SG 14 GND
CONTROLLER
12 -
RSA 6 RX-
Receiving side 13 VCC
RSB 7 termination
5 -
CSA 8 TX+
CSB 9 TX-
6
10 RX+
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
11 Sending side
termination
12 -
13 VCC
7
5 -
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(2) Precautions when preparing a cable 6.2.8 GOT Side Settings
(a) Cable length
The length of RS-422 cable 2) must be 300m or  Setting communication interface
less. (Communication settings)
The maximum length of RS-422 cable 1) differs Set the channel of the connected equipment.
according to the specifications of the YASKAWA
PLC side.
For details, refer to the YASKAWA PLC user's 2.
manual.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 3.
(c) YASKAWA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA
PLC side module.
For details, refer to the YASKAWA PLC user's
manual.
4.
(a) GOT side
• For GT16, GT15, GT12 Click!
• For GT14, GT11, GT10
menu.
refer to the following. 2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
channel to be used from the list menu.
(b) YASKAWA PLC side 3. Set the following items.
When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT, • Manufacturer: YASKAWA
connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA • Controller Type: Set either of the following
PLC if required. GL/PROGIC8
YASKAWA PLC user's Manual CP9200SH/MP900 series
CP9200(H)
CP9300MS (MC compatible)
MP2000/MP900
MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH series
• Driver: Set either of the following.
<For GT16, GT15 or GT11>
YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
<For GT10>
YASKAWA MP
6.2.8 ■ Communication detail settings
POINT

1
 Communication detail settings (2) YASKAWA MP
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
4800bps,
Set this item when change the transmission
Transmission speed used for communication with the
Speed connected equipment.
9600bps,
19200bps, 3
38400bps,
(Default: 19200bps)
57600bps
CONNECTION TO
Set this item when change the data length
used for communication with the connected
HITACHI PLC
Item Description Range Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
equipment.
Set this item when change the 4800bps, (Default: 8bit)
transmission speed used for 9600bps, Specify the stop bit length for
Transmission
communication with the connected 19200bps, Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
Speed (Default: 1bit)
equipment.
(Default: 19200bps)
38400bps,
57600bps Specify whether or not to perform a parity 4
check, and how it is performed during
Set this item when change the data Parity Even (fixed)
communication.
CONNECTION TO
length used for communication with (Default: Even)
Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
the connected equipment. Specify the time period from the GOT
FUJI FA PLC
(Default: 8bit) startup until GOT starts the communication
Startup Time 3 to 30sec
Specify the stop bit length for with the PLC CPU.
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed) (Default: 3sec)
(Default: 1bit) Specify the host address (station No. of the
Specify whether or not to perform a Host Address

PLC to which the GOT is connected) in the
network of the GOT.
1 to 31 5
parity check, and how it is performed (Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Parity Even (fixed)
SYS TEMPERATURE
Set this item to adjust the transmission
(Default: Even) timing of the communication request from 0 to 30
Delay Time
the GOT. ( 10ms)
CONTROLLER
(Default: 0ms)
Retry 0 to 5times Select the steps to store two words (32-bit
error occurs. LH Order/ HL
32 bit Storage data).
(Default: 0time) Order/ Auto
(Default: Auto)
Startup Time
Specify the time period from the GOT
startup until GOT starts the
3 to 30sec
6
communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
(Default: 3sec)
of the PLC to which the GOT is
Host Address connected) in the network of the
GOT.
1 to 31
7
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

0 to 30
Delay Time communication request from the
( 10ms)
GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.2.9 PLC Side Settings
POINT
(1) Delay Time
When connecting to PLC CP-9200(H) and CP- POINT
9300MS, set the following.
YASKAWA PLC
Model name Delay Time
For details of YASKAWA PLCs, refer to the following
CP-9200(H) 30ms or more
manuals.
port:0 10ms or more
CP-9300MS YASKAWA PLC user's Manual
port:1 30ms or more

The communication interface setting can be  Communication and port settings
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
Make the communication and port settings with a
peripheral tool.
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following Device name Set value
manual.
Address*1 1 to 31
GT User's Manual
Protocol MEMOBUS
Mode RTU
Transmission 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps,
speed*2*3 57600bps
Data bit 8bits
Stop bit 1bit
Parity bit Even
Error check CRC16
*1 Set the address according to the Host Address setting on the
GOT side.
For the Host Address setting on the GOT side, refer to the
following.
*2 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
shown.
Also, the setting range differs depending on the YASKAWA
PLC model.
*3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
the following.

1
 Sequence program
PROCEDURES FOR
To communicate the YASKAWA PLCs with the GOT1000 series, the ladder program to receive messages is required.
PREPARATORY
The following shows an example ladder program for MP2000 series.
MONITORING
ladder program to receive massages
One scan
0000
0000
at startup
IF Sets parameters in the first scan after startup. 2
NL-1
SB000001 = true (Low-speed scan (DWGL): SB000003,
High-speed scan (DWGH): SB000001)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
0001
0001
STORE
Sets the coil offset *1
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00008
0002
0002
NL-2 Source 00000
STORE
Sets the input relay offset *
1
3
Dest DW00009
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
0003
0003
STORE Sets the input register offset *1
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00010
1
4
0004 STORE Sets the holding register offset *
0004
Source 00000
CONNECTION TO
NL-2
Dest DW00011
FUJI FA PLC
0005 STORE Write range: LO
0005
Source 00000
NL-2
5
Dest DW00012
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
0006 STORE Write range: HI
0006
NL-2 Source 32767 Write range: 0 Write range (LO) Write range (HI)
CONTROLLER
Dest DW00013 MW Maximum address value of register
0007 STORE Clears the system registers.

0007
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00014
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
0008 STORE Clears the normal pass counter.
0008
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00024
0009
0009
NL-2
STORE
Source 00000
Clears the error counter. 7
Dest DW00025
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(Continued to next page)
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

0010 END_IF Parameter settings completed.
0010
NL-1
SB000004 DB000400
0011 Sends a Message Receive instruction(Execute).
0011
NL-1
0012 MSG-RCV Message receive function (MSG-RCV)

0013
NL-1 Execute SB000004 Busy DB000210
When the receive message command coil (Execute)
Abort DB000400 Complete DB000211
turns on, the executing coil (Busy) turns on.
Dev-Typ 00005 Error DB000212 The normal completion coil (Complete) or abnormal
Pro-Typ 00001 completion coil (Error) turns on at the completion
Cir-No 00001 of processing.
Ch-No 00001 Receive message abort coil
Param DA00000
Communication device type (Dev-Typ)
: 5 (=217IF)
Communication protocols (Pro-Typ)
: 1 (MEMOBUS)
Line number (Cir-No)
: 1 (For 217IF, any of 1 to 16 set in (2))
Transmission buffer channel number (Ch-No)
: 1 (Always 1 for 217IF)
Normal completion
0013 IF Checking the normal completion
0014
NL-1 DB000211 = true (Does the normal completion coil turn on?)
0014 INC Increments the normal pass counter by 1.

0015
NL-2 Dest DW00024
0015 END_IF
0016
NL-1
Abnormal completion
0016 IF Checking the abnormal completion
0017
NL-1 DB000212=true (Does the abnormal completion coil turn on?)
0017 INC Increments the abnormal pass counter by 1.

0018
NL-2 Dest DW00025
0018 STORE Stores the processing results

0019
NL-2 Source DW00000
Dest DW00026
0019 STORE Stores the status

0020
NL-2 Source DW00001
Dest DW00027
0025 END_IF
0026
NL-1
0026 END
0027
NL-1
*1: Set 0 to the PARAM08 to 11 of the MSG_RCV (input relay, input register, coil, holding register offset). (Do not make the offset
settings.) When the offset is needed, set [Option] [Offset] to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the
device.

1
6.3 Ethernet Connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
6.3.1 System configuration for connecting to MP-920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or
MP2300S or CP-9200SH or CP-312 or CP-317
MP920,MP2200,
Communication driver 2
MP2300, Communications
GOT
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CP-9200SH,CP-312, Module Ethernet(YASKAWA), Gateway
CP-317
Connection cable

3
Number of
Maximum
CONNECTION TO
Communication connectable
Model name Cable model*1 segment Option device Model*3
module *4 equipment
HITACHI PLC
length*2
*5
- (Built into GOT)
MP-920 218IF 100m
GT15-J71E71-100 4
*5
MP2200
CONNECTION TO
• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
218IF-01
MP2300 100m
218IF-02 Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
FUJI FA PLC
MP2300S
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) : GT15-J71E71-100 10 GOTs for 1
Category 3, 4, and 5 communication
• 100BASE-TX *5 module
- (Built into GOT)
CP-9200SH Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) :
CP-218IF 100m
CP-312 Category 5 and 5e
GT15-J71E71-100
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
*5
- (Built into GOT)
CONTROLLER
CP-317 218TXB 100m
GT15-J71E71-100
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
6
*2 A length between a hub and a node.
CONNECTION TO
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
YASKAWA PLC
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching 7
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
GT16 User's Manual

8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.3.2 GOT Side Settings
 Communication detail settings
 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) (1) GT16, GT14
2.
3.
4.

Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Click!
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Set the subnet mask for the sub
network.(Only for connection via
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Mask*1 If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
menu. default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the router address of the default
channel to be used from the list menu. Default gateway where the GOT is
0.0.0.0 to
Gateway connected.(Only for connection via
255.255.255.255
3. Set the following items. *1 router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Manufacturer: YASKAWA
1024 to 5010,
• Controller Type: Set either of the following Ethernet
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
CP9200SH/MP900 series Download
download. (Except for 5011,
Port No.
MP2000/MP900 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
*1
49153)
1024 to 5010,
• Driver: Ethernet (YASKAWA), Gateway Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the Ethernet
Communication
Port No.
module.
(Except for 5011,
5012, 5013 and
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 5016)
49153)
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
environment. performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
6.3.2 ■ Communication detail settings Retry 0 to 5times
When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
POINT Startup Time
3 to 255sec
(Default: 3sec)
The settings of connecting equipment can be Set the time period for a
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
For details, refer to the following. (Default: 3sec)
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Set the delay time for reducing the
0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
(2) GT15, GT12
1
IP Address Setting] screen.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Item Description
Range
3
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
HITACHI PLC
(Default: 1)
IP Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to 4
Mask If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
default value is set.
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
FUJI FA PLC
Set the router address of the
default gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected.(Only for connection via
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
SYS TEMPERATURE
Download download. (Except for 5011,
Port No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
CONTROLLER
49153)
1024 to 5010
Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the connected
Communication (Except for 5011,
equipment.
Port No.
(Default: 5016)
5012, 5013 and
49153)
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
retries, the communication times
out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the 7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
Set the delay time for reducing the
Delay Time
load of the network/destination
PLC.
0 to 10000
( 10 ms) 8
(Default: 0ms)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.3.3 PLC side setting (MP2000
 Ethernet setting
series, MP920 series)
POINT
YASKAWA PLC
manuals.
YASKAWA PLC user's Manual
 Parameter settings
Item Description Set value Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool.
The host is displayed. (The host is
Host ― (1) Settings for 218IF-01
indicated with an asterisk (*).)
Set the network No. of the Item Set value Range
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239 PLC side IP
Local IP Address [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
(Default: blank) address
Set the station No. of the Not required for

Response Time 0 communication
PLC No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 64
with GOT
(Default: blank)
Not required for
Type YASKAWA (fixed) YASKAWA (fixed) Count of Retry
0 communication
(Number of Retries)
Set the IP address of the with GOT
PLC side IP
IP address*1 connected Ethernet module.
CNO *1
address 1 1 to 20
(Default: blank)
(Connection Number)
Set the port No. of the connected Local Port (Local
Port No. Ethernet module. 256 to 65534 10500 256 to 65534
Station's Port Number)
(Default: 10500)
Node IP Address
IP address
Communication Select a communication protocol. Parameter (Remote Station's IP [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
UDP, TCP of GOT
format (Default: UDP) setting *2
Address)
*1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP address is Node Port (Remote Port No.
the default value. Set the value to the IP address of the PLC []
Station's Port Number)*2 of GOT
to be connected.
UDP
Connection Type UDP/TCP
(recommended)
POINT Extended
MEMOBUS,
Extended MEMOBUS,
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility Protocol Type
MELSEC,
MEMOBUS
The communication interface setting can be None,
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] MODBUS/TCP
after writing [Communication Settings] of project Code BIN RTU, BIN, ACII
data. Node Name (Remote
GOT1000 Name of GOT
For details on the Utility, refer to the following Station's Name)
manual. Subnet Mask [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
GT User's Manual Gateway IP Address [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
(2) Precedence in communication settings System Port No.

(Diagnostic/ 10000
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Engineering Port No.)
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Local Port:
TCP (Transmission PLC side
TCP/IP Control Protocol) Zero 3 sec setting
Setting Window Timer Value
TCP Retry Time 500ms
TCP Close Time 60 sec
IP Assemble Time 30 sec
MAX. Packet Length 1500 bytes
*1 When MITSUBISHI PLC and YASKAWA PLC are used
together in the same network, do not set the same value for
the PLC No. of MITSUBISHI PLC and the CNO (Connection
number) of YASKAWA PLC.
*2 Set the same the Node IP Address (Remote Station's IP
Address) and the Node Port (Remote Station's Port Number)
as the Local IP Address and the Local Port (Local Station's
Port Number) on the GOT side.
For the Local IP Address and the Local Port (Local Station's
Port Number) on the GOT side, refer to the following.
6.3.2 ■ Ethernet setting

(2) Setting for the built-in MP2300S Ethernet and 218IF-
1
PROCEDURES FOR
02
PREPARATORY
Item Set value Range
MONITORING
PLC side IP
IP Address [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
address
Transmission
Subnet Mask [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
parameter PLC side setting
Gateway IP Address [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
setting
Device name Arbitrary
Up to 16 one-byte 2
characters
For a connection
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Engineering Port 256 to 65535 with software
Transmission
MPE720
parameter
Response Time 0 Not required for
detailed setting
Count of Retry communication
0
(Number of Retries) with GOT
• Range of built-
in MP2300S
3
Ethernet: 1 to 4
CONNECTION TO
Connection Number 1
• Range of
HITACHI PLC
218IF-02: 1 to
20
Local Port 10500 256 to 65534
IP address
Node IP Address*1 [ ].[ ].[ ].[ ]
of GOT
Port No.
4
Message
Node Port *1 []
communication of GOT
CONNECTION TO
of connection UDP
Connection Type TCP/UDP
parameter (recommended)
FUJI FA PLC
setting Extended
MEMOBUS,
Extended MEMOBUS,
Protocol Type
MEMOBUS MELSEC,
None, 5
MODBUS/TCP
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
Code BIN RTU, BIN, ACII
Up to 32 one-byte
CONTROLLER
characters
Node Name Arbitrary
(16 two-byte
characters)
*1 Set the same the Node IP Address (Remote Station's IP
Address) and the Node Port (Remote Station's Port Number)
as the Local IP Address and the Local Port (Local Station's 6
Port Number) on the GOT side.
For the Local IP Address and the Local Port (Local Station's
CONNECTION TO
Port Number) on the GOT side, refer to the following.
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

To communicate the MP2000 series or MP920 series with the GOT1000 series, the ladder program to receive
massages is required. When connecting the MP2000 series or MP920 series with multiple GOTs, ladder programs to
receive messages for each GOT are required.
0000 IF Sets parameters in the first scan after startup.

0000
NL-1 SB000001 == true (Low-speed scan (DWGL): SB000003,
High-speed scan (DWGH): SB000001)
0001 FOR Clears DW register to zero

0001
NL-2 Variable I
Init 00000
Max 00031
Step 00001
0002 STORE
0002 Source 00000
NL-3
Dest DW00000i
0003 END_FOR
0003
NL-2
*1
0004 STORE Sets the connection number
0004
NL-2 Source 00001
Dest DW00002
*2
0005 STORE Sets the coil offset
0005
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00008
*2
0006 STORE Sets the input relay offset
0006
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00009
*2
0007 STORE Sets the input register offset
0007
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00010
*2
0008 STORE Sets the holding register offset
0008
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00011
0009 STORE Write range: LO *3

0009
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00012

1
PROCEDURES FOR
*3
0010 STORE Write range: HI
0010
PREPARATORY
NL-2 Source 0000065534
MONITORING
Dest DW00013
0011 STORE Clears the system registers

0011
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00014
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
0012 STORE Clears the normal pass counter
0012
NL-2 Source 00000
Dest DW00024
0013 STORE Clears the error counter

3
0013 Source 00000
NL-2
CONNECTION TO
Dest DW00025
HITACHI PLC
0014 END_IF Parameter settings completed
0014
NL-1
SB000004 DB000400 4
0015 Sends a Message Receive instruction
0015
NL-1
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
The executing coil turns ON when the CPU
0016 MSG-RCV
0017 receives the command.
NL-1 Execute SB000004 Busy DB000210
The normal or abnormal completion coil turns ON
Abort DB000400 Complete DB000211
at the completion of processing.
Dev-Typ 00006 *5 Error DB000212 Pro-Type: 1 for extended MEMOBUS or MELSEC.
Pro-Typ 00001 2 for non-procedure. 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Cir-No 00001
SYS TEMPERATURE
Ch-No 00002 *4
Param DA00000
CONTROLLER
0017 IF The normal completion coil turns ON at
0018
NL-1 DB000211 == true normal completion
6
0018 INC Increments the normal pass counter
CONNECTION TO
0019
NL-2 Dest DW00024
0019 END_IF YASKAWA PLC

0020
NL-2
0020
0021
IF The abnormal completion coil turns ON at 7
NL-1 DB000212 == true abnormal completion
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

0021 INC Increments the abnormal pass counter
0022
NL-2 Dest DW00025
0022 STORE Stores the processing results

0023
NL-2 Source DW00000
Dest DW00026
0023 STORE Stores the status

0024
NL-2 Source DW00001
Dest DW00027
0024 STORE Stores the number of station to which

0025
NL-2 Source DW00002 the command is sent
Dest DW00028
0025 STORE Stores the FC.

0026
NL-2 Source DW00004
Dest DW00029
0026 STORE Stored the data address.

0027 Source DW00005
NL-2
Dest DW00030
0027 STORE Stores the data size.

0028 Source DW00006
NL-2
Dest DW00031
0028 STORE Stores the remote CPU.

0029
NL-2 Source DW00007
Dest DW00032
0029 END_IF
0030
NL-1
0030 END
0031
NL-1
*1: When connecting to multiple GOTs, set connection numbers individually for each GOT.
*2: Set the offset for each device.
*3: Set the available write range for the holding registers.
*4: When connecting to multiple GOTs, set channel numbers individually for each GOT.
*5: Set the Dev-Typ of the message receive function <MSG-RCV> to [00016] for the built-in MP2300S Ethernet connection
or the Ethernet port connection of 218IF-02.

6.3.4 PLC side setting (CP-9200SH 1
series, CP-312, CP-317  Settings by DIP switch
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
series) (1) Settings for 218TXB
MONITORING
Set the DIP switch (SW2) as follows.
N/O
POINT -
10/100 2
YASKAWA PLC F/H
-
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC

-
manuals.
INIT
YASKAWA PLC user's Manual TEST
ON OFF
 Parameter settings 3
Setting Item Set value Setting range
Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool.
ON: Extended mode (13
CONNECTION TO
channels, up to 1024 words)
(1) Settings for CP-218IF N/O Mode Selection ON
OFF: Basic mode (10 channels,
HITACHI PLC
up to 512 words)
Item Set value
-*1 Not used OFF -
Module Type CP-218
Transmission ON :10Mbps
CPU Number 01 10/100 OFF
4
Speed OFF :100Mbps
Circuit Number 01
Transmission ON: Full duplex mode
Hot Swapping F/H OFF
Mode OFF: Half duplex mode
CONNECTION TO
ON: Start up by the default IP
address and the engineering port
Item CNO 03 CNO 04 CNO 05
FUJI FA PLC
No.
Local Port 10500 10501 10030 INIT Initial Startup OFF
OFF: Start up by the IP address
Node IP and the engineering port No. set
192.168.001.018 192.168.001.020 192.168.001.073
Address*1 for CP-717
Node
05016 05017 21001
ON: The module starts the self-
diagnosis when the PLC is
5
Port*1
CONNECTION TO FUJI
started.
SYS TEMPERATURE
Connection TEST*2 Test OFF
TCP TCP UDP OFF: The module does not start
Type
the self-diagnosis when the PLC
CONTROLLER
Protocol Extended Extended Extended
is started.
Type MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MEMOBUS
*1 Turn off all the unused switches.
Code BIN BIN BIN
When even one of those switches is on, the PLC may not
*1 Be sure to set the values above for the address so that the normally operate.
GOT communicates with the programmable controller
correctly.
*2 When the PLC is started with the TEST switch on, the
module starts the self-diagnosis and may not perform the 6
For the Host Address setting on the GOT side, refer to the communication.
following. Turn off the switch before the communication is started.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
(2) Settings for CP-218IF

Item Set value
IP Address IP address for 218TXB
Transmission
parameter
Response Time Not required 7
setting Count of Retry
Not required
CONNECTION TO
(Number of Retries)
YOKOGAWA PLC
Connection Number 1
Local Port 10500
Node IP Address Local IP address of GOT
Connection
Node Port Local port No. of GOT
parameter
setting
Connection Type
Protocol Type
UDP
Extended MEMOBUS
8
Code BIN
Node Name Any string
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

To communicate the CP-9200SH series, CP-312 series, or CP-317 series with GOT1000 series, the ladder program
to receive messages is required. When multiple GOTs are connected to the CP-9200SH series, CP-312 series, or
CP-317 series, ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required.

$FSCAN-L ONCOIL
1 0000 SB000003 SB000004
1 0002 IFON
2 0003 FOR I 00000 to 00031 by 00001
3 0007 00000 DW00000 ...=001 .../044
2 0009 FEND
DW-002
2 0010 00003 DW00002 ...=002
DW-008 *1
2 0012 00000 DW00008 ...=003
DW-009
*1
2 0014 DW00009 ...=004
DW-010
*1
2 0015 DW00010 ...=005
DW-011 *1
2 0016 16500 DW00011 ...=006
DW-012
2 0018 16500 DW00012 ...=007
DW-013
2 0020 18499 DW00013 ...=008
1 0022 IEND

1
PROCEDURES FOR
1 0023 MSG-RCV RECEIVE MESSAGE function (standard system functions)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB-210
1 0024 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000210 ...=009
ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB-211

1 0026 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000211 ...=010 .../039 2
CONNECTION TO
DEV-TYP ERROR DB-212
HITACHI IES PLC

1 0028 00006 ===============>FIN FOUT DB000212 ...=011 .../041
PRO-TYP
1 0029 00001 ===============>FIN
1 0030 00001
CIR-NO
===============>FIN
3
CONNECTION TO
CH-NO
1 0031 00003 ===============>FIN
HITACHI PLC
PARAM
1 0032
DA00000
4
CONNECTION TO
DB-211
FUJI FA PLC
1 0039 DB000211
.../036
DW-024
1 0040[ INC DW00024 ]
DB-212
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
1 0041 DB000212
SYS TEMPERATURE
.../038
CONTROLLER
1 0042 IFON
DW-025
2 0043[ INC DW00025 ]
6
DW-000 DW-026
2 0044 DW00000 DW00026 ...=014
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
.../008
DW-001 DW-027
2 0046 DW00001 DW00027 ...=016
1 0048 IEND
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
0 0049 DEND
*1: Set 0 to PARAM08 to 11 of MSG_RCV (input relay, input register, coil, holding register offset). (Do not make the offset settings.)
When the offset is needed, set [Option] [Offset] to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device.
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

6.3.5 Precautions
 When connecting to multiple GOTs

(1) Setting PLC No.
When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
(2) Setting IP address
Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
multiple GOTs.
A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.
 When setting IP address

Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system.)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
 When connecting to the multiple network

equipment (including GOT) in a segment
By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps)
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
are as follows. (2) When setting as a word device
Set the device using the format of word address
(DEC).
The device specifications of controllers may differ 2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
same series.
CONNECTION TO
Device No.
HITACHI IES PLC

Please make the setting according to the specifications of Device name Word address (DEC)
may not be monitored. 6.4.1 YASKAWA GL/PROGIC8
3
 Setting item
CONNECTION TO
Device No.
representation
HITACHI PLC
Coil (O)*5 O1 to O63424
Input relay (I)*6*7 I1 to I63424

Decimal
4
Bit device
D1 to D2048
Link coil (D) D10001 to D12048
D20001 to D22048
CONNECTION TO
Word device bit ―
FUJI FA PLC
word devices
Input register (Z)

Z1 to Z31840
*1*7
Item Description
Holding register
(W)*2*4
W1 to W28291
SW1 to SW28291
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. R1 to R2048
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
R10001 to R12048
CONTROLLER
word device. Decimal
Word device
Link register R20001 to R22048

Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information (R, SR)*4 SR1 to SR2048
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored. SR10001 to SR12048
Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.

SR20001 to SR22048 6
Constant register
Select this for monitoring other controllers. K1 to K4096
(K)*3
CONNECTION TO
Network
After selecting, set the station number of the
YASKAWA PLC
Other controller to be monitored. Converting the following bit
NW No.: Set the network No. Bit device word devices to words ―
Station No.: Set the station No. Link coil
*1 Change the input register "30001 to 30512" to "Z1 to Z512"

for setting. (When set in default)
POINT *2 Change the holding register "40001 to 49999" to "W1 to
W9999" for setting. (When set in default)
7
*3 Change the constant register "31001 to 35096" to "K1 to
Device settings of YASKAWA PLC K4096" for setting. (When set in default)
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
(when using CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920, MP-

930)
Set the coil device (MB) as follows:
(1) When setting as a bit device
Set the device using the format of word address
(DEC) + bit number (HEX). 8
Device No.
CONNECTION TO
Bit position (HEX)

CONTROLLER
Device name Word address (DEC)

*4 SR and SW indicate registers (virtual register) compatible to
the data format where internal data of PLC is displayed using
6.4.3 YASKAWA CP9200 (H)
R or W.
The following shows the difference between the display
values of SR, SW and those of R, W corresponding to the
values of PLC internal data. Device No.
representation
PLC internal data (16 bit) SR, SW R, W
Coil (OB)*3 OB000 to OB7FF
9999 9999 9999 Hexadecimal
Bit device
1001 1001 1001 Coil (OB)*3 IB000 to IB7FF
1000 1000 1000 Specified bit of the following

word devices
999 999 999
Input register
0 0 0 IW00 to IW7F
(IW)
-1 -1 32769 Hexadecimal
Output register
OW00 to OW7F
-999 -999 33767 (OW)
Word device
-1000 -1000 33768 Data register DW0 to DW2047
-1001 -1001 33769 (DW, ZD)*1 ZD0 to ZD2047

Decimal
-9999 -9999 42767 Common register
MW0 to MW7694
(MW)*2
*5 The internal coil N1 to N1536 can be set as O513 to O2048.
However, setting must not exceed O1 to O512 and O513 to
O2048. Bit device word*4 Converting bit devices into word ―
*6 Change the input relay "10001 to 14096" to "I1 to I4096" for
*1 Setting is available only when CP-9200H is used.
setting. (When set in default)
*2 To use data registers of CPU #1 during operation of CP-
9200, copy them to MW0 to 7694.
*3 During operation of CP-9200H, specify the reference No.
and quantities so that they do not cover both OB*** and
IB***.
6.4.2 YASKAWA CP9200SH/MP900 *4 This is not supported by GT10.

Device No. 6.4.4 YASKAWA CP9300MS (MC
representation
compatible)
Decimal +
Coil (MB)*1 MB000000 to MB32767F
Hexadecimal
Bit device
Input relay (IB) MB000000 to MB32767F Hexadecimal Device No.

Specified bit of the following representation
Word device bit*2 word devices ― Coil (OB) OB0 to OB1023

input register, holding register Decimal
Bit device
Input register Input relay (IB) IB0 to IB1023

IW0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal
(IW)
Word device
Holding register word devices

MW0 to MW32767 Decimal
(MW)
Input register (I) I0 to I63
*2 MB0 to MB32767 Decimal
Word device
Coil (MB) Data register (M) M0 to M2047

Decimal
*2 IB000 to IBFFF Hexadecimal Output register
Input relay (IB)
o0 to o63
(o)
*1 MB40960 to MB32767F is available for MP-940 only.
*2 This is not supported by GT10.
Bit device word*1 Converting bit devices into word ―

6.4.5 YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/ 1
CP9200SH Series
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device No.
representation
Decimal +
Coil (MB) MB000000 to MB65534F
Hexadecimal 2
Bit device
Input relay (IB)

IB00000 to IB7FFFF Hexadecimal
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
*1
Word device Specified bit of the following

―
bit*2*3 word devices
Input register
IW0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal
(IW)*1
Word device
Holding register 3
MW0 to MW65534 Decimal
(MW)
CONNECTION TO
Bit device word*2 Converting bit devices into word ―
HITACHI PLC
*3 For CP-317, the bit access of word device (MW) is enabled
for reading only.
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

7
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
7. CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
7.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
7-1
7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

Communication
Series Model name Clock *1 Refer to
Type
F3SP05
F3SP08
F3SP10
F3SP20
F3SP30
F3FP36
F3SP21
F3SP25 RS-232
FA-M3 7.2.1
F3SP35 RS-422
F3SP28
F3SP38
F3SP53
F3SP58
F3SP59
F3SP66
F3SP67
RS-232
FA500 FA500 7.2.2
RS-422
NFCP100
STARDOM RS-232 7.2.3
NFJT100
F3SP05
F3SP08
F3FP36
F3SP21
F3SP25
F3SP35
F3SP28
FA-M3 Ethernet 7.3.1
F3SP38
F3SP53
F3SP58
F3SP59
F3SP66
F3SP67
F3SP71-4N
7-2 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
7.2.1 System configuration for connecting to FA-M3
 When using the conversion cable

Conversion
FA-M3 GOT
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
cable YOKOGAWA
FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM
Connection cable

3
Number of
Commun
Conversion connectable
CONNECTION TO
equipment
name cable*1 Connection diagram number distance
Type
HITACHI PLC
F3SP05
F3SP08
F3SP21 - (Built into GOT)
F3SP25
F3SP28
GT09-C30R20301-9P(3m)
or 4
KM10-0C*2 RS-232 15m*4
F3SP35 RS232 connection diagram
CONNECTION TO
F3SP38 1)
F3SP53 GT15-RS2-9P
FUJI FA PLC
F3SP58
F3SP59
1 GOT for 1 PLC
- (Built into GOT)

5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GT09-C30R20301-9P(3m)
SYS TEMPERATURE
F3SP66 or
KM10-0S*3 RS-232 15m*4
F3SP67
CONTROLLER
1)
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation. For details of the product, contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
6
*2 CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable
CONNECTION TO
*3 SIO port adapter cable
YASKAWA PLC
*4 Including the length of the CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7-3

 When using the PC link module
PC link
FA-M3 GOT
module
Connection cable

Number of
Commun connectable
Model PC link Cable model Max.
equipment
Type
F3SP05
F3SP08
F3SP10 - (Built into GOT)
F3SP20
F3SP30
F3FP36
F3SP21 F3LC01-1N GT09-C30R20302-9P(3m)
F3SP25 F3LC11-1N or
RS-232 15m
F3SP35 F3LC11-1F RS232 connection diagram
F3SP28 F3LC12-1F 2)
F3SP38 GT15-RS2-9P
F3SP53
F3SP58
F3SP59
F3SP66
F3SP67 1 GOT for 1 PC
link module
F3SP05 RS422 connection diagram
F3SP08 1200m - (Built into GOT)
1)
F3SP20
F3SP30 1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
F3FP36
F3SP21 GT09-C30R40301-6T(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
F3SP25 GT09-C100R40301-6T(10m)
F3SP35 F3LC11-2N RS-422 GT09-C200R40301-6T(20m) GT15-RS4-9S
F3SP28 GT09-C300R40301-6T(30m)
F3SP38 or 1200m
F3SP53
F3SP58
3) - (Built into GOT)
F3SP59
F3SP66
F3SP67

7.2.2 System configuration for connecting to FA500 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
PC link
FA500 module GOT
YOKOGAWA
FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Number of
Commun
PC link Cable model Max. connectable
module*1 Connection diagram number distance equipment
Type
GT09-C30R20205-25P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
3
LC01-0N or
RS-232 15m
LC02-0N RS232 connection diagram
CONNECTION TO
3)
HITACHI PLC
GT15-RS2-9P

1200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PC
FA500 2)
link module
GT09-C30R40302-6T(3m) 1200m*2
GT09-C100R40302-6T(10m)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
4
LC02-0N RS-422 GT09-C200R40302-6T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
GT09-C300R40302-6T(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
CONNECTION TO
or 1200m
FUJI FA PLC
4)
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
7.2.3 System configuration for connecting to STARDOM
CONTROLLER
STARDOM GOT
YOKOGAWA
FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM
6
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
PLC Connection cable*1 GOT

Number of connectable equipment
Series
Communica
tion Type
Cable model
Connection diagram number
Max.
distance
Option device Model 7
CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R20305-9S(3m)
YOKOGAWA PLC

STARDOM RS-232 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Connect the connection cable to the COM port of the PLC.

8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

7.2.4 Connection diagram (2) Precautions when preparing a cable
(a) Cable length
The following diagram shows the connection between the The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or
GOT and the PLC. less.
 RS-232 cable For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
(1) Connection diagram 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(c) YOKOGAWA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the
GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side
YOKOGAWA PLC side module.
CD/NC*1 1 - -
For details, refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user's
manual.
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD
ER(DTR) 4 - -
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 SHIELD -
RS(RTS) 7
CS(CTS) 8
- 9

CD/NC*1 1 1 -
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS
- 9 9 -
Shell*2 - - Shell*2

*2 Connect the shield to the housing of the connectors on
both the GOT and YOKOGAWA product sides.

CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER
RS(RTS) 7 4 RS
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS
- 9

1
 RS-422 cable RS422 connection diagram 3)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RDA 2 SDB
GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side RDB 7 SDA
SDA 1 RDB
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RDA
SDB 6 RDA 2
RSA 3 -
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDB
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RSB 8 -
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDA
CSA 4 -
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 -
CSB 9 -
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 -
SG 5 SG
3
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 -
FG - SHIELD
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 -
CONNECTION TO
RSA(RTS+) 9 - RS422 connection diagram 4)
HITACHI PLC
RSB(RTS-) 10 -
CSA(CTS+) 11 -
RDA 2 SDB
R
CSB(CTS-) 12 -
RDB 7 SDA
SG 13 SG
SDA 1
R
RDB 4
NC 14 SHIELD
SDB 6 RDA
CONNECTION TO
Shell
RSA 3 -
FUJI FA PLC
RS422 connection diagram 2) RSB 8 -
GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CSA 4 -
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDB CSB 9 -
SDB1(TXD1-) 2
R
RDA SG 5 SG 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
RDA1(RXD1+) FG - FG
SYS TEMPERATURE
3 SDB
R
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDA
CONTROLLER
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 -
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 -
RDA2(RXD2+) -
6
7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 -
RSA(RTS+) -
CONNECTION TO
9
YASKAWA PLC
RSB(RTS-) 10 -
CSA(CTS+) 11 -
CSB(CTS-) 12 -
SG 13 SG
7
NC 14 SHIELD
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Shell
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

(2) Precautions when preparing a cable 7.2.5 GOT side settings
(a) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or  Setting communication interface
less. (Communication settings)
(b) GOT side connector Set the channel of the connected equipment.
(c) YOKOGAWA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the 2.
YOKOGAWA PLC side module.
For details, refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user's
manual.
(3) Connecting terminating resistors 3.
(a) GOT side
• For GT16, GT15, GT12 4.
• For GT14, GT11
refer to the following. Click!
(b) YOKOGAWA PLC side
When connecting a PLC link module to a GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the PC
link module.
The following describes how to connect it on the menu.
PC link module.
• F3LC11-2N
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
Set the terminator switch (TERMINATOR) on the channel to be used from the list menu.
front panel of F3LC11-2N to the "4-WIRE" side to
enable the terminator.
• LC02-0N • Manufacturer: YOKOGAWA
Connect the terminating resistor provided with the • Controller Type: Set either of the followings.
LC02-0N across SDA and SDB, and across RDA FA500/FA-M3
and RDB on the terminal block. STARDOM/FA-M3
• Driver: YOKOGAWAFA500/FA-M3/STARDOM

environment.
7.2.5■Communication detail settings
POINT

 Communication detail settings 7.2.6 PLC side setting 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
YOKOGAWA PLC
For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs, refer to the
following manuals. 2
YOKOGAWA PLC user's Manual
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Model name Refer to
CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin
KM10-0C
conversion cable 7.2.7
SIO port adapter cable KM10-0S
F3LC01-1N
3
Item Description Range F3LC11-1N 7.2.8
CONNECTION TO
4800bps, F3LC11-2N
HITACHI PLC
9600bps, PC link module F3LC11-1F
Transmission 19200bps, 7.2.9
communication with the connected F3LC12-1F
Speed 38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps, LC01-0N
(Default: 9600bps) 7.2.10
115200bps
Set this item when change the data length
STARDOM
LC02-0N
7.2.11
4
used for communication with the
connected equipment.
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 8bits)
FUJI FA PLC
Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
(Default: 1bit)
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
None
Parity
communication.
(Default: No)
Even
Odd 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Set whether or not to perform a sum check
SYS TEMPERATURE
Sum Check during communication. Yes or No
(Default: Yes)
CONTROLLER
Set the number of retries to be performed
when a communication timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after retries, 0 to 5times
the communication times out.
(Default: 0time)
Set the time period for a communication to
6
Timeout Time time out. 3 to 30sec
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 3sec)
YASKAWA PLC
timing of the communication request from 0 to 30
Delay Time
the GOT. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
7
POINT
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

data.
manual.
8
GT User's Manual
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER

7.2.7 Connecting to CPU port/D-sub 7.2.8 Connecting PC link module
9-pin conversion cable, SIO (F3LC01-1N, F3LC11-1N,
port adapter cable F3LC11-2N)
 Setting of PLC CPU  Switch setting on the PC link module

Make the PLC CPU settings, displaying [Configuration] Set the switches accordingly.
[Communication Settings] with the program
development tool or the ladder-programming tool.
POINT
Item Set value
Switch setting
Set the communication mode of the CPU (transmission
speed and data format).
Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface
Set the transmission speed and data format according to Module on the base unit.
settings of the transmission speed, data length, parity
and stop bit on the GOT side. F3LC01-1N,F3LC11-1N F3LC11-2N
For details on these GOT side settings, refer to the
following.
7.2.5Setting communication interface 2 3 STATION
NO.
01
4 5
(Communication settings) 6 7
(3)
2 3
01
Transmission speed and data format
4 5
6 7
TERMINATOR Side view indicated by A

Transmis 2- 4-WIRE (4)
Item Stop OFF With right side cover
sion Data bit Parity SD A
removed
bit
speed SD B 2 3
0 1
(1)
4 5
RD A
6 7
Communication 9600
8bits Even 1bit A SD B
A O 1
mode 0 bps
F 2
F 3
4
5
6
(2)
SG 7
Communication 9600 8
Communication mode 1 8bits None 1bit SHIELD

bps
mode*1 Communication 19200
8bits Even 1bit
mode 2 bps (1) Transmission speed setting switch
Communication 19200
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
mode 3 bps
8bits None 1bit For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side,
Communication 38400
mode 4 bps
8bits Even 1bit 7.2.5 ■ Communication detail settings
Communication 38400 Setting*1 Transmission speed
8bits None 1bit
mode 5 bps 7 8
6 9 4 4800bps
Communication 57600 5 0 5 9600bps
8bits Even 1bit
mode 6 bps 4 1
3 2 6 19200bps
Communication 57600
8bits None 1bit *1Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side
mode 7 bps are shown.
Communication 115200
8bits Even 1bit (2) Data format setting switch
mode 8 bps
Set the data length, parity, stop bit and checksum
Communication 115200
8bits None 1bit consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT
mode 9 bps
side.
Set the following when using the CPU programming port For the settings on the GOT side, refer to the following.
as the PC link function.
Make the checksum setting according to the sum check
setting on the GOT side. Switch No. Description Settings
For the sum check setting on the GOT side, refer to the
ON (8bits),
following. 1 Data bit
OFF (7bits)
CPU PC link 7.2.5 ■ Setting communication interface ON (done),
function (Communication settings) 2
OFF (none)
settings Parity
Item Set value ON (even),
O 1 3
Use of PC link function Mark. (Use enabled)
F
F
2
3 OFF (odd)
4
5 ON (2bits),
Mark. (ON) 6 4 Stop bit
Checksum 7 OFF (1bit)
Do not mark. (OFF) 8
ON (done),
End character Do not mark. (OFF) 5 Checksum
OFF (none)
Protect function Do not mark. (OFF) End character
6 OFF (none)
*1 The communication mode that can be selected differs specification
according to the CPU. 7 Protect function OFF (disabled)
8 — OFF
7 - 10 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

(3) Station No. switch (F3LC11-2N only) 7.2.9 Connecting PC link module 1
(F3LC11-1F, F3LC12-1F)
PROCEDURES FOR
Rotary
PREPARATORY
Description Settings
MONITORING
23 switch
 Switch setting on the PC link module
456
9 01
78
Station No.
23 1) 0
(10's digit) Set the switches accordingly.
456
9 01
78
Station No.
2) 1
(1's digit)
POINT 2
(4) Terminator switch (F3LC11-2N only)
Switch setting
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Settings Description Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface
TERMINATOR
4-WIRE Resistor connected (4-wire type) Module on the base unit.
2- 4-WIRE
OFF
F3LC11-1F F3LC12-1F
CONNECTION TO
1
HITACHI PLC
Side view indicated by A
With right side cover
removed
SW1
3456
012
789
(1)
4
2 BCD
A
SW3 SW2
O 1 O 1
F 2 F 2
F 3 F 3
A A 4
5
4
5 (2)
6 6
7 7
8 8
CONNECTION TO
(3)
FUJI FA PLC
(1) Transmission speed switch (SW1)
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side,
refer to the following. 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
Setting*1 Transmission speed
4 4800bps
5 9600bps
345
7 19200bps
F 012
67
6
89
CDE
AB 9 38400bps
A 57600bps
CONNECTION TO
C 115200bps
YASKAWA PLC
shown.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 - 11

(2) Data format switch (SW2) 7.2.10 Connecting PC link module
Set the character length, parity, stop bit and checksum (LC01-0N, LC02-0N)
consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT
side.
For the settings on the GOT side, refer to the following.  Switch setting on the PC link module
7.2.5 ■ Communication detail settings Set the switches accordingly.
Switch No. Description Settings

POINT
ON (8bits),
1 Character length
OFF (7bits)
Switch setting
ON (done),
2 Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface
OFF (none)
Parity Module on the base unit.
O 1 ON (even),
F 2 3
F 3 OFF (odd)
4
5
6 ON (2bits), LC01-0N LC02-0N
7 4 Stop bit
8 OFF (1bit) Front Rear Front Rear
ON (done),
5 Checksum
OFF (none)
End character
6 OFF (none)
specification ON OFF
1
2
(1) STATION NO.
(3) ON OFF
1
2
(1)
3 3
4
5
(2) 4
5
(2)
7 Protect function OFF (disabled)
6 6
7 7
8 8
8 Security function OFF (disabled)
(3) Module function switch (SW3)

O
F
1
2
F 3
4 User setting
5 1 to 6 OFF
6 inhibited
7
8
Modem OFF (not
7
compatibility compatible)
(1) Transmission speed setting switch
8 External modem OFF (none)
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side,
Setting*1 Transmission speed

7 8
6 9 4 4800bps
5 0
4 1 5 9600bps
3 2
6 19200bps

shown.

(2) Data format setting switch 7.2.11 Connecting to STARDOM 1
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the data length, parity, stop bit and checksum
consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT Make the communication settings as shown below.For
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
side. details of the communication settings, refer to the following
For the settings on the GOT side, refer to the following. manual.
7.2.5 ■ Communication detail settings Peripheral Software Manual for YOKOGAWA
PLC
2
ON (8bits),
1 Data bit
OFF (7bits)
POINT
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
ON (done),
2 Connection between STARDOM and the PC for
OFF (none)
Parity communication settings
ON OFF
ON (even),
1 3 For the communication settings of STARDOM,
2 OFF (odd)
3
4 STARDOM and the PC for communication settings
5 ON (2bits),
4 Stop bit must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource
3
6
7 OFF (1bit)
8
Configurator (peripheral software).
ON (done),
5 Checksum
OFF (none)
CONNECTION TO
6
End character
OFF (none)
 COM port setting
HITACHI PLC
specification Make the settings on the FCX Maintenance Page for
7 Protect function OFF (disabled) STARDOM.
8 — OFF
1. Select [Reboot (Maintenance Mode)] on the Reboot
(3) Station No. switch (LC02-0N only) screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the 4
maintenance mode.
Settings
CONNECTION TO
For RS- For RS-
2. Set the COM1 port driver to be used.Execute [JEROS
Rotary
FUJI FA PLC
Description 232 422 Basic Setting File] from the [Edit System Setting File]
switch
communi communi screen on the FCX Maintenance Page.
2 3
1 4 cation cation Confirm that the line of [Com1SioDriver] is as follows.
0 5
Com1SioDriver=DUONUS_SIO
9 6
8 7 Station No.
STATION NO.
1
2 3
4
1)
(10's digit)
0 0
3. Set the COM1 port to be used.Execute [COM1 Port

5
0 5 Station No.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
9 6 2) 1 2
Setting File] from the [Edit System Setting Files]
SYS TEMPERATURE
8 7
(1's digit)
screen on the FCX Maintenance Page.Make the
CONTROLLER
settings as follows according to the communication
specifications on the setting screen.
Leave the settings as default if not listed on the
communication setting items.
(Communication setting items) ( ) in the table shows 6
the names on the FCX Maintenance Page.
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value
YASKAWA PLC
4800bps, 9600bps,
Transmission speed (Baudrate)*1 19200bps, 38400bps,
57600bps, 115200bps
Data length (DataBitLength)*1 8bits, 7bits
Stop bit (StopBitLength)*1 1bit, 2bits 7

Parity bit (Parity)*1 none/odd/even
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Baudrate = *1
DataBitLength = *1
StopBitLength = *1
Parity = *1
FifoMode
InitialDTRState
= YES
= ON
8
SendFlowControlMode = CTS
ReceiveFlowControlMode = DTR
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings.


4. Select "Reboot (Online Mode)" on the "Reboot" 4. Copy a sample project POU to the new project.
screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online
(1) Open C{Install Folder}\LogicDesigner\Projects\
mode.
EXAMPLE_J.mwt.
 Defining Logic POU (2) Right-click [FAM3_Emulator] in the Logic POU
Define Logic POU using Logic Designer (peripheral under the project tree in the Example_J project,
software), and download the project to STARDOM. and select [Copy].
(3) Right-click the [Logic POU] under the project tree
1. Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a in the created new project, and select [Paste].
template.
Use [STARDOM Serial Communication] template. (4) Double-click the [FAM3_Emulator*] file in the
[FAM3_Emulator*] folder.
2. Insert FA-M3 Emulator Firmware Library to the new (5) For the following terminals, set as shown below.
project. REQ terminal : TRUE
TERMCHAR terminal : FALSE
(1) Right-click [Library] under the project tree in Logic
PORT terminal : COM1
Designer.
STATION terminal : STATION1
(2) Right-click [Insert] and select [Firmware Library]. SD_CFAM3R_OPEN_COM1
SD_CFAM3R_OPEN
(3) Double-click the [SD_FCXPLCR_LIB] folder and
double-click [SD_FCXPLCR_LIB.fwl] to select it. (*VALID*) TRUE REQ VALID VALID1
(*COM1*) COM1 PORT ERROR ERROR1
(4) The library path inserted in the procedures above
is as follows. FALSE TERMCHAR STATUS STATUS1
{Install Folder}\LogicDesigner\Mwt\Plc\Fw_lib\
FALSE CHECKSUM
SD_FCXPLCR_LIB\SD_FCXPLCR_LIB.fwl
STATION1 STATION
3. Insert FA-M3 Emulator User Library to the new
I I I I
project.
D D D D
(1) Right-click [Library] under the project tree in Logic
Designer. B B B B
COMERR1 COMERR COMERR COMERR1
(2) Right-click [Insert] and select [User Library].
(3) Double-click [SD_CFAM3R_PF.mwt] to select it. (Definition example of Logic POU)
(4) The library path inserted in the procedures above
is as follows. 5. Defining the instance
{Install Folder}\LogicDesigner\Libraries\ Instantiate Logic POU. Define an already defined
SD_CFAM3R_PF.mwt instance to Task0.
(1) Right-click the [Physical hardware]

[Configuration:IPC_33/FCX01:FCX/Tasks/
Task0:CYCLIC] and select [Insert] - [Program
instance].
(2) Define the program instance name and select
FAM3_Emulator for the program type.

7.2.12 Precautions 1
6. Defining Target Setting
PROCEDURES FOR
Define the IP address or host name of STARDOM for
 Device range
PREPARATORY
which the communication settings are made.
MONITORING
Double-click [Physical hardware] When performing monitoring with the GOT connected
[Configuration:IPC_33/FCX01:FCX/Target Setting] to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects,
and input the IP address or the host name. use devices within the device range of the
YOKOGAWA PLC.
7. Downloading the project When a device outside the range is set on an object, an 2
(1) Execute [Build] - [Make]. indefinite value is displayed on the object.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
(Same as when pressing the function key F9). (No error is displayed in the system alarm.)
For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs,
(2) Download after confirming that the compile error
refer to the following manual:
does not occur. Select [Download] in the project
control dialog displayed when [Online] - [Project 7.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
control] is selected.
 Connecting to STARDOM 3
(3) When the download is completed, select [Cold]
and start STARDOM. (1) Redundant system
CONNECTION TO
When STARDOM is configured with a redundant
system, the connection is not supported.
HITACHI PLC
(2) System alarm
The PLC error does not appear in the system alarm.
(3) GOT clock control
Since the STARDOM does not have a clock function, 4
the settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by
CONNECTION TO
GOT clock control will be disabled.
FUJI FA PLC
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

7.3.1 System configuration for connecting to FA-M3
PC link
FA-M3 GOT
module Ethernet(YOKOGAWA), Gateway
Connection cable

Ethernet Maximum Number of connectable
Model
interface Cable model*2 segment equipment
Option device Model*4
name Connection diagram number
module*1 length*3
F3SP05
F3SP08 - (Built into GOT) *5
F3FP36
F3SP21
F3SP25 F3LE01-5T • 10BASE-T
The following is the
F3SP35 F3LE11-0T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
number of GOTs for 1 PLC
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) :
F3SP28 F3LE12-0T TCP: 8 or less
F3SP38 Category 3, 4, and 5 100m
UTP: 128 or less
F3SP53 • 100BASE-TX
GT15-J71E71-100 (recommended to 16 units
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) :
F3SP58 or less)
F3SP59 Category 5 and 5e
F3SP66
F3SP67 -
F3SP71-4N
system.
cascades.
*4 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
GT16 User's Manual

7.3.2 GOT Side Settings 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2. 2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
3.
3
4.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to 4
IP address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
CONNECTION TO
Click! network.When the subnetwork is not
Subnet 0.0.0.0 to
FUJI FA PLC
used (only via router), the operation
Mask*1 255.255.255.255
is executed with the default value.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the default
menu.
Default
*1
gateway where the GOT is
connected. (Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to 5
Gateway 255.255.255.255
CONNECTION TO FUJI
router)
2.
SYS TEMPERATURE
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: 0.0.0.0)
channel to be used from the list menu. 1024 to 5010,
CONTROLLER
3. Set the following items. Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
• Manufacturer: YOKOGAWA No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
• Controller Type: STARDOM/FA-M3
• I/F: Interface to be used GOT
1024 to 5010,
5014 to 65534
6
• Driver: Ethernet (YOKOGAWA), Gateway connection with the Ethernet
CONNECTION TO
module.
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
4.
YASKAWA PLC
The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 5017)
49153)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set the number of retries to be
Make the settings according to the usage performed when a communication
environment. timeout occurs.
7.3.2 ■ Communication detail settings retries, the communication times 7
out.
(Default: 3times)
CONNECTION TO

YOKOGAWA PLC

POINT communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
The settings of connecting equipment can be Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out.
(Default: 3sec)
3 to 90sec
8
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Set the delay time for reducing the
0 to 10000
( 10 ms)
(Default: 0ms)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

IP Address Setting] screen. (2) GT15, GT12

(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Mask If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
0.0.0.0 to
Default Gateway connected.(Only for connection via
255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
Port No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010,
GOT 5014 to 65534
equipment.
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
(Default: 5017)
49153)
timeout occurs.
out.
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

7.3.3 PLC side setting 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
YOKOGAWA PLC
For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs, refer to the following
manuals. 2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Model name Refer to
F3LE01-5T
Item Description Set value 7.3.4
Ethernet interface module F3LE11-0T
The host is displayed.(The host is
Host
indicated with an asterisk (*).)
― F3LE12-0T
F3SP66
7.3.5
3
Set the network No. of the
Built-in Ethernet interface F3SP67 7.3.6
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239
CONNECTION TO
(Default: blank) F3SP71-4N
HITACHI PLC
Set the station No. of the
PLC No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank) 7.3.4 Connecting to Ethernet
Type YOKOGAWA (fixed)
YOKOGAWA Interface Module (F3LE01-5T,
Set the IP address of the
(fixed)
F3LE11-0T) 4
PLC side IP
IP address*1 connected Ethernet module.
address
CONNECTION TO
(Default: blank)
 Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module
Set the port No. of the connected
FUJI FA PLC
Set the switches accordingly.
Port No.*2 Ethernet module. 12289, 12291
(Default: 12289)
Communication Select a communication protocol.
UDP, TCP POINT
format*1 (Default: UDP)
*1 Set the same IP address and communication format as Switch setting

5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
those of the PLC side.
Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet
SYS TEMPERATURE
*2 Set the port No. of the host link service used on the PLC
side. Interface Module on the base unit.
CONTROLLER
POINT F3LE01-5T F3LE11-0T

The communication interface setting can be 6
Condition setting
CONNECTION TO
switch
data.
YASKAWA PLC
For details on the Utility, refer to the following IP address switch
manual.
GT User's Manual
(2) Precedence in communication settings Right side view without the cover
(1) IP address switch
7
Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
the side of the base unit.
012 012 012 012

EF EF EF EF
B CD
B CD
B CD
B CD
3 456
3 456
3 456
3 456
789 A 789 A 789 A 789 A
EF
012
EF
012
EF
012
EF
012 8
B CD
B CD
B CD
B CD
3 456
3 456
3 456
3 456
789 A 789 A 789 A 789 A

CONNECTION TO
Hexadecimal C0 A8 FA D2
CONTROLLER
Decimal 192 168 250 210

(2) Condition setting switch 7.3.5 Connecting to Ethernet
Set the data format, write protection, line processing at Interface Module (F3LE12-0T)
TCP timeout error or operation mode with the DIP
switch on the side of the base unit.
 Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module
Switch Set the switches accordingly.
Description Set value
No.
Data
1
code
OFF (ASCII)
POINT
Write
2 OFF (not protect) Switch setting
protect
3 Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet
12 3 45 6 78
4
Interface Module on the base unit.
ON (not available),
Reserved
OFF 5 OFF (always)
6 F3LE12-0T
Line
processing
7 OFF (close the line)
on TCP
*1
timeout
Operation Condition setting switch
8 OFF (normal operation)
mode
*1 Applicable to only F3LE01-5T. IP address switch
Right side view with the cover
(1) IP address switch

Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on
the side of the base unit.
012 012 012 012

EF EF EF EF
B CD
B CD
B CD
B CD
3 456
3 456
3 456
3 456
789 A 789 A 789 A 789 A
012 012 012 012

EF EF EF EF
B CD
B CD
B CD
B CD
3 456
3 456
3 456
3 456
789 A 789 A 789 A 789 A
Hexadecimal C0 A8 FA D2
Decimal 192 168 250 210
(2) Condition setting switch

Set the data format, write protection, or operation mode
with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit.
Switch
Description Set value
No.
1 Data code OFF (ASCII)
2 Write protect OFF (not protect)
12 3 45 6 78
3
4
OFF
ON (not available),
5 Reserved
OFF (always)
6
7
Operation
8 OFF (normal operation)
mode

7.3.6 Connecting to F3SP66, 7.3.7 Precautions 1
F3SP67, F3SP71-4N (built-in
PROCEDURES FOR
 Device range
PREPARATORY
Ethernet interface)
MONITORING
When performing monitoring with the GOT connected
to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects,
 Project setting/configuration setting use devices within the device range of the
Set the setting with software for programming YOKOGAWA PLC.
apparatus. When a device outside the range is set on an object, an 2
Item Set value Description
indefinite value is displayed on the object.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
(No error is displayed in the system alarm.)
0.0.0.0 to Set the IP address of the
IP address*1 For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs,
255.255.255.255 connected Ethernet module.
Host link service A
refer to the following manual:
Select the protocol to be used
0=TCP/IP*1
protocol*2 in the port A of the host link 7.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
1=UDP/IP*1 service via Ethernet.
Port No.: 12289
Host link service A  When setting IP address 3
Select the command data type
protocol command Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
0=ASCII format to be used in the port A of the
data type*2 (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
CONNECTION TO
host link service via Ethernet.
Port No.: 12289 system.)
HITACHI PLC
Host link service B Select the protocol to be used The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
0=TCP/IP*1
protocol*2 in the port B of the host link the above numbers.
1=UDP/IP*1 service via Ethernet.
Port No.: 12291
Host link service B setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
protocol command
0=ASCII format
Select the command data type
to be used in the port B of the
4
data type*2
Port No.: 12291
host link service via Ethernet.  When connecting to multiple GOTs
CONNECTION TO
Disables the write command to (1) Setting PLC No.
0 = Not protected
FUJI FA PLC
Write protection*3 this module with the host link When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
1 = Protected
service via Ethernet. network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. 7.3.2 ■ Ethernet setting
*2 For the port No. of the GOT, set the port No. of the host link
5
service to be used.
CONNECTION TO FUJI
7.3.2 ■ Ethernet setting multiple GOTs.
SYS TEMPERATURE
*3 Set this as necessary. A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.
CONTROLLER
By increasing the network load, the transmission speed 6
CONNECTION TO
performance.
YASKAWA PLC
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps)
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

are as follows.
 Setting item
The device specifications of controllers may differ
same series.
may not be monitored.
POINT
(1) When using YOKOGAWA PLC FA-M3
Item Description
When YOKOGAWA PLC FA-M3 is used, the
device range that can be used differs depending Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
on the PLC model selected by the GT Designer3. The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
Since [YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA-M3] has Device word device.
larger device points that can be set than File
Set the file No.
[YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3], select No.
[YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA-M3] if a large device
Displays the device type and setting range which are
points should be set. Information
(2) Devices to be set for an object
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
When a device outside the range is set for an
object, an indefinite value is displayed on the Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.
object.(No error is displayed in the system alarm.) Select this for monitoring other controllers.
A device to be set for an object must be in the Network
device range of YOKOGAWA PLC. Other controller to be monitored.
For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA NW No.: Set the network No.
PLCs, refer to the following manual: Station No.: Set the station No.

7.4.1 YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3 7.4.2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA- 1
Series M3 Series
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device No. Device No.
Device name Setting range representa Device name Setting range representa
tion tion
Input relay (X)*1 X00201 to X71664 Input relay (X)*1 X00201 to X71664
2
Output relay (Y) Y00201 to Y71664 Output relay (Y) Y00201 to Y71664
Internal relay (I) I1 to I65536
CONNECTION TO
Internal relay (I)*4 I1 to I65535
HITACHI IES PLC

Link relay (L) L1 to L71024 L00001 to L08192
Common relay (E) E1 to E4096 L10001 to L18192
Bit device
L20001 to L28192
Special relay (M)*3 M1 to M9984 Decimal L30001 to L38192
*2
Link relay (L)
Timer (TU) TU1 to TU3072 L40001 to L48192
L50001 to L58192
3
Bit device
Counter (CU)*2 CU1 to CU3072
L60001 to L68192
Decimal
Specified bit of the following L70001 to L78192
CONNECTION TO
word devices
Word device bit Common relay (E) E1 to E4096
(Except Timer (TP, TS),
HITACHI PLC
Counter (CP, CS)) Special relay (M)*3 M1 to M9984
Timer (TP) TP1 to TP3072 *2 TU1 to TU3072

Timer (TU)
Timer (TS)*1 TS1 to TS3072 Counter (CU)*2 CU1 to CU3072
Counter (CP) CP1 to CP3072 Specified bit of the following
word devices
4
Counter (CS)*1 CS1 to CS3072 Word device bit
(Excluding TP, TS, CP and
CONNECTION TO
File register (B) B1 to B262144 CS)
Word device
Data register (D) D1 to D8192 Timer (TP) TP1 to TP3072
FUJI FA PLC
Common register (R) R1 to R4096 Decimal *1
Timer (TS) TS1 to TS3072
Index register (V) V1 to V256
Counter (CP) CP1 to CP3072
Link register (W) W1 to W71024
Counter (CS)*1 CS1 to CS3072
Special register (Z) *3 Z1 to Z512
Filer register (B)*5 B1 to B262144
5
Converting bit devices into
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Data register (D) D1 to D65535
SYS TEMPERATURE
word
Bit device word
(Except Timer (TU), Counter Common register (R) R1 to R4096
CONTROLLER
(CU)) Index register V1 to V256
Word device
*1 Writing is not possible.

*2 Writing to continuous devices is not possible. W00001 to W08192
Decimal
*3 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive W10001 to W18192
devices. W20001 to W28192
Link register (W)

W30001 to W38192
W40001 to W48192
6
W50001 to W58192
CONNECTION TO
W60001 to W68192
YASKAWA PLC
W70001 to W78192
Special register (Z)*3 Z1 to Z1024

Converting bit devices into
Bit device word word
(Except TU and CU)
7
*1 Writing is not possible.
*2 Writing to continuous devices is not possible.
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
*3 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive

devices.
*4 With STARDOM, FA-M3 (F3SP59 only), if communications
that include the maximum device number (32767 or 65535)
occurs, system alarm "322 Dedicated device is out of range.
Confirm device range." may be detected.
If such system alarm is detected, do not use the last 15 bits.
*5 With STARDOM, do not use B32768 or later. Otherwise,
normal monitoring is not performed. 8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

8
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CONNECTION TO 8.
YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE 3
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
5
8.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
8.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38 6
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
8-1
8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA

Communication
Type
UT320
UT321
UT350
UT351
UT420
UT450
UT520
UT550
UT551
RS-232
GREEN UT750 8.2.1
RS-485
UP350
UP351
UP550
UP750
UM330
UM331
UM350
UM351
US1000
UT130
UT150
RS-232
UT100 UT152 8.2.2
RS-485
UT155
UP150
UT2400 RS-232
UT2000 8.2.3
UT2800 RS-485
UT32A
UT35A
UT52A
RS-232
UTAdvanced UT55A 8.2.4
RS-485
UP35A
UP55A
UM33A
8-2 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
8.2.1 Connecting to GREEN Series
 When using the RS232C/RS485 converter

RS232C
GREEN GREEN
/RS485
CONNECTION TO
GOT
HITACHI IES PLC

Series Series YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
converter UT2000/UTAdvanced
Connection cable 2)
3
Connection cable 1)
CONNECTION TO
Temperature RS232C/RS485
HITACHI PLC
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
controller converter*1
Number of
Cable model connectable
Commu
Connection Max. Model Cable model Max. Option equipment
Model name nication Model
diagram distance name Connection diagram number distance device
number
Type
4
UT320
UT321 - (Built into
CONNECTION TO
RS485 GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m)
UT350 GOT)
or
UT351 connection
FUJI FA PLC
1200m ML2- RS-232 15m
UT420 diagram 1) RS232 connection
UT450 (4-wire type) diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
UT520
UT550
UT551 5
UT750*2 - (Built into
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GOT)
SYS TEMPERATURE
UP350
UP351 GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m)
RS485 Up to 31
CONTROLLER
UP550 or
connection temperature
UP750*2 1200m ML2- RS-232 15m
diagram 6) RS232 connection controllers for 1
UM330 GOT
(2-wire type) diagram 1)
UM331 GT15-RS2-9P
UM350
UM351 6
US1000
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m) - (Built into
RS485 GOT)
UP750 *3 or
connection 1200m RS-232 15m
ML2-
UT750*3 diagram 12) RS232 connection
(2-wire type) diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
7
CONNECTION TO
*2 Connect the connection cable 1) to the standard RS-485 communication interface.

YOKOGAWA PLC
*3 Connect the connection cable 1) to the high performance RS-485 communication interface.
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8-3

 When connecting directly
GREEN GREEN
GOT
series series
Connection cable

Model Communic Cable model Max.
GT09-C30R40303-6T (3m) Up to 31 temperature

1200m*1 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40303-6T (10m) controllers for 1 GOT
GT09-C200R40303-6T (20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to the following
GT09-C300R40303-6T (30m)
GT15-RS4-9S number of temperature
or
1200m controllers for 1 GOT
UT320 RS485 connection diagram 4) GT16, GT15: 31
- (Built into GOT)
UT321 (4-wire type) GT11: 10
UT350
UT351 RS485 connection diagram 3)
UT420 (4-wire type)
UT450
UT520 1200m - (Built into GOT)
(2-wire type)
UT550
UT551 FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*5
*3 RS485 connection diagram 2)
UT750 RS-485 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*5
(4-wire type)
UP350 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*5
UP351
UP550 FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*5
UP750 *3 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*5
(2-wire type)
UM330 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*5
UM331
UM350 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(4-wire type)
UM351
Up to 31 temperature
US100 RS485 connection diagram
controllers
11) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
for 1 GOT
(2-wire type)

21) 1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*6
(4-wire type)

10) 1200m - (Built into GOT)
(2-wire type)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*5
UP750*4 RS485 connection diagram 9)
RS-485 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*5
UT750*4 (2-wire type)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*5

13) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(2-wire type)
*3 Connect the connection cable to the standard RS-485 communication interface.
*4 Connect the connection cable to the high performance RS-485 communication interface.
*5 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

8.2.2 Connecting to UT100 Series 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RS232C
UT100 UT100
/RS485 GOT
series series YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
converter
2
UT2000/UTAdvanced
Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable 1)
RS232C/RS485
Temperature
controller
Connection cable 1)
converter*1
Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of
3
Cable model Commun Cable model connectable
Max. Model Max.
CONNECTION TO
Series Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
distance name distance
number Type number
HITACHI PLC
- (Built into
RS485 31 temperature
RS232 GOT)
UT100 connection diagram 1200m ML2- RS-232 15m controllers for 1
12)
connection diagram 1) GOT
4
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
*1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation.For details of the product, contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
FUJI FA PLC
UT100 UT100
GOT
5
series series
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
Connection cable 6
CONNECTION TO
Communic Cable model Max.
YASKAWA PLC
Series Option device Model equipment

10) 1200m - (Built into GOT)
(2-wire type)
RS485 connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*1

7
UT100 RS-485 9) 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*1
controllers for 1 GOT
CONNECTION TO
(2-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*1

YOKOGAWA PLC

13) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(2-wire type)
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

8.2.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series
RS232C
UT2000 UT2000
/RS485 GOT
series series YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
converter UT2000/UTAdvanced
Connection cable 2)
Connection cable 1)
Temperature RS232C/RS485
controller converter*1 Number of
Cable model Commun connectable
Max. Model Cable model Max.
Series Connection diagram ication Option device Model equipment
distance name Connection diagram number distance
number Type
GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m) Up to 16
- (Built into
RS485 or
GOT) temperature
UT2000 connection diagram 1200m ML2- RS-232 15m
RS232 connection controllers
16) for 1 GOT
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation.For details of the product, contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
UT2000 UT2000
GOT
series series
Connection cable
Temperature
Connection cable GOT
controller
Commun
Type
GT09-C30R40304-6T (3m) 16 temperature
1200m*1 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40304-6T (10m) controllers for 1 GOT
GT09-C200R40304-6T (20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to the following number of
GT09-C300R40304-6T (30m) temperature controllers for 1
GT15-RS4-9S
or 1200m GOT
RS485 connection diagram 17) - (Built into GOT) GT16, GT15: 16
(4-wire type) GT11: 10

UT2000 RS-485 (4-wire type)
1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*3
(4-wire type) Up to 16 temperature
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*3
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(4-wire type)

1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
(4-wire type)
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

8.2.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RS232C
UTAdvanced UTAdvanced
/RS485 GOT YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
series series
converter
2
UT2000/UTAdvanced
Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Connection cable 1)
Temperature
controller
Connection cable 1)
RS232C/RS485
converter*1
Number of
3
Cable model Commun connectable
Max. Model Cable model Max.
CONNECTION TO
Series Connection diagram ication Option device Model equipment
distance name Connection diagram number distance
number Type
HITACHI PLC
GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m) Up to 31
- (Built into
RS485 connection or
GOT) temperature
diagram 19) 1200m ML2- RS-232 15m
UT32A RS232 connection controllers
UT35A (4-wire type)
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
for 1 GOT 4
UT55A*2
UP35A
CONNECTION TO
UP55A*3 GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m)
- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 connection
FUJI FA PLC
UM33A*4 or temperature
1200m RS-232 15m GOT)
diagram 20) ML2-
(2-wire type) for 1 GOT
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
UT52A GT09-C30R20304-9S (3m)

- (Built into Up to 31
5
*5 RS485 connection or
CONNECTION TO FUJI
UT55A GOT) temperature
SYS TEMPERATURE
diagram 12) 1200m ML2- RS-232 15m
UP55A*6 RS232 connection controllers
UM33A*7 diagram 1)
CONTROLLER
GT15-RS2-9P
For *2 to *7, only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected.
Suffix code
Annotation
Function Open network
Optional suffix code Remark
6
Product with two RS-485 communication ports (4-wire type/
1 or 2 - Without "/LP"
2-wire type) and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor
CONNECTION TO
*2
Product with the open network port of RS-485
YASKAWA PLC
- 1 -
communication (4-wire type/2-wire type)
2 - -
2-wire type) (Standard code model)
Product without the additional contact output points (DO)
Other than 3 - - and with the open network port of RS-485 communication
*3
(4-wire type/2-wire type) (Standard code model)
Product with RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-wire
7
- - With "/CH3" type) specified in the E3 terminal area option (Detailed code
model)
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Product with the RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-

- - With "/C4" wire type) specified in the E4 terminal area option (Detailed
code model)
Product with two RS-485 communication ports (4-wire type)
*4 1 - Without "/LP"
and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor
*5 1 or 2 - With "/LP"
2-wire type) and with the power supply for 24VDC sensor
8
2 - -

*6 Product with the RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-
CONNECTION TO
code model)
CONTROLLER

*7 1 - With "/LP"

UTAdvanced UTAdvanced
GOT
series series
Connection cable
Temperature
Connection cable GOT
controller
Commun
Type
GT09-C30R40303-6T(3m) Up to 31 temperature controllers
1200m*1 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40303-6T(10m) for 1 GOT
GT09-C200R40303-6T(20m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to the following number of
GT09-C300R40303-6T(30m) temperature controllers for 1
or GT15-RS4-9S
1200m GOT
RS485 connection diagram 4) GT16, GT15: 31
- (Built into GOT)

(4-wire type)
UT32A RS485 connection diagram 24)
1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*10
UT35A (4-wire type)
UT55A*3 RS-485
UP35A RS485 connection diagram 5)
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
UP55A *4 (4-wire type)
RS485 connection diagram 25) Up to 31 temperature controllers

(2-wire type)

1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(2-wire type)

1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*9
(4-wire type)
GT09-C30R40303-6T(3m) Up to 31 temperature controllers
1200m*1 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40303-6T(10m) for 1 GOT
GT09-C200R40303-6T(20m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to the following number of
GT09-C300R40303-6T(30m) temperature controllers for 1
or GT15-RS4-9S
1200m GOT
RS485 connection diagram 4) GT16, GT15: 31
- (Built into GOT)

1200m GT15-RS4-TE
UM33A*8 RS-485 (4-wire type)

1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*9
(4-wire type)
Up to 31 temperature controllers
RS485 connection diagram 23) for 1 GOT
(4-wire type)
(4-wire type)

Temperature
controller
Connection cable GOT 1
PROCEDURES FOR
Commun
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Type

(2-wire type)
UT52A
UT55A*5
UP55A*6
RS-485
(2-wire type)
Up to 31 temperature controllers
for 1 GOT
2
UM33A*7
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
(2-wire type)
For *3 to *8, only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected.
Annotation
Suffix code
Optional suffix code Remark
3
Function Open network
CONNECTION TO
1 or 2 - Without "/LP"
2-wire type) and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor
HITACHI PLC
*3
Product with the open network port of RS-485
- 1 -
communication (4-wire type/2-wire type)

2 - -
Product without the additional contact output points (DO) 4

Other than 3 1 - and with the open network port of RS-485 communication
(4-wire type/2-wire type) (Standard code model)
CONNECTION TO
*4 Product with RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-wire
- - With "/CH3" type) specified in the E3 terminal area option (Detailed code
FUJI FA PLC
model)
Product with the RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-

code model)
*5 1 or 2 - With "/LP"
Product with two RS-485 communication ports (4-wire type/ 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
2 - -
CONTROLLER
*6 Product with the RS-485 communication port (4-wire type/2-
code model)
Product with two RS-485 communication ports and without

*7 1 - With "/LP"
6
the power supply for 24VDC sensor
Product with two RS-485 communication ports (4-wire type)

*8 1 - Without "/LP"
and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

8.3.1 RS-232 cable
RS232C/RS485
Interface converter side
GOT side (ML2-□)
CD 1 1 CD
RD(RXD) 2 2 RD
SD(TXD) 3 3 SD
ER(DTR) 4 4 ER
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 6 DR
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS
- 9 *1 9 -
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable

shield line.

(1) Cable length
(3) YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA
For details, refer to the user's manual of the
YOKOGAWA temperature controller.
8 - 10 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

8.3.2 RS-485 cable 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RS232C/RS485 Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4W)*2 Temperature

interface converter*3 Temperature controller controller
*1
*1
SDA(-) 1
RDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDA(-) 2
SDB(+) 2 RDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDA(-) 3 SDA(-)
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
SDB(+)
RDB(+) 4 SDB(+)
SG
SG 5 SG
GND 6
*4 *4
3
GREEN Series GREEN Series
CONNECTION TO
Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
HITACHI PLC
Pin No. Pin No.
RDA (-) 26 24
RDB (+) 25 23
SDB (+) 23 21
4
SDA (-) 24 22
SG 27 25
CONNECTION TO
*3 Turn on the terminating switch on the RS232C/RS485 converter at the end.
FUJI FA PLC
Temperature
GOT side*3 Temperature controller controller
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
*1
SDB(+)
SDA(-)
*1
SDB(+) 5
RDB1(RXD1-) SDA(-)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
12
RDB(+)
SYS TEMPERATURE
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 RDA(-)
SG
CONTROLLER
SG 2 SG
GND
RSA(RTS+) 14 GND
CSA(CTS+) 18 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 16
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC
NC
1
3 6
NC 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
CONNECTION TO
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
YASKAWA PLC
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC
*1
19
Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
Pin No. Pin No.
SDB (+) 23 21
SDA (-) 24 22
RDB (+)
RDA (-)
25
26
23
24
8
SG 27 25
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER

8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 - 11

Temperature
GOT side*3 Temperature controller controller
*1 *1
SDB(+)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SG
SG 13 SG
RSA(RTS+) 9
CSA(CTS+) 11 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell
*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
Pin No. Pin No.
SDB (+) 23 21
SDA (-) 24 22
RDB (+) 25 23
RDA (-) 26 24
SG 27 25


PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*3 Temperature controller *1 Temperature controller
*1
PREPARATORY
SDB(+)
RDA 2 SDB(+)
MONITORING
SDA(-)
RDB 7 SDA(-)
RDB(+)
SDA 1 RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SDB 6 RDA(-)
SG
SG 5 SG
RSA 3
*4 *4
2
CSA 4
RSB 8 Terminating resistor*2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CSB 9
FG -
3
UTAdvanced Series
GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A/
Signal name UT55A (product condition B)/
UT/UP/UM US UT32A/UP35A/UM33A UT55A (product condition A)/
UP55A (product condition B)
UP55A (product condition A)
CONNECTION TO
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
HITACHI PLC
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
• For the product condition of UTAdvanced series, refer to the following table. 4
Product Suffix code
CONNECTION TO
Model Optional suffix code Remark
condition Function Open network
Product with the open network port of RS-
FUJI FA PLC
A - 1 - 485 communication (4-wire type/2-wire
type)
UT55A
Product with two RS-485 communication
B 1 or 2 - Without "/LP" ports (4-wire type/2-wire type) and without
Product without the additional contact 5
output points (DO) and with the open
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Other than 3 1 - network port of RS-485 communication (4-
SYS TEMPERATURE
wire type/2-wire type) (Standard code
A model)
CONTROLLER
Product with the RS-485 communication
port (4-wire type/2-wire type) specified in
- - With "/CH3"
the E3 terminal area option (Detailed code
UP55A model)
2 - - ports (4-wire type/2-wire type) (Standard
code model)
6
B Product with the RS-485 communication
CONNECTION TO
- - With "/C4"
YASKAWA PLC
model)
The value of terminating resistor varies between GT15, GT14, GT12 and GT11. Set the value as follows.
For the GT15, GT12: 100 1/2W
*3
For the GT14, GT11: 220 1/4W
Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

GOT side*3 Temperature controller Temperature controller
*1 *1
SDB(+)
RDA1 3 SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB1 4 SDA(-)
RDB(+)
SDA1 1 RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SDB1 2 RDA(-)
SG
SG 9 SG
SDA2 5
SDB2 6 *4 *4
RDA2 7
RDB2 8
FG 10

UTAdvanced Series
GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A/
UT/UP/UM US UT32A/UP35A/UM33A UT55A (product condition A)/
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
• For the product condition of UTAdvanced series, refer to the following table.
Product Suffix code

type)
UT55A
Product without the additional contact
A model)
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model)
- - With "/C4"
model)


PROCEDURES FOR
RS23C/RS485 Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4W)*2
PREPARATORY
interface converter *3 Temperature controller Temperature controller
MONITORING
*1
SDB(+) *1
B(+) 4 SDB(+)
SDA(-)
A(-) 3 SDA(-)
RDB(+) RDB(+)
RDA(-)
2
RDA(-)
SG 5 SG
SG
GND 6
CONNECTION TO
*4 *4
HITACHI IES PLC


Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
Pin No. Pin No. 3
SDB (+) 23 21
SDA (-) 24 22
CONNECTION TO
RDB (+) 25 23
HITACHI PLC
RDA (-) 26 24
SG 27 25
*4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. 4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
*1 *1
SDB(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 6
SDA(-)
SDB(+)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 SDA(-)
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 RDB(+) RDB(+)
SDB2(TXD2-)
SG
7
2
RDA(-)
SG
RDA(-)
SG 5
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
RSA(RTS+) 14 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 16
CONTROLLER
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+)
6
9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
CONNECTION TO
NC 17
YASKAWA PLC
NC 19

Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
Pin No. Pin No. 7
SDB (+) 23 21
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
SDA (-) 24 22
RDB (+) 25 23
RDA (-) 26 24
SG 27 25

8

CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

GOT side*3 Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4W)*2 Temperature controller

Temperature controller
*1
SDB(+) *1
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 RDB(+) RDB(+)
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 RDA(-) RDA(-)
SG 13 SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 *4 *4
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell

Signal name
UT/UP/UM US
Pin No. Pin No.
SDB (+) 23 21
SDA (-) 24 22
RDB (+) 25 23
RDA (-) 26 24
SG 27 25


*1 *1
RSB(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 RSB(+)
RSA(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 RSA(-)
SG
SG 2 SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
*4 *4
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
RSA(RTS+) 14 Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4)*2
RSB(RTS-) 16
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19

GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series
Signal name
UT750/UP750 UT130/UT150/UP150 UT152/UT155
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RSB (+) 28 3 26
RSA (-) 29 4 27
SG 30 5 28


PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*3 *1 Temperature controller Temperature controller
RSB(+) *1
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
RSA(-)
SG
SG 13 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 *4 *4
SDA2(TXD2+)
SDB2(TXD2-)
5
2
6 Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4)*2
RSA(RTS+) 9
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series
Signal name
UT750/UP750 UT130/UT150/UP150 UT152/UT155
RSB (+) 28 3 26
RSA (-) 29 4 27 4
SG 30 5 28
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC

5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
GOT side*3
SYS TEMPERATURE
Temperature controller Temperature controller
*1
SDB(+) *1
SDA1 1 SDB(+)
CONTROLLER
SDA(-)
SDB1 2 SDA(-)
RDA1 3 RDB(+) RDB(+)
RDB1 4 RDA(-) RDA(-)
SG
SDA2
9
5
SG
SG
6
SDB2 6
CONNECTION TO
*4 *4
RDA2 7
YASKAWA PLC
RDB2 8
FG 10
Model of temperature controller 7

UTAdvanced Series
CONNECTION TO
UT35A/
YOKOGAWA PLC

UT/UP/UM US UT32A/UP35A UT55A (product condition A)/
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505 8
SG 27 25 303 409 503
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

Product Suffix code

Product with the open network port of
A - 1 - RS485 communication (4-wire type/2-wire
type)
UT55A
Product with two RS485 communication
Other than 3 1 - network port of RS485 communication (4-
A model)
Product with the RS485 communication port
- - With "/CH3" (4-wire type/2-wire type) specified in the E3
UP55A terminal area option (Detailed code model)
Product with two RS485 communication
code model)
B
Product with the RS485 communication port
- - With "/C4" (4-wire type/2-wire type) specified in the E4
terminal area option (Detailed code model)


RS232C/RS485
interface converter*3 Temperature controller Temperature controller
*1
B(+) RSB(+) *1
4 RSB(+)
A(-) RSA(-)
3 RSA(-)
SG SG
5 SG
GND
6
*4 *4

GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series
Signal name
UT750/UP750 UT130/UT150/UP150 UT152/UT155 UT52A/UM33A UT55A/UP55A
RSB (+) 28 3 26 301 501
RSA (-) 29 4 27 302 502
SG 30 5 28 303 503

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*3 *1 Temperature controller Temperature controller
RSB(+) *1
PREPARATORY
SDA1 1 RSB(+)
MONITORING
RSA(-)
SDB1 2 RSA(-)
SG
RDA1 3 SG
RDB1 4
SDA2 5 *4
SDB2
RDA2
6
7
2
RDB2 8
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
SG 9
FG 10
*4
Signal name
GREEN Series
UT750/UP750
UT100 Series
UT130/UT150/UP150
UT100 Series
UT152/UT155
UTAdvanced Series
UT52A/UM33A
UTAdvanced Series
UT55A/UP55A
3
CONNECTION TO
RSB (+) 28 3 26 301 501
HITACHI PLC
RSA (-) 29 4 27 302 502
SG 30 5 28 303 503

4
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
RX+
5
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 3 3 RX+
RX-
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 5 5 RX-
TX+
CONNECTION TO FUJI
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 4 4 TX+
SYS TEMPERATURE
TX-
RDB1(RXD1-) 12 6 6 TX-
SG
CONTROLLER
SG 2 2 2 SG
RSA(RTS+) 14
RSB(RTS-) 16 *3 *3
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20 6
NC 1
NC
CONNECTION TO
3
YASKAWA PLC
NC 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-)
7
11
NC 13
NC 15
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
NC 17
NC 19
*3
Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. 8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

RX+
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 3 3 RX+
RX-
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 5 5 RX-
TX+
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 4 4 TX+
TX-
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 6 6 TX-
SG
SG 13 2 2 SG
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10 *3 *3
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12 Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/2W)*1
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell

RS232C/RS485
interface converter*2 Temperature controller Temperature controller
TX-
RDA(-) 3 6 6 TX-
TX+
RDB(+) 4 4 4 TX+
RX+
SDB(+) 2 3 3 RX+
RX-
SDA(-) 1 5 5 RX-
SG
SG 5 2 2 SG
GND 6
*3 *3

RX+
SDA 1 3 3 RX+
RX-
SDB 6 5 5 RX-
TX+
RDA 2 4 4 TX+
TX-
RDB 7 6 6 TX-
SG
SG 5 2 2 SG
RSA 3
CSA 4 *3 *3
Terminating resistor*1
RSB 8
CSB 9
FG -
The value of terminating resistor varies between GT15, GT14, GT12 and GT11.Set the value as follows.
For the GT15, GT12: 100 1/2W
For the GT14, GT11: 220 1/4W

PROCEDURES FOR
RX+
PREPARATORY
SDA1 1 3 3 RX+
MONITORING
RX-
SDB1 2 5 5 RX-
TX+
RDA1 3 4 4 TX+
TX-
RDB1 4 6 6 TX-
SG
SG 9 2 2 SG
SDA2
SDB2
5
6 *3 *3
2
RDA2 7 Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W) *1
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RDB2 8
FG 10
*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. 3
CONNECTION TO
RS232C/RS485
Temperature controller*1
HITACHI PLC
interface converter*3 Temperature controller*1
RDA(-)
SDA(-) 1 RDA(-)
RDB(+)
SDB(+) 2 RDB(+)
SDA(-)
3 SDA(-)
4
RDA(-)
SDB(+)
RDB(+) 4 SDB(+)
SG
SG 5 SG
CONNECTION TO
GND 6
*4 *4
FUJI FA PLC
Terminating resistor (220Ω 1/4W)*2

UTAdvanced Series
Signal name UT35A/

UT55A (product condition B)/
5
UT32A/UP35A/UM33A UT55A (product condition A)/
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
SDB (+) 301 407 501
SDA (-) 302 408 502
RDB (+) 304 410 504
RDA (-) 305 411 505
SG 303 409 503
Product Suffix code
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
type)
UT55A
7
CONNECTION TO

YOKOGAWA PLC
A model)
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model) 8

- - With "/C4"
model)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER


RS232C/RS485
interface converter*3 Temperature controller*1 Temperature controller*1
RDA(-)
RDA(-) 3 RDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDB(+) 4 RDB(+)
SDA(-)
SDA(-) 1 SDA(-)
SDB(+)
SDB(+) 2 SDB(+)
SG
SG 5 SG
GND 6
*4 *4

UTAdvanced Series
Signal name UT35A/

UT55A (product condition B)/
UT32A/UP35A/UM33A UT55A (product condition A)/
SDB (+) 301 407 501
SDA (-) 302 408 502
RDB (+) 304 410 504
RDA (-) 305 411 505
SG 303 409 503
Product Suffix code

type)
UT55A
A model)
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model)
- - With "/C4"
model)

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT Temperature
side*3 Temperature controller *1 controller *1
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
SDB(+)
RDA SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB SDA(-)
RDB(+)
SDA RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SDB RDA(-)
SG
SG SG
2
*4 *4
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC

GREEN UTAdvanced Series
3
GREEN
Series UT35A/
Signal name Series UT55A (product condition B)/
UT/UP/ UT32A/UP35A/UM33A UT55A (product condition A)/
US UP55A (product condition B)
UM UP55A (product condition A)
CONNECTION TO
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
HITACHI PLC
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
Product Suffix code
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC
type)
UT55A
5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
A model)
CONTROLLER
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
B
code model) 6
- - With "/C4"
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
model)
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
Terminating resistor : OPEN
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor 7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

GOT Temperature
side*1*2 Temperature controller*1 controller*1
SDA RX+ RX+

SDB RX- RX-
RDA TX+ TX+
RDB TX- TX-
SG SG SG
*3 *3
Terminating resistor : OPEN

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*3 controller *1 controller
PREPARATORY
*1
MONITORING
SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SG
SG SG
2
13
RSA(RTS+) 9
CSA(CTS+) 11 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 10
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell 3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
GREEN
Series UT35A/
SDB (+)
SDA (-)
23
24
21
22
301
302
407
408
501
502 4
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
CONNECTION TO
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
FUJI FA PLC
Product Suffix code
5
type)
UT55A
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
A model)
6
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
code model)
- - With "/C4"
model)
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

*1
SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDA(-)
SG
SG 2 SG
RSA(RTS+) 14
CSA(CTS+) 18
*4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 16
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19
GREEN
Series UT35A/
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
Product Suffix code
type)
UT55A
A model)
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model)
- - With "/C4"
model)

PROCEDURES FOR
Temperature (100Ω 1/4W)*2 Temperature
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
SDB(+) *1
SDA(-)
SG 13 RDB(+) RDB(+)
RDA1(RXD1+)
RDB1(RXD1-)
3
4
RDA(-) RDA(-) 2
SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RSA(RTS+) 9 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 3
NC 14
CONNECTION TO
Shell
HITACHI PLC
GREEN
Series UT35A/
UT/UP/ UT32A/UP35A UT55A (product condition A)/
US
4
UM UP55A (product condition B)
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
CONNECTION TO
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
FUJI FA PLC
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
Model
Product
condition Function
Suffix code
Open network
Optional suffix code Remark 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
type)
UT55A
CONTROLLER
wire type/2-wire type) (Standard code 6
A model)
CONNECTION TO
- -
YASKAWA PLC
With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model)
- - With "/C4"
7
model)
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

Temperature (100Ω 1/4W)*2 Temperature
SDB(+) *1
SDA(-)
SG 2 RDB(+) RDB(+)
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 RDA(-) RDA(-)
SDB2(TXD2-) 7 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 SG
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
RSA(RTS+) 14 *4 *4
RSB(RTS-) 16
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19
GREEN
Series UT35A/
UT/UP/ UT32A/UP35A UT55A (product condition A)/
SDB (+) 23 21 301 407 501
SDA (-) 24 22 302 408 502
RDB (+) 25 23 304 410 504
RDA (-) 26 24 305 411 505
SG 27 25 303 409 503
Product Suffix code
type)
UT55A
A model)
- - With "/CH3"
UP55A model)
code model)
- - With "/C4"
model)

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*3 *1 controller controller
PREPARATORY
*1
MONITORING
RSB(+)
RSA(-)
SG
SG 13 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
RDB1(RXD1-)
SDA2(TXD2+)
4
5
*4
2
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12 *4
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-)
3
8
NC 14
Shell
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
Signal name
RSB (+) 28 3 26 301 501
RSA (-) 29 4 27 302 502 4
SG 30 5 28 303 503
CONNECTION TO
FUJI FA PLC

Temperature Temperature 5
GOT side*3 controller controller
CONNECTION TO FUJI
*1
*1
SYS TEMPERATURE
RSB(+)
RSA(-)
CONTROLLER
SG
SG 2 SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
*4
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
RSA(RTS+)
RSB(RTS-)
14
16
Terminating resistor(220Ω 1/4W)*2 6
CSA(CTS+) 18
CONNECTION TO
CSB(CTS-) 20
YASKAWA PLC
NC 1
NC 3 *4
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC
NC
15
17
7
NC 19
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Signal name
RSB (+)
RSA (-)
28
29
3
4
26
27
301
302
501
502
8
SG 30 5 28 303 503
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER


(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-485 cable must be within the
maximum distance.
(3) YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA
For details, refer to the user's manual of the
YOKOGAWA temperature controller.

(1) GOT side
(b) For GT14, GT11

to the following.
(2) YOKOGAWA temperature controller side
When connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature
controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be
connected.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
settings)
2
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
2.
3
3.
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
4. 4800bps,
9600bps,
Transmission
19200bps, 4
Speed 38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
FUJI FA PLC
Click! Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with the
connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
Stop Bit
communications. 1bit/2bits 5
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 1bit)
CONNECTION TO FUJI
SYS TEMPERATURE
menu. Specify whether or not to perform a parity
None
CONTROLLER
Parity Even
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the communication.
Odd
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: Even)
Set whether or not to perform a sum
3. Set the following items. Sum Check check during communication. Done, None
• Manufacturer: YOKOGAWA
(Default: No)
6
Set the number of retries to be performed
• Controller type: YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
Retry when a communication error occurs. 0 to 5times
CONNECTION TO
UT2000/UTAdvanced (Default: 0time)
YASKAWA PLC
• I/F: Interface to be used Set the time period for a communication
Timeout
• Driver: YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000/ to time out. 3 to 30sec
Time
UTAdvanced (Default: 3sec)
Specify the host address (station No. of
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, the GOT to which the temperature
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Host Address controller is connected) in the connected 1 to 99 7
network.
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
environment.
8.4.2 Communication detail settings timing of the communication request from
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
the GOT.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (Default: 5ms)
Select the communication format.
POINT (Default: 1)
Format 1:
8
Accessible to GREEN/UT100/UT2000/
Format UTAdvanced Series 1/2
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. Format 2:
CONNECTION TO
For details, refer to the following. Accessible to GREEN/UT2000/

CONTROLLER
1.1.2 I/F communication setting UTAdvanced Series, Not accessible to

UT100 Series.

POINT
(1) Format
• When connecting to UT100 Series, specify the
format 1.
• When connecting to only GREEN/UT2000/
UTAdvanced Series, specifying the format 2 is
recommended.
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
8.5.1 Connecting to GREEN Series
POINT
(1) YOKOGAWA temperature controller  Communication settings
For details of YOKOGAWA temperature controller, Make the communication settings by operating the key 2
refer to the following manual. of the temperature controller.
CONNECTION TO
User's Manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature
HITACHI IES PLC

controller (1) For the UT /UP /UM /US1000 (except UT750,
(2) RS232C/RS485 converter UP750)
For details on communication settings of the Item Set value
RS232C/RS485 converter, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of RS232C/RS485 converter Data bit*1 7bits, 8bits 3
Parity bit*1 Even, odd, none
CONNECTION TO
Model name Refer to
HITACHI PLC
*1*2 1 to 99
GREEN 8.5.1 Address
UT100 8.5.2 0: PC link communication (without sum check)

Temperature controller Protocol selection*1
1: PC link communication (with sum check)
UT2000 8.5.3
UTAdvanced 8.5.4
*2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units. 4
RS232C/RS485 converter ML2- 8.5.5
(2) For the UT750, UP750
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value
FUJI FA PLC
RS-485
9600bps (fixed)
communication
Transmission speed*1 High performance
9600bps, 19200bps,
RS-485
communication
38400bps 5
CONNECTION TO FUJI
Data bit*1 7bits, 8bits
SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
*1*2 1 to 99
Address
0: PC link communication
RS-485
communication
(without sum check)
6
(with sum check)
Protocol selection*1
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
High performance
(without sum check)
RS-485
communication
(with sum check)

*2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units.
7
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
8
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER

8.5.2 Connecting to UT100 Series (2) Communication mode settings
Make this setting by operating the communication
 Communication settings mode select DIP SW.
Make the communication settings by operating the key Switch position Communication mode
of the temperature controller. ON
Item Set value ON PC link communication mode

OFF
Parity bit *1 Even, odd, none

(3) A setting of the station No.
Make this setting by operating the station No. select
Rotary switch.
Address*1*2 1 to 99
Switch position Station No.
0: PC link communication (without sum check)
Protocol selection*1 0 1
1: PC link communication (with sum check)
1 2
*2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units. 2 3
3 4
8.5.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 4 5
5 6
 Communication settings 6 7 A
BCD
EF
789
Make the communication settings using setting 7 8
01
6
23
45
switches. 8 9
9 10
Item Set value
A 11
B 12
Data bit*1 8bits (fixed) C 13
Parity bit*1 Even, odd, none D 14
*1 1bit (fixed) E 15
Stop bit
Station No.*1*2 1 to 16 F 16
Communication mode PC link communication mode
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. 8.5.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced

units. Series
 Settings by switch  Communication settings
Communication mode
select DIP SW
Item Set value
Communication setting
Rotary switch *1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Transmission speed
Station No. select
Rotary switch

(1) Settings of the transmission speed and the parity Address*1*2 1 to 99
Make those settings by operating the communication *1
Minimum response time 0 to 10 (x 10ms)
setting Rotary switch.
0: PC link communication (without sum check)
Protocol selection*1
Transmission 1: PC link communication (with sum check)
Switch position Parity bit
speed A
BCD
EF
789
0 None *2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units.
01
6
23
45
1 9600bps Odd
2 Even

8.5.5 Connecting to RS232C/RS485 1
converter (ML2-[])
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Make the communication settings using setting switches.
Item Set value
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

2
Setting (2-wire/4-wire)*2 2-wire type or 4-wire type
CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor*2 With, Without
HITACHI IES PLC

Echo back OFF
RS-485 driver-active control AUTO
*2 Refer to the following connection diagram for setting.
8.3.2 RS-485 cable
3
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI PLC
Timer change-over time 4
Rotary switch
CONNECTION TO
Communication setting
FUJI FA PLC
DIP SW
5
(1) Settings of the setting (2-wire/4-wire), the RS-485
CONNECTION TO FUJI
driver-active control, the terminating resistor, the
SYS TEMPERATURE
echo back
CONTROLLER
Make those settings by operating the communication
setting DIP SW.
CONNECTION TO
YASKAWA PLC
Set Switch position
Setting item
value 1 2 3 4 5 6
4-wire
OFF OFF
type
Setting(2-wire/4-wire)
2-wire
ON ON
7
type
—
CONNECTION TO
RS-485 driver-active control AUTO OFF

YOKOGAWA PLC
with ON
without OFF
Echo back OFF OFF
(2) A setting of the transmission speed

Make this setting by operating the timer change-over 8
time Rotary switch.
Switch position Transmission speed

CONNECTION TO
5 9600bps
CONTROLLER
6 19200bps
7 38400bps

8.5.6 Station number setting (3) All station specification
Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
Set each station number so that no station number read-out operation.
overlaps. • For write-in operation, all station will be a target.In the
The station number can be set without regard to the cable WORD BIT write-in operation, only the temperature
connection order. There is no problem even if station controller whose station No. is the same as host
numbers are not consecutive. address is applicable.
No.3 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6 • In the read-out operation, only the temperature
controller whose station No. is the same as host
GOT address is applicable.
following.
Examples of station number setting 8.4.2 Communication detail settings

When setting the device, specify the station number of POINT
the temperature controller of which data is to be
changed. The all station specification can be set for the following
temperature controllers only.
Specification UT420, UT450, UT520, UT550, T551, UT750,
range UP550, UP750,
1 to 99 US1000
number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Setting range
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13
104 GD14
105 GD15
106 GD16
1 to 99
107 GD17 For the setting other than the above,
108 GD18 error (dedicated device is out of
range) will occur.
109 GD19
110 GD20
111 GD21
112 GD22
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of
are as follows. the temperature controller and the GOT data register.
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. Statio
GOT data register (GD) Setting range
n No.
100 GD10
2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the 1 to 99
same series. 101 GD11 (If setting a value
CONNECTION TO
HITACHI IES PLC
Please make the setting according to the specifications of outside the range
: :
above, a device
114 GD24 range error
When a non-existent device or a device number outside occurs.)
115 GD25
may not be monitored. *2 When there is no setting for the CPU No. in the
communication settings on the temperature controller side, 3
 Setting item set the CPU No. on the GOT side to (1) (default).
CONNECTION TO
8.6.1 YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/
HITACHI PLC
UT2000/UTAdvanced
Device No.
4
representation
CONNECTION TO
Internal relay (I) I0001 to I7072 Decimal
Bit device
FUJI FA PLC
Specified bit of the
following word devices
Item Description Data register (D)*1 D0001 to D9000 5

CONNECTION TO FUJI
Word device
Decimal
SYS TEMPERATURE
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
word device. File register (B)*1*2 B0001 to B1600
Device
CONTROLLER
CPU Set the CPU No. (1, 2) of the device to be monitored.
Converting bit devices
No.*2 When device B is selected, the CPU No. is fixed to 1. Bit device word ―
into word
Information Displays the device setting range which are selected in [Device].
Set the monitor target of the set device. *1 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed.
Select this item when writing data to all the

*2 This is available only for UP750 and UP550.
6
temperature controllers connected.
CONNECTION TO
When bit specification of word device is performed,
YASKAWA PLC
data are written to the temperature controller of the
station No. set for [Host Address] of the
communication detail settings.
Monitoring and writing with bit specification of word
All device are performed only for the station No. set for
[Host Address].
(When writing the data in numerical input, the data is 7
written to the connected temperature controller other
than the ones specified by the word device during
CONNECTION TO
YOKOGAWA PLC
Network
input, and the temperature controller set for [Host
Address] is monitored during other than input
(displaying).)
Select this item when monitoring the temperature
controller of the specified station No.
After selecting, set the station No. in the following
range. 8
Statio 1 to 99 : To monitor the temperature controller

n No. of the specified station No.
100 to 115 : To specify the station No. of the
CONNECTION TO
temperature controller to be monitored

CONTROLLER
by the value of GOT data register

(GD).*1

8.7 Precautions
 Station number settings of temperature
controller
In the system configuration, the temperature controller
with the station number set with the host address must
be included.For details of host address setting, refer to
the following.

Since the temperature controller does not have a clock
function, the settings of "time adjusting" or "time broad
cast" by GOT clock control will be disabled.
 Disconnecting some of multiple connected

equipment
The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected
equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example,
the faulty station where a communication timeout error
occurs can be disconnected from connected
equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the
following manual.

8.7 Precautions
9
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO RKC
9.
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
9.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39 13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
9.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 52
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
9-1
9. CONNECTION TO RKC

Communication
Series Model name*1 Clock Refer to
Type
RS-232
H-PCP-J RS-422 9.2.1
RS-485
SR Mini HG
H-PCP-A RS-232
RS-422 9.2.2
H-PCP-B
Z-TIO
RS-232
SRZ Z-DIO RS-422 9.2.3
RS-485
Z-CT
CB100
CB400
RS-232
CB CB500 9.2.4
RS-485
CB700
CB900
FB100 RS-485
FB FB400 RS-232
9.2.5
RS-422
FB900 RS-485
RB100
RB400
RB RB500 RS-485 9.2.6
RB700
RB900
RS-232
PF900
PF RS-422
PF901
RS-485
RS-232
HA400/401
HA RS-422
HA900/901
RS-485
RMC RMC500 RS-485 9.2.7
RS-232
MA900
MA RS-422
MA901
RS-485
RS-422
AG AG500
RS-485
RS-422
THV THV-A1 9.2.8
RS-485
SA100 RS-232
SA 9.2.7
SA200 RS-485
9-2 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

Communication
9
Series Model name*1 Clock Refer to
RKC TEMPERATURE
Type
CONNECTION TO
RS-232
CONTROLLER
SRX X-TIO 9.2.9
RS-485
RS-232
SB1 SB1 9.2.10
RS-485
RS-232
B400 B400
10
RS-485 9.2.11
*1 From the models of temperature controller, select the detailed model name which supports each communication type and
communication protocol (MODBUS). For details of RKC temperature controller detailed model names, refer to the following
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
catalog.
Catalog of RKC temperature controllers
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9-3

9.2.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J

H-PCP-J GOT
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
TIO
FAIL
TIO
FAIL
TIO
FAIL
TIO
FAIL
TIO
FAIL
Connection cable
! RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN
11
COM.PORT3
12
13
14
15
Conversion
connector*1
connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max. Model equipment
Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance name
W-BF-28-0500(0.5m)*1
W-BF-28-1000(1m)*1 - (Built into GOT)
W-BF-28-3000(3m)*1
15m -
or
RS232 connection
GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232 diagram 1)
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*1 - (Built into GOT)

W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1 15m FAX067*1
W-BF-02-3000(3m)*3
GT15-RS2-9P
RS422 connection
1200m - - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
1200m*2 - GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
RS422 connection GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422
diagram 2) 1200m -
- (Built into GOT) Up to 1
temperature
H-PCP-J
controller for 1
RS422 connection
1200m - GT14-RS2T4-9P*6 GOT
diagram 6)
RS485 connection
diagram 1)
RS485 connection
1200m - FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*5
diagram 3)
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*1*4
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*1*4
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*1*4
1200m - GT15-RS4-TE
RS-485 or
RS485 connection
diagram 2)
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*1*4
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*1*4
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*1*4
or
RS485 connection
diagram 13)

Temperature controller Connection cable
Conversion
connector*1
GOT Number of
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max. Model
CONNECTION TO
name Type Connection diagram number distance name
CONTROLLER
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*1*4
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*1*4 Up to 1
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*1*4 temperature
H-PCP-J RS-485 1200m - GT14-RS2T4-9P*6
or controller for 1
RS485 connection
GOT 10
diagram 10)
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
*1 Product manufactured by RKC. For details of the product, contact RKC.
*4 To use the dedicated cable, conversion of the cable may be necessary.
PLC
*6 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). 11
CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers
GE FANUC PLC
H-PCP-J H-PCP-J GOT
!
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN !
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN
TIO
FAIL
RUN
COM.PORT1
Connection cable 2)
12
CONNECTION TO LS
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
COM.PORT1 COM.PORT2
Connection cable 1)
Temperature controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
Model Communication
Cable model Cable model Max.
distance
Number of
connectable 13
Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model
name Type equipment
number number
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
RS422 connection
SICK SAFETY
1200m*1 - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*4
RS-422 W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1
RS422 connection
diagram 2) 1200m*1
GT15-RS4-9S 14
*4
W-BF-02-3000(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection
1200m*1 GT14-RS2T4-9P*7 SIEMENS PLC
Up to 16
diagram 6)
temperature
H-PCP-J
diagram 1) for 1 GOT
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
RS485 connection
1200m*2 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*6
HNC CONTROLLER
diagram 3)
CONNECTION TO
*4
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*6
RS-485 W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*4*5
W-BF-02-3000(3m)*4
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*4*5
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*4*5
1200m*1 GT15-RS4-TE
or
RS485 connection
16
diagram 2)
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

Number of
Model Communication connectable
Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type equipment
number number
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*1*4
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*1*4
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*1*4
or
RS485 connection Up to 16
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*4
diagram 13) temperature
H-PCP-J RS-485 W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1
W-BF-01-0500(0.5m)*4*5 controllers
W-BF-02-3000(3m)*4 for 1 GOT
W-BF-01-1000(1m)*4*5
W-BF-01-3000(3m)*4*5
1200m*1 GT14-RS2T4-9P*7
or
RS485 connection
diagram 10)
*1 The total length of the connection cable 1) + connection cable 2)
*2 The total length of the connection cable 1) + connection cable 2) + option device cable
*5 To use the dedicated cable, conversion of the cable may be necessary.

9.2.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A or H-PCP-B 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
H-PCP-A,
GOT RKC
H-PCP-B SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
Connection cable 10
Modular
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
connector 1

Conversion
PLC
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
connector*1 Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
11
W-BF-28-0500(0.5m)*1
W-BF-28-1000(1m)*1
CONNECTION TO
- - (Built into GOT)
GE FANUC PLC
W-BF-28-3000(3m)*1
15m
or
RS232 connection
- GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232 diagram 1)
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*1 - (Built into GOT)

12
CONNECTION TO LS
W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1 15m FAX067
Up to 1
H-PCP-A W-BF-02-3000(3m)*1 temperature
SYSTEMS PLC
H-PCP-B GT15-RS2-9P controller
INDUSTRIAL
for 1 GOT
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
1200m*2 - GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
13
RS-422
RS422 connection
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 2) 1200m -
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
- (Built into GOT)

*2
*3
Including the cable length of the option devices.
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

H-PCP-A, H-PCP-A, Modular connector 1 GOT

H-PCP-B H-PCP-B
Connection cable 2)
Modular connector 1 Modular connector 2

Connection cable 1)

Number of
name Type equipment
number number
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
1200m*3 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

Up to 16
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*1
H-PCP-A GT15-RS2T4-9P*4 temperature
RS-422 W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1
H-PCP-B controllers
W-BF-02-3000(3m)*1 RS422 connection GT15-RS4-9S for 1 GOT
diagram 2) 1200m
- (Built into GOT)


9.2.3
SRZ
Connection cable 1)
Connecting to SRZ
SRZ
Interface
converter
Connection cable 2)
GOT
 When connecting to temperature control module (Z-TIO, Z-CT) with a converter

9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
9-9
CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO LS CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY RKC TEMPERATURE
9
MURATEC CONTROLLER HNC CONTROLLER SIEMENS PLC CONTROLLER SYSTEMS PLC GE FANUC PLC PLC CONTROLLER
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Converter Connection cable 2) GOT
Max. Model Communication Max.
Series Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number
Z-TIO: Up to 16
- Z-CT: Up to 16
RS485 RS232
(Built into GOT) Z-DIO: Up to 16
SRZ connection 1200m CD485/V*1 RS-232 connection 15m
Total of Z-TIO, Z-
diagram 8) diagram 3) CT and Z-DIO: Up
GT15-RS2-9P to 31 for 1 GOT
*1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co.,Ltd. For details of the product, contact DATA LINK Co.,Ltd.
 When connecting directly to temperature control module (Z-TIO, Z-CT)
SRZ SRZ GOT
Connection cable

Cable model Number of connectable equipment
Communication Max.
Series Connection diagram Option device Model
Type distance
number
RS485 connection
diagram 5)
RS485 connection
1200m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
diagram 6) Z-TIO: Up to 16
Z-CT: Up to 16
SRZ RS-485 RS485 connection Z-DIO: Up to 16
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
diagram 7) Total of Z-TIO, Z-CT and Z-DIO:
Up to 31 for 1 GOT
RS485 connection
diagram 14)
RS485 connection
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
diagram 11)
9 - 10 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

9
 When connecting to communication extension module (Z-COM) with a converter
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Z-TIO/ Z-TIO/ Interface
Z-COM Z-DIO/ Z-COM Z-DIO/ converter GOT
Z-CT Z-CT
Connection cable 2)
COM COM
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
terminating
resistor Connection cable 1)
Z-COM Connection cable 1) Converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT

Number of
PLC
Model Terminating Max. Model Communic Max. Option
Connection diagram Connection diagram Model
name resistor*1
number
distance name ation Type
number
distance device equipment
11
Up to 16 Z-
CONNECTION TO
- (Built COMs
GE FANUC PLC
W-BF-02-0500(0.5m)*1 W-BF-28-0500(0.5m)*1 for 1 GOT
into GOT)
W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1 W-BF-28-1000(1m)*1 Z-TIO: Up to 16
*1
W-BF-02-3000(3m) W-BF-28-3000(3m)*1 Z-CT: Up to 16
Z-COM W-BW-02 1200m COM-A RS-232 15m
or or Z-DIO: Up to 16
GT15- Total of Z-TIO,
RS422 RS232
connection diagram 3) connection diagram 2) RS2-9P Z-CT and Z-
DIO: Up to 31
12
CONNECTION TO LS
for Z-COM
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 - 11

 When connecting directly to communication extension module (Z-COM)
Z-TIO/ Z-TIO/
Z-COM Z-DIO/ Z-COM Z-DIO/ GOT
Z-CT Z-CT
COM COM
terminating
resistor Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
Z-COM Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

Number of
Model Communic Terminating connectable
name ation Type resistor*1 equipment
number number
RS422 Up to 16 Z-COMs
1200m
connection diagram - (Built into GOT) for 1 GOT
*2
1) Z-TIO: Up to 16
Z-CT: Up to 16
1200m
W-BF-02- GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) Z-DIO: Up to 16
*3
0500(0.5m)*1 Total of Z-TIO, Z-
RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*4 CT and Z-DIO: Up
W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1
connection diagram GT15-RS4-9S to 31 for Z-COM
RS-422 W-BW-02 W-BF-02-3000(3m)*1 1200m
2) Up to 10 Z-COMs
or *2
- (Built into GOT) for 1 GOT
RS422
Z-TIO: Up to 16
connection diagram 3) Z-CT: Up to 16
RS422 Z-DIO: Up to 16
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*6 Total of Z-TIO, Z-
connection diagram
CT and Z-DIO: Up
6)
to 31 for Z-COM
Z-COM RS485
1200m
connection diagram - (Built into GOT)
*2
1)
RS485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*5
1200m
W-BF-02- connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*5 Up to 16 Z-COMs
*2
0500(0.5m)*1 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*5 for 1 GOT
Z-TIO: Up to 16
W-BF-02-1000(1m)*1 RS485
1200m Z-CT: Up to 16
RS-485 W-BW-01 W-BF-02-3000(3m)*1 connection diagram GT15-RS4-TE
*2 Z-DIO: Up to 16
or 4) Total of Z-TIO, Z-
RS485 CT and Z-DIO: Up
RS485
connection diagram 9) 1200m to 31 for Z-COM
connection diagram - (Built into GOT)
*2
15)
RS485 1200m
connection diagram *2 GT14-RS2T4-9P*6
12)

9.2.4 Connecting to CB Series (CB100, CB400, CB500, CB700, CB900) 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
 When using the converter
CONTROLLER
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
10
Interface
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CB series CB series GOT
converter
Connection cable 2)
PLC
11
Connection cable 1)
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Converter Connection cable 2) GOT
Max. Model Communic Max.
Series Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
distance name ation Type distance
number number
12
Up to 31
CONNECTION TO LS
RS485 RS232 - (Built into GOT)
temperature
CB connection diagram 1200m CD485/V*1 RS-232 connection diagram 15m
controllers
SYSTEMS PLC
8) 3)
INDUSTRIAL
for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
 When connecting directly 13
CONNECTION TO
CB series CB series GOT
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable
SIEMENS PLC
Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Series Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance
RS485 connection
diagram 5)
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
*1
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)
RS485 connection
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
diagram 6)
CB RS-485 RS485 connection
1200m GT15-RS4-TE controllers for 1 GOT
diagram 7)
RS485 connection
diagram 14)
16
RS485 connection
MURATEC CONTROLLER
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*2
diagram 11)
CONNECTION TO

9.2.5 Connecting to FB series (FB100, FB400 or FB900)

FB series GOT
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
Connection cable

Option device Model
- (Built into GOT) Up to 1 temperature

FB400 RS232 connection diagram
RS-232*1 15m controller
FB900 4) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Use communication 1 for the communication format.
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter (COM-A)

Interface
FB series FB series GOT
converter
Connection cable 3)
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
Tempera
Connection Connection
ture Converter*2 Connection cable 3) GOT
cable 1) cable 2) Number of
controller Max.
connectable
Cable model Cable model distance Commu Cable model
Model Model Max. equipment
Connection Connection nication Connection Option device Model
name name distance
diagram number diagram number Type diagram number
W-BF-28-0500
(0.5m)*2 - (Built into
W-BF-01-0500 W-BF-28-1000 GOT)
(0.5m)*2 (1m)*2 Up to 31
RS422
FB400 W-BF-01-1000 W-BF-28-3000 temperature
connection 1000m*3 COM-A RS-232 15m
FB900 (1m)*2 (3m)*2 controllers
diagram 4)*1 W-BF-01-300 or for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
(3m)*2 RS232
connection
diagram 2)


9
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter (CD485/V)
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Interface
converter
Connection cable 2)
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Connection cable 1)
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
PLC
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
diagram number
distance name Type
diagram number
distance 11
CONNECTION TO
- Up to 31
GE FANUC PLC
FB100 RS485 RS232
(Built into GOT) temperature
FB400 connection 1200m CD485/V RS-232 connection 15m
controllers for 1
FB900 diagram 8) diagram 3) GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
12
CONNECTION TO LS
 When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS-422
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY

Number of
name Type
number number
equipment
14
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
SIEMENS PLC
Up to 31
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
FB400 *1 RS422 connection RS422 connection *2
temperature
RS-422 1000m GT15-RS4-9S
FB900 diagram 4) diagram 5) controllers for 1
GOT
- (Built into GOT)
15
HIRATA CORPORATION

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

 When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS-485
Connection cable

Option device Model
RS485 connection diagram 6) 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*1
FB100
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*1 Up to 31 temperature
FB400 RS-485
FB900 RS485 connection diagram 7) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram 11) 1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*2

9.2.6 Connecting to RB Series (RB100, RB400, RB500, RB700, RB900) 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
 When using the converter
CONTROLLER
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
Interface
10
RB series RB series GOT
converter
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Connection cable 2)
PLC
Temperature
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number
12
RB100
- Up to 31
RB400 RS485 RS232
RB500 1200m CD485/V RS-232 15m
CONNECTION TO LS
connection connection controllers for 1
RB700 diagram 8) diagram 3) GOT
RB900
SYSTEMS PLC
GT15-RS2-9P
INDUSTRIAL

13
CONNECTION TO
RB series RB series GOT
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
Communication Cable model Max.
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance
RS485 connection
diagram 5)
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
RS485 connection
HNC CONTROLLER
RB100 diagram 6)
CONNECTION TO
RB400
RB500 RS-485 RS485 connection
1200m GT15-RS4-TE controllers for 1 GOT
RB700 diagram 7)
RB900
RS485 connection
diagram 14)
16
RS485 connection
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*2
MURATEC CONTROLLER
diagram 11)
CONNECTION TO


9.2.7 Connection to PF900/901, HA400/401, HA900/901, RMC500, MA900/901,
AG500, SA100/200

GOT
controller controller RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
Temperature
Max.
Commun Cable model Cable model connectable
Model distance
ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name
Type number number
PF900
PF901
HA400 - (Built into GOT)
HA401 RS232 Up to 1 temperature
RS-232 - 15m
HA900 connection diagram 4) controller for 1 GOT
HA901
MA900 GT15-RS2-9P
MA901
RS422 RS422
PF900 connection diagram 4) connection diagram 1)
PF901 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
HA400
HA401 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to 31 temperature
RS485 GT15-RS4-9S controllers for 1
HA900 RS-422 1000m
HA901 GOT*3
MA900 connection diagram 4) - (Built into GOT)
MA901
AG500
RS485
1000m GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
connection diagram 7)
PF900 RS485 connection diagram 5) - (Built into GOT)
PF901
HA400 FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*1
HA401 RS485 connection diagram 6) FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*1
HA900 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*1
HA901 Up to 31 temperature
RS-485 RS485 connection diagram 7) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE
MA900 controllers for 1 GOT
MA901 RS485 connection diagram 14) - (Built into GOT)
AG500
RMC500
SA100 RS485 connection diagram 11) GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
SA200
*3 For GT11, the number of connectable temperature controllers differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable temperature controllers
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Temperature Temperature Interface
GOT
controller controller converter
Connection cable 3)
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Temperature Connection Interface

PLC
controller cable 2) converter*1
Number of
Model
Cable model
Cable model*1
Connection
Max.
distance Model
Comm
unicati
Cable model Max.
Option
connectable
equipment
11
Connection diagram Connection dista Model
name diagram name on device
number diagram number nce
CONNECTION TO
number Type
GE FANUC PLC
W-BF-28-0500 (0.5m)*1
W-BF-01-0500 W-BF-28-1000 (1m)*1 - (Built into Up to 31
PF900 (0.5m) *1 GOT) temperature
RS422 W-BF-28-3000 (3m)
1000m COM-A RS-232 15m
PF901 connection diagram 4) W-BF-01-1000 (1m) or controllers
W-BF-01-3000 (3m)
RS232
GT15-RS2-9P
for 1 GOT
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter (CD485/V)
INDUSTRIAL
GOT
13
Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
Connection cable 1)
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
14
controller
Max. Number of connectable
CONNECTION TO
Cable model*1 distance Commun Cable model Max. equipment
Model Model
SIEMENS PLC
Connection diagram ication Connection diagram dista Option device Model
name name
number Type number nce
PF900
PF901 - (Built into
HA400 GOT)
HA401
HA900
RS485
1200m CD485/V RS-232
RS232
15m
Up to 31 temperature 15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HA901 connection diagram 8) connection diagram 3)

HNC CONTROLLER
RMC500
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2-9P
SA100
SA200
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

9.2.8 Connection to THV-A1

GOT
controller controller RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)

Number of
Commu- Cable model *1 Cable model Max.
Model connectable
nication Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name equipment
Type number number
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 Up to 31
W-BF-02-0500 (0.5m)
RS422 connection temperature
RS-422 W-BF-02-1000 (1m) 1000m GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 2) controllers for 1
W-BF-02-3000 (3m)
GOT*4
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
1000m GT14-RS2T4-9P*5
diagram 6)
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS485 connection
diagram 3)
*1
THV-A1 W-BF-01-0500 (0.5m)
W-BF-01-1000 (1m)*1
W-BF-01-3000 (3m)*1
GT15-RS4-TE
or
RS485 connection
Up to 31
W-BF-02-0500 (0.5m) diagram 4)
temperature
RS-485 W-BF-02-1000 (1m) 1200m
W-BF-01-0500 (0.5m)*1 controllers for 1
W-BF-02-3000 (3m) *1
W-BF-01-1000 (1m) GOT
W-BF-01-3000 (3m)*1
- (Built into GOT)
or
RS485 connection
diagram 15)
W-BF-01-0500 (0.5m)*1
W-BF-01-1000 (1m)*1
W-BF-01-3000 (3m)*1
GT14-RS2T4-9P*5
or
RS485 connection
diagram 12)

For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
*5 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). 10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
GOT
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Connection cable 1)
Temperature Interface
controller
Connection cable 1)
Max.
converter*1
Number of 12
Cable model *1 Commu Cable model Max. connectable
CONNECTION TO LS
distance Model
Model name Connection diagram nication Connection diagram distan Option device Model equipment
name
Type number ce
SYSTEMS PLC
number
INDUSTRIAL
W-BF-28-0500 (0.5m)*1
W-BF-28-1000 (1m)*1 - (Built into Up to 31
W-BF-02-0500 (0.5m) GOT)
W-BF-28-3000 (3m)*1 temperature
THV-A1 W-BF-02-1000 (1m) 1000m COM-A RS-232 15m
or controllers for
W-BF-02-3000 (3m)
RS232 connection
1 GOT 13
GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 2)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter (CD485V)

GOT
Connection cable 3)
Temperature Connection cable Connection cable Interface

controller 1) 2) converter*1
Number of
Max. Comm
Cable model Cable model Cable model Max. connectable
Model distance Model unicati Option
Connection Connection Connection dista Model equipment
name name on device
diagram number diagram number diagram number nce
Type
W-BF-02-0500
(0.5m)*1 - (Built into
W-BF-02-1000 RS485 GOT)
RS-
connection 1200m CD485/V RS232 connection 15m
(1m)*1 232
diagram 8) diagram 3)
W-BF-02-3000 Up to 31
GT15-RS2-9P
(3m)*1 temperature
THV-A1
controllers for
1 GOT
- (Built into
RS- GOT)
RS485 connection diagram 8) 1200m CD485/V RS232 connection 15m
232
diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P

9.2.9 Connection to SRX 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
 When connecting to temperature control module (X-TIO) with a converter 10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Interface
SRX SRX GOT
converter
Connection cable 2)
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable 1)
GE FANUC PLC
Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface Converter Connection cable 2) GOT
Cable model Commun Cable model connectable
Max. Model Max.
Series Connection ication Connection Option device Model equipment
diagram number
distance name
Type diagram number
distance
12
CONNECTION TO LS
X-TIO: Up to 31
RS485 RS232 - (Built into GOT)
SYSTEMS PLC
*1
Total of X-TIO, X-
SRX 1200m CD485/V RS-232 15m
INDUSTRIAL
connection connection DI and X-DO: Up
diagram 8) diagram 3) to 31 for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
13
 When connecting directly to temperature control module (X-TIO)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
SRX SRX GOT
14
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable SIEMENS PLC

Cable model
Number of connectable equipment
Series
Communication
Type
Connection diagram
number
Max.
distance
Option device Model 15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
RS485 connection
CONNECTION TO
diagram 5)
RS485 connection *1
diagram 6)
X-TIO: Up to 31
SRX RS-485 RS485 connection
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
Total of X-TIO, X-DI and X-DO: Up
to 31 for 1 GOT
16
diagram 7)
MURATEC CONTROLLER
RS485 connection
diagram 14)
CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
diagram 11)

9.2.10 Connecting to SB1
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)

controller controller GOT
AT OUT MAN STEP PV DO AT OUT MAN STEP PV DO
SET R/S SET R/S
Connection
cable 1)
Temperature
Max.
Communi connectable
Model Cable model distance
cation Option device Model equipment
name Connection diagram number
Type
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*1 Up to 31 temperature
SB1 RS-485 1200m
RS485 connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-TE


9
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter (CD485V)
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Interface GOT
Connection
SET
AT OUT MAN
R/S
STEP PV DO
SET
AT OUT MAN
R/S
STEP PV DO
cable 2)
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Connection
cable 1)
Temperature
PLC
controller
Cable model
Cable model
Number of
connectable 11
Connection Max. Model Communication Max.
Model name Connection Option device Model equipment
diagram distance name Type distance
CONNECTION TO
diagram number
number*1
GE FANUC PLC
- Up to 31
RS485 RS232
SB1 connection 1200m CD485/V*2 RS-232 connection 15m
controllers for 1
diagram 8) diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P
GOT
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

9.2.11 Connecting to B400
RKC
SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
GOT
controller controller
Temperature
Max.
Commun Cable model Cable model connectable
Model distance
ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name
Type number number
RS422 RS422
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
B400 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to 31 temperature
(RS-422 RS485 GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 1000m controllers for 1
specificati connection diagram 5)
RS485 GOT*3
ons)
connection diagram 4) - (Built into GOT)
RS485
1000m GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
B400 RS485 connection diagram 6) FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*1
(RS-485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*1 Up to 31 temperature
RS-485 1200m
specificati controllers for 1 GOT
RS485 connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-TE
ons)

For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3)
Interface converter
GOT side (CD485/V) side
9.3.1 RS-232 cable CD/NC*1 1 1 CD
RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD
10
 Connection diagram SD(TXD) TXD
CONNECTION TO
3 3
ALLEN-BRADLEY
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) 4 4 DTR
RKC temperature controller side SG 5 5 GND

GOT side (Modular connector) *1
PLC
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
CD 1 1 NC
11
RS(RTS) 7 7 RTS
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD
CS(CTS) 8 8 CTS
SD(TXD) 3 4 RD
CONNECTION TO
N.C. 9 9 RI
GE FANUC PLC
ER(DTR) 4 5 NC
SG 5 3 SG *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC
DR(DSR) 6 6 SG RS232 connection diagram 4)

RKC temperature controller side
RS(RTS) 7
CS(CTS) 8
GOT side (Modular connector) *1
12
CD 1
CONNECTION TO LS
- 9
RD(RXD) 2 SD(TXD)
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
SD(TXD) 3 RD(RXD)
*1 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual. ER(DTR) 4
User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller
SG 5 SG

DR(DSR) 6 13
RS(RTS) 7
CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8
(Modular connector) *1
CONTROLLER
GOT side
SICK SAFETY
- 9
CD 1 1 NC
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD *1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer

to the following table.
14
SD(TXD) 3 4 RD
Terminal No.
ER(DTR) 4 5 NC HA400/401
Signal
name FB400 PF900 HA900/901 MA900
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 3 SG
FB900 PF901 Communication Communication MA901
SIEMENS PLC
DR(DSR) 6 6 CS 1 2
RS(RTS) 7 SG 25 25 13 25 44
SD(TXD) 26 26 14 26 45
CS(CTS) 8
RD(RXD) 27 27 15 27 46
- 9
15
HIRATA CORPORATION

HNC CONTROLLER
(1) Cable length

CONNECTION TO
manual.
(3) RKC temperature controller side connector
16
Use the connector compatible with the RKC
MURATEC CONTROLLER
temperature controller side module.

For details, refer to user's manual of the RKC
CONNECTION TO

9.3.2 RS-422 cable

POINT RKC temperature controller side
GOT side*1 (Modular connector)*2
Differences in polarity between GOT and RKC
temperature controllers RDA 2 4 T (B)
RDB 7 5 T (A)
The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is
reversed between GOT and RKC temperature SDA 1 2 R (B)
controllers. SDB 6 1 R (A)
Connect a cable according to the following RSA 3 3 SG
connection diagrams. RSB 8 6 SG
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5
FG -
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting
GOT side*1 RKC temperature controller side*2 switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
GT14, GT11: Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 R(B)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 R(A) *2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 T(B) manual.
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 T(A) User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 SG RS422 connection diagram 3)
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 (Modular connector)*1 (Modular connector)*1
RSA(RTS+) 9 R (A) 1 1 R (A)
RSB(RTS-) 10 R (B) 2 2 R (B)
CSA(CTS+) 11 SG 3 3 SG
CSB(CTS-) 12 T (B) 4 4 T (B)
SG 13 T (A) 5 5 T (A)
NC 14 SG / N.C. 6 6 SG / N.C.
Shell
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. *1 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT manual.
main unit to "Disable". User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller
*2 For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer
to the following table
Terminal No.
PF900/901
Signal B400
FB400 AG500 MA900
name THV-A1*3 (RS-422
FB900 HA400/401 MA901
specifications)
HA900/901
SG 25 25 44 3 3/6
T(A) 26 26 45 5 5
T(B) 27 27 46 4 4
R(A) 28 28 47 1 1
R(B) 29 29 48 2 2
*3 The following shows the pin assignment of the modular

connector.
Modular connector pin No.
SG 6
T (A) 5
T (B) 4
SG 3
R (B) 2
R (A) 1

RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 6) 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
RKC temperature controller side*1 RKC temperature controller side*1 RKC temperature controller side
GOT side*1
CONNECTION TO
(Modular connector)*2
CONTROLLER
T(A) 26 T(A)
RDA 4 T(B)
T(B) 27 T(B)
RDB 5 T(A)
R(A) 28 R(A)
SDA 2 R(B)
R(B) 29 R(B)
SDB 1 R(A)
SG 25 SG
SG 3 SG 10
*1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer 6 SG
to the following table
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
*1 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of
Terminal No. the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
PF900/901
Signal B400 Terminating resistor : 330
FB400 AG500 MA900
name (RS-422 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion
FB900 HA400/401 MA901
PLC
specifications) adaptor
HA900/901
SG 25 25 44 3/6 manual. 11
T(A) 26 26 45 5 User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller
T(B) 27 27 46 4
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
R(A) 28 28 47 1 RS422 connection diagram 7)
R(B) 29 29 48 2
*1 *2
GOT side RKC temperature controller side
RS422 connection diagram 5) RDA T(B)
GOT side*1 RKC temperature controller side*2

RDB
SDA
T(A)
R(B)
12
CONNECTION TO LS
RDA 2 T(B) SDB R(A)
RDB 7 T(A) SG SG
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
SDA 1 R(B)
SDB 6 R(A) the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
RSA 3 SG 2-wire type/4-wire type : 4-wire type (2Pair)
Terminating resistor : 330
RSB 8
CSA 4
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor
13
CSB 9
*2 For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 to the following table
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
FG -
Terminal No.
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. PF900/901

Signal B400
GT16,GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting FB400 AG500 MA900
switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
FB900 HA400/401 MA901
GT14, GT11: Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". specifications)
HA900/901
*2
For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer
SG 25 25 44 3 3/6 14
to the following table T(A) 26 26 45 5 5
CONNECTION TO
T(B) 27 27 46 4 4
Terminal No.
SIEMENS PLC
R(A) 28 28 47 1 1
PF900/901
Signal B400
FB400 AG500 MA900 R(B) 29 29 48 2 2
FB900 HA400/401 MA901 *3 The following shows the pin assignment of the modular
specifications)
HA900/901 connector.
SG
T(A)
25
26
25
26
44
45
3
5
3/6
5
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
T(B) 27 27 46 4 4 SG 6
HNC CONTROLLER
T (A) 5
CONNECTION TO
T (B) 4
R(A) 28 28 47 1 1 SG 3
R (B) 2
R(B) 29 29 48 2 2 R (A) 1
*3 The following shows the pin assignment of the modular

connector.
16
SG 6
T (A) 5
MURATEC CONTROLLER
T (B) 4
SG 3
R (B) 2
R (A) 1
CONNECTION TO

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the
maximum distance.

(1) GOT side
Set the terminating resistor by operating the
terminating resistor setting switch.
(b) For GT14, GT11
terminating resistor selector switch.

to the following.

9.3.3 RS-485 cable RS485 connection diagram 3) 9
GOT side*1 RKC temperature controller side
RKC TEMPERATURE
(terminal block) (Modular connector)*2
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 2 T/R(B)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 1 T/R(A)
RKC temperature controller side NC 1 4 NC
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 2 T/R(B)
SG 2 3 SG
10
NC 3 5 NC
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 1 T/R(A)
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
NC 4 6 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 4 NC
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 5 NC
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 SG
PLC
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 SG
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
11
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
CONNECTION TO
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
GE FANUC PLC
RSA(RTS+) 9
NC 13
RSB(RTS-) 10
RSA(RTS+) 14
CSA(CTS+) 11
NC 15
12
CSB(CTS-) 12
RSB(RTS-) 16
SG 13
CONNECTION TO LS
NC 17
NC 14
CSA(CTS+) 18
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Shell
NC 19
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. CSB(CTS-) 20

GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT
main unit to "100 OHM".
*2
For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT 13
main unit to "100 OHM".
manual.
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
manual.
RS485 connection diagram 2) User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller
GOT side *1 RKC temperature controller side RS485 connection diagram 4)

(terminal block) (Modular connector)*2
SDA1 1 2 T/R(B)
GOT side*1
(terminal block)
(Modular connector)*2
14
SDB1 T/R(A)
CONNECTION TO
2 1 SDA1 1 2 T/R(B)
SIEMENS PLC
RDA1 3 4 NC SDB1 2 1 T/R(A)
RDB1 4 5 NC RDA1 3 3 SG
SDA2 5 3 SG RDB1 4 4 N.C.
SDB2
RDA2
6
7
6 SG SDA2 5 5 N.C.
15
SDB2 6 6 SG
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
RDB2 8 RDA2 7
CONNECTION TO
SG 9 RDB2 8
FG 10 SG 9
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. FG 10

GT16,GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GT16,GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
16
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
MURATEC CONTROLLER
manual. ■ Connecting terminating resistors

User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller *2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
CONNECTION TO
manual.

Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
GOT side*1(terminal block) controller 4 controller controller 4 controller
*4 * *4 *
T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1
T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2
SG SG SG SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
Combination module**2 Combination module**2
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
(More than 100Ω in case of CB series)
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
NC 14
Shell

GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
*2 When combining the module, because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other, wire only the
communication terminal on the both end of the combination module.
*3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. When using X-TIO, turn ON the
terminating resistor selector in the terminal base. When combining the module, provide the terminating resistor to the end of the
combination module (the one that is far from the converter).
*4 For the terminal number of the temperature controller, refer to the following table.
Terminal No.
Signal
Z-TIO/ CB100/CB400 FB100 FB400/FB90 RB100/RB400
name CB700 RB700
Z-CT /CB500/CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 /RB500/RB900
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
T/R(A) 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26
T/R(B) 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27
Terminal No.
Signal PF900 HA400/401 B400
name PF901 HA900/901 MA900/MA901 RMC500 X-TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 (RS-485
AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications)
SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3/6
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1/5
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2/4

RKC TEMPERATURE
GOT side*1(terminal block)
CONNECTION TO
*4 controller *4 controller *4 controller *4 controller
CONTROLLER
SDA1(TXD1+) 6
SDB1(TXD1-) 8
SG SG SG SG
NC 1
SG 2
Combination module*2 Combination module*2
NC
NC
3
4
10
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9 Terminating resistor(120Ω 1/2W)*3
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 (More than 100Ω in case of CB series)
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
PLC
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
NC
RSA(RTS+)
13
14
11
NC 15
CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 16
GE FANUC PLC
NC 17
CSA(CTS+) 18
NC 19
CSB(CTS-) 20

GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Signal
Terminal No. 13
name CB700 RB700
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
T/R(A) 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26
T/R(B) 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27
Terminal No.
Signal
name
PF900
PF901
HA400/401
HA900/901 MA900/
MA901
RMC500 X-TIO SA100 SA200 SB1
B400
(RS-485 14
CONNECTION TO
SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3/6
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1/5
SIEMENS PLC
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2/4
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

GOT side*1(terminal block)
SDA1 1
SDB1 2
SG SG SG SG
RDA1 3
RDB1 4
SDA2 5 Combination module*2 Combination module*2
SDB2 6
RDA2 7
RDB2 8 Terminating resistor(120Ω 1/2W)*3
SG 9 (More than 100Ω in case of CB series)
FG 10

GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
*4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series, refer to the table below.
Terminal No.
Signal
name CB700 RB700
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
T/R(A) 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26
T/R(B) 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27
Terminal No.
name HA900/901 MA900/
PF901 RMC500 X-TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 (RS-485
MA901
SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3/6
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1/5
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2/4

RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
*3 *3 *3 *3
Interface converter Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
side(CD-485V) controller controller controller controller
D+ 2
D- 3
SG SG SG SG
10
FG 4
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Combination module*1 Combination module*1
PLC
combination module (the one that is far from the converter). 11
Terminal No.
CONNECTION TO
Signal
GE FANUC PLC
name CB700 RB700
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
T/R(A) 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26
T/R(B) 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27
Terminal No. 12
CONNECTION TO LS
Signal PF900 HA400/401
name PF901 HA900/901 MA900/MA901 RMC500 THV-A1*4 X-TIO SA100 SA200
AG500
SYSTEMS PLC
Communication 1 Communication 2
INDUSTRIAL
SG 25 13 25 44 13 3 17 1 10
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 1 16 2 11
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 2 15 3 12
*4 The following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector.

Modular connector pin No. 13
CONNECTION TO
SG 6
Nonuse 5
CONTROLLER
Nonuse 4
SICK SAFETY
SG 3
R (B) 2
R (A) 1
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side
(Modular connector)*1 (Modular connector)*1 GOT side*1 (Modular connector)*2
T/R(B) 2 2 T/R(B) SDA T/R(B)
T/R(A) 1 1 T/R(A) SDB T/R(A)
SG 3 3 SG RDA NC
N.C. 4 4 N.C. RDB NC
N.C. 5 5 N.C. SG SG
SG 6 6 SG SG
*1 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following *1 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of
manual. the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor
manual.

GOT side*1 controller *4 controller controller *5 controller
*4 *4
SDA T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B)

SDB T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A)
RDA SG SG SG SG
RDB
SG Combination module*2 Combination module*2

Terminal No.
Signal
name CB700 RB700
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
T/R(A) 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26
T/R(B) 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27
Terminal No.
SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3/6
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1/5
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2/4

RS485 connection diagram 12) RS485 connection diagram 13) 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side
CONNECTION TO
GOT side*1 (Modular connector)*2 GOT side*1 (Modular connector)*2
CONTROLLER
SDA T/R(B) SDA 1 T/R(B)
SDB T/R(A) SDB 6 T/R(A)
RDA SG RDA 2 NC
RDB N.C. RDB 7 NC

10
SG N.C. SG 5 SG
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
SG RSA 3 SG
CSA 4
the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows. RSB 8
PLC
Terminating resistor : 110 CSB 9
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion 11
adaptor *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ".
CONNECTION TO
manual.
GE FANUC PLC
User's Manual of the RKC temperature controller manual.

12
GOT side*1
CONNECTION TO LS
SDA 1 T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B) T/R(B)
SYSTEMS PLC
SDB 6 T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A) T/R(A)
INDUSTRIAL
RDA 2 SG SG SG SG
RDB 7
SG 5 Combination module*2 Combination module*2
13
RSA 3
CSA 4
RSB 8
CONNECTION TO
CSB 9 (More than 100Ω in case of CB series)
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
*1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "110 ".

*3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. When using X-TIO, turn ON the 14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
Terminal No.
Signal
name CB700 RB700
SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25
T/R(A)
T/R(B)
3
4
14
15
8
9
14
15
17
18
26
27
28
29
14
15
26
27
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
Terminal No.
CONNECTION TO

SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3/6
T/R(A) 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1/5
T/R(B) 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2/4
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO


SDA 1 T/R(B)
SDB 6 T/R(A)
RDA 2 NC
RDB 7 NC
SG 5 SG
RSA 3 SG
CSA 4
RSB 8
CSB 9
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ".

manual.

(1) Cable length

(1) GOT side
terminating resistor setting switch.
(b) For GT14, GT11
terminating resistor selector switch.

to the following.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
settings)
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
2.
PLC
11
3. Set this item when change the transmission
9600bps,
CONNECTION TO
19200bps,
GE FANUC PLC
Transmissio speed used for communication with the
38400bps,
n Speed connected equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
4. Set this item when change the data length used
for communication with the connected
equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
12
CONNECTION TO LS
Set this item when change the data length used
for communication with the connected
Stop Bit 1bit/2bits
SYSTEMS PLC
equipment.
INDUSTRIAL
Click! (Default: 1bit)
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
None
Parity Even
communication.
13
Odd
(Default: No)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Set the number of retries to be performed when
menu. Retry a communication error occurs. 0 to 5times
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 0time)
2.
CONTROLLER
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
SICK SAFETY
Set the time period for a communication to time
Timeout
channel to be used from the list menu. out. 3 to 30sec
Time
(Default: 3sec)
3. Set the following items. Set this item to adjust the transmission timing
• Manufacturer: RKC Delay Time of the communication request from the GOT. 0 to 300ms
• Controller Type: RKC SR Mini HG (Default: 0ms) 14

Select the communication format.
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) Format 1:
SIEMENS PLC
Accessible to H-PCP-J, H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B,
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Format
SRZ, FB, PF, HA, MA, RMC, SRX, B400 series
1/2
Controller Type, Format 2:

I/F, and Driver are set. Accessible to CB series, RB, AG, THV, SA, SB1
series
environment.
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
9.4.2Communication detail settings POINT

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The communication interface setting can be changed
on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing
POINT [Communication Settings] of project data.
manual.
16
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. GT User's Manual
MURATEC CONTROLLER
For details, refer to the following. (2) Precedence in communication settings

CONNECTION TO
1.1.2 I/F communication setting When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the

POINT  Setting DIP switches

Make the settings of transmission speed,
YOKOGAWA temperature controller communication mode, data length, parity bit and stop
For details of RKC temperature controller, refer to the bit.
following manual.
COM.PORT3
User's Manual of the RKC temperature
controller
COM.PORT1
Model name Refer to
H-PCP-J 9.5.1 COM.PORT2
H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B 9.5.2
Z-TIO module,
Z-DIO module, 9.5.3
Z-CT module
Z-COM module 9.5.4
CB Series 9.5.5
Front
FB Series 9.5.6
RB Series 9.5.7 COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2
Temperature controller setting switch(SW2)
PF900/901 9.5.8
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HA400/401, HA900/901 9.5.9
AG500 9.5.10
RMC500 9.5.11
MA900, MA901 9.5.12
COM.PORT3
THV-A1 9.5.13
setting switch
SA100 (SW3)
9.5.14
SA200
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X-TIO module 9.5.15
Right side
9.5.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J
(1) Transmission speed settings
(a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2
Make the communication settings of the temperature SW2
Communication speed
controller. 3 4
OFF OFF 9600bps
Item Setting range
ON OFF 19200bps
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
OFF ON 38400bps
Communication mode MODBUS
Data bit 8bits (b) COM.PORT3
Parity bit None
SW3
Stop bit*1 1bit Communication speed
3 4
Unit address*2 0 to F OFF OFF 9600bps
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. ON OFF 19200bps
*2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other
units. OFF ON 38400bps

(2) Communication mode settings 9.5.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A, H- 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
(a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2 PCP-B
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SW2
5 6 7 8
Communication protocol  Communication settings
ON OFF OFF OFF MODBUS protocol
Make the communication settings of the temperature
controller.
(b) COM.PORT3
Item Setting range
10
SW3
Communication protocol Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
5
Data bit 8bits
ON MODBUS protocol
Parity bit None
Unit address*2 0 to F
PLC
(3) Settings of data length, parity bit, and stop bit *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
(a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2 units. 11
SW2
Data bit configuration  Setting DIP switches
CONNECTION TO
1 2
GE FANUC PLC
Make the settings of transmission speed, data length,
OFF OFF Data 8-bit, Non parity, Stop 1bit parity bit, and stop bit.
(b) COM.PORT3
SW3
1 2
Data bit configuration
4 3 12
Top section 2 1
CONNECTION TO LS
OFF OFF Data 8-bit, Non parity, Stop 1bit
SYSTEMS PLC
OFF
INDUSTRIAL
ON
 Unit address settings
Set the unit address using the unit address setting
switch.
13
Rear view of module mainframe with mother block removed
CONNECTION TO
(1) Transmission speed settings
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
3 4 Communication speed
OFF ON 9600bps
Unit address setting switch
ON ON 19200bps
14
(2) Settings of data length and parity bit
CONNECTION TO
1 2 Data bit configuration
SIEMENS PLC
OFF OFF Data 8-bit, Non parity
Setting range: 0 to F
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

9.5.3 Connecting to Z-TIO, Z-DIO,
 Unit address settings
Z-CT
switch.
(1) Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the temperature
controller.
Item Setting range

*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Communication speed
Data bit : 8bits, Parity : None
Data bit : 8bits, Parity : Even
Data bit : 8bits, Parity : Odd
Stop bit : 1bit (fixed)
*2 0 to F
Unit address
Setting range: 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms

*2 Select the module address without overlapping with that of
other units.
(2) Setting DIP switches

Make the settings of transmission speed, data bit
configuration, communication protocol
Dip switch
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF ON
Front side Right side
Switch position
1 2 3 4 5 6
9600bps ON OFF
Communication
19200bps OFF ON
speed
38400bps ON ON
Data bit: 8bits,
OFF OFF ON
Parity: None
Data bit Data bit: 8bits,
OFF ON ON
configuration Parity: Even
Data bit: 8bits,
ON ON ON
Parity: Odd
Communication
MODBUS ON
protocol

(3) Unit address settings 9.5.4 Connecting to Z-COM 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
switch. (1) Communication settings
CONTROLLER
Module address setting switch Item Setting range
*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Communication speed
Communication protocol Host (MODBUS)
Data bit 8bits (fixed) 10
Parity None (fixed)
Setting range : 0 to F
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Unit address*2 0 to F
Interval time 0 to 250ms
PLC
Dip switch settings
valid
valid / invalid
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. 11

units.
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
(2) Setting DIP switches
configuration, communication protocol.
Dip switch
ON
(4) Interval time settings
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Configure the interval time setting using the RKC
CONNECTION TO LS
COM
communication setting tool (WinPCI).
After the communication is started, set as follows. COM. OFF ON
SYSTEMS PLC
PORT1
INDUSTRIAL
COM1
Setting item Set value COM.
PORT2
Instrument 0
CFG file ZTIO_rkc.cfg COM.
Interval time 0 to 250ms PORT3
For the using method of RKC communication setting

COM2
COM. 13
PORT4
tool, refer to the following.
CONNECTION TO
RKC communication setting tool user's manual
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
Front side Right side
Switch position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Communication 9600bps ON OFF 14

speed 19200bps OFF ON
CONNECTION TO
(COM1) 38400bps ON ON
SIEMENS PLC
Communication
Host
protocol ON
(MODBUS)
(COM1)
Communication 9600bps OFF
speed
(COM2) 19200bps ON 15
HIRATA CORPORATION
Communication
Host
HNC CONTROLLER
protocol ON OFF OFF

CONNECTION TO
(MODBUS)
(COM2)
Dip
switch settings valid OFF
valid / invalid
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

(3) Unit address settings 9.5.6 Connecting to FB Series
switch. (1) Communication settings
Item*1 Setting range*1
Communication protocol 1: MODBUS
Device address
1 to 99
(Slave address)*2
COM
96: 9600bps
Setting range : 0 to F
Communication speed*3 19.2: 19200bps
38.4: 38400bps
Data bit configuration (2) Refer to the data bit configuration.
Interval time 0 to 250
*1 Items and setting range are common to communication 1

and communication 2.
*2 When the setting value is set to 0, a communication is not
made.
(2) Data bit configuration
Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit

8n1 8 None 1
(4) Interval time settings 8n2 8 None 2

Configure the interval time setting using the RKC 8E1 8 Even 1
communication setting tool (WinPCI). 8E2 8 Even 2
After the communication is started, set as follows. 8o1 8 Odd 1
Setting item Set value 8o2 8 Odd 2

Instrument 0
CFG file ZCOM_rkc.cfg (3) Communication setting mode
Communication 1 interval time
0 to 250ms
Set the communication setting mode using the
Communication 2 interval time operation panel of the FB series main unit.
For the using method of RKC communication setting For details of the communication setting mode, refer to
tool, refer to the following. the following.
RKC communication setting tool user's manual FB series "Communication Instruction Manual"
9.5.5 Connecting to CB Series
Item Setting range

*1 1 to 99
Device address
2: 9600bps
Communication speed*2
3: 19200bps
0: 8/1/None
Data bit configuration 6: 8/1/Even
7: 8/1/Odd
Interval time 0 to 150

made.
(2) Communication setting mode

operation panel of the CB series main unit.
For details of the communication setting mode, refer to
the following.
CB series "Communication Instruction Manual"

9.5.7 Connecting to RB Series 9.5.9 Connecting to HA400/401, 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
HA900/901
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Item Setting range  Communication settings
Communication protocol 1: MODBUS Make the communication settings by operating the key
Device address of the temperature controller.
(Slave address)*1
1 to 99 (Communication 1) 10
2: 9600bps Item Setting range
Communication speed*2
3: 19200bps Communication speed 1*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Data bit configuration (2) Refer to the data bit configuration. [8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit
Interval time 0 to 250 [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
Data bit configuration 1*1
[8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
*1 When the setting value is set to 0, a communication is not (Data bit, Parity bit, Stop
PLC
made. bit)
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. [8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
[8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
11
(2) Data bit configuration Device address 1*2
1 to 99*4
(Slave address 1)
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms)
0 8 None 1
(Communication 2)
1 8 None 2
Item Setting range
2 8 Even 1
3 8 Even 2 Communication speed 2*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
4 8 Odd 1
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit 12
*1
[8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
CONNECTION TO LS
5 8 Odd 2 Data bit configuration 2
(Data bit, Parity bit, Stop
SYSTEMS PLC
bit)
INDUSTRIAL
(3) Communication setting mode
Device address 2*2
operation panel of the RB series main unit. 1 to 99*4
(Slave address 2)
For details of the communication setting mode, refer to
the following. Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms)
13
RB series "Communication Instruction Manual" *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*2 Select the device address1/2 without overlapping with that of
CONNECTION TO
other units.
CONTROLLER
9.5.8 Connecting to PF900/900 *3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character
SICK SAFETY
stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT
side to the receiving status (until the temperature controller
becomes ready to send). Set as necessary.
 Communication settings *4 When the setting value is set to 0, a communication is not
made.
of the temperature controller. 14
CONNECTION TO
Item Setting range
SIEMENS PLC
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps,
Communication speed 1*1
57600bps
Communication protocol 1 MODBUS
Data bit configuration 1*1

[8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit 15
(Data bit, Parity bit, Stop
HIRATA CORPORATION

bit)
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
Device address 1*2

1 to 99*4
(Slave address 1)
Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms)
*1
*2
Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of
16
other units.
*3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

made.

9.5.10 Connecting to AG500 9.5.12 Connecting to MA900, MA901
 Communication settings  Communication settings

Make the communication settings by operating the key Make the communication settings by operating the key
of the temperature controller. of the temperature controller.
Item Setting range Item Setting range
Communication speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Communication speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication protocol MODBUS [8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
Data bit configuration*1
[8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
Data bit configuration*1 (Data bit, Parity bit, Stop
[8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit
(Data bit, Parity bit, Stop bit)
[8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit [8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
bit) [8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
[8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit Device address*2
1 to 99*4
Device address *2 (Slave address)
*4
1 to 99
(Slave address) Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms)
Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms) *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. other units.
*2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of *3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character
other units. stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT
*3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character side to the receiving status (until the temperature controller
stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT becomes ready to send). Set as necessary.
side to the receiving status (until the temperature controller *4 When the setting value is set to 0, a communication is not
becomes ready to send). Set as necessary. made.
made.
9.5.13 Connecting to THV-A1

9.5.11 Connecting to RMC500
 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key
Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller.
Item Setting range
Item Setting range Communication speed*1 9600bps (fixed)
Communication speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Data bit: 8bit (fixed)

Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit configuration*1 Parity bit: None (fixed)
Stop bit: 1bit (fixed)
MODBUS data*2
0 to 255 (ms)
Extension time Device address*2
1 to 99*4
(Slave address)
[8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms)
Data bit configuration*1
(Data bit, Parity bit, Stop *1 Adjust the settings of the GOT side with the temperature
[8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit controller settings.
bit)
[8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit *2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of
[8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit other units.
Device address*3 stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT
1 to 99*4 side to the receiving status (until the temperature controller
(Slave address)
Interval time*5 0 to 250 (ms) *4 When the setting value is set to 0, a communication is not
made.
*2 Set the extension time for the data interval time in the
MODBUS communication (which is lower than 24 bit time).
Set when the data time interval exceeds 24 bit time.
*3 Select the device address without overlapping with that of
other units.
made.

9.5.14 Connecting to SA100/SA200 (2) Setting DIP switches
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
 Communication settings configuration, communication protocol.
CONTROLLER
Dip switch
Item Setting range
Communication speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

ON
ON
10
OFF
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Data bit configuration*1 [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
(Data bit, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit
PLC
Device address*2
(Slave address)
1 to 99*4
Switch position 11
Interval time*3 0 to 250 (ms) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONNECTION TO
9600bps ON OFF
GE FANUC PLC
Communicati
*2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of 19200bps OFF ON
other units. on speed
*3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character 38400bps ON ON
stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT Data bit: 8bit,
side to the receiving status (until the temperature controller ON OFF OFF
becomes ready to send). Set as necessary. Parity: None
made.
Data bit Data bit: 8bit,
configuration Parity: Even
ON OFF ON 12
CONNECTION TO LS
Data bit: 8bit,
9.5.15 Connecting to X-TIO Module Parity: Odd
ON ON ON
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Communicati
MODBUS ON
(1) Communication settings on protocol
Make the communication settings of the temperature Internal data

bus OFF OFF
controller.
Item Setting range

termination
resistor
13
ON ON
setting
Communication speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONNECTION TO
Data interval
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
extension 0 to 99ms ON OFF ON
Data bit: 8bit, Parity: None time
Data bit: 8bit, Parity: Even
Data bit: 8bit, Parity: Odd (3) Module address settings
Stop bit: 1bit (fixed) Set the unit address using the rotary switch (address
setting switch).
14
Module address*2 1 to 99
CONNECTION TO
When combining the module, turn ON the Rotary switch
Internal data bus
internal data bus terminating resistor at both (Address setting switch)
SIEMENS PLC
terminating resistor
ends of the module.
FAIL/RUN
RX/TX
23
456
901
Data interval extension EVENT1

EVENT2 Upper digit setting
0 to 99ms EVENT3
time
EVTNT4
23
78 (Set value x10)
9 01
45 6
78
23
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. 23

9 01
45 6
15
78
Lower digit setting

901
456

made. 78 (Set value x1)
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

3 8 Even 2
HINT 4 8 Odd 1
5 8 Odd 2
The rotary switch (address setting switch) is also used
*6 Set the maximum time from when the last character stop bit
for the data interval extension time setting. is sent from the GOT side until the transmission cable
The setting method is the same as that of the module becomes ready to receive.
address.
For the data interval extension time, refer to the
following.
9.5.17 Connecting to B400
(4)Data interval extension time settings
Make the communication settings of B400 using the
(4) Data interval extension time settings
Set the data interval extension time as the following rotary switch key and the DIP switch.
procedure. For the operation procedure, refer to the B400 manual.
1. Turn the power of the module OFF. Item Setting range Settings
Unit address setting (1)Rotary switch setting
0 to 99*1
2. Set the DIP switch 4 and 6 to ON and 5 to OFF. (CH1 to CH8) (SW1, SW2)
4800bps?9600bps?1
3. Set the data interval extension time using the rotary Communication speed
9200bps?38400bps
(2)DIP switch setting
(SW3)
switch (address setting switch). Data bit configuration 0 to 5
For the setting method, refer to the following. Communication
RS-422A, RS-485
(3)Module address settings specification setting (3)DIP switch settings
Termination resistor (SW4)
4. Turn the power of the module ON. setting
Enable, Disable
The FAIL/RUN lamp lights in green and the set time *1 When the setting value is 98 or 99, the communication
becomes valid. address is the same as for 97.
(1) Rotary switch setting (SW1, SW2)

5. Turn the power of the module OFF again and set the
Set the unit address using the rotary switch.
DIP switches and rotary switch to the original position.
Rotary switch
(Address setting switch)
9.5.16 Connecting to SB1
78
4 56
90
SW1: Lower digit setting

1
23
(Set value x1)
Make the communication settings of SB1 using the
78
switch key on the front surface.
4 56
90
SW2: Upper digit setting

For the operation procedure, refer to the SB1 manual.
1
23
(Set value x10)
Item Setting range Item Setting range

Communication 0: RKC communication Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary
protocol*2 1: MODBUS (CH1 to CH4) switch setting value + 1.
Device address*1*3 Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary
0 to 99
(Slave address) (CH5 to CH8) switch setting value + 2.
0: 2400bps
1: 4800bps
Communication speed*1*4
2: 9600bps
3: 19200bps
Data bit configuration*1*5 0 to 5
Interval time*6 0 to 250ms

*2 Select 1: MODBUS.
*3 When the setting value is 0, communication is not
performed.
*4 The communication speed cannot be set to 2400bps or
4800bps on the GOT side.
Select 2 or 3.
*5 For details on the data bit configuration, refer to the
following.

0 8 None 1
1 8 None 2
2 8 Even 1

(2) DIP switch setting (SW3) 9.5.18 Station number setting 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
Set the communication speed and the data bit
CONNECTION TO
configuration using the DIP switch (SW3). Set each station number so that no station number
CONTROLLER
Dip switch(SW3) overlaps.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Station
No.3
Station
No.10
Station
No.1
Station
No.15
Station
No.6
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
GOT
OFF ON
Switch position
PLC
Examples of station number setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (1) Direct specification
4800bps OFF OFF The station number setting range of the temperature 11
Communication 9600bps ON OFF controller side differs from that of the GOT side.
- Specify the station No. of the temperature controller to
CONNECTION TO
speed 19200bps OFF ON
GE FANUC PLC
be changed when setting devices referring the following
38400bps ON ON
table.
Data bit:
8 bits, Module address GOT side
Parity: Temperature setting of station
- OFF OFF - Remark
None, controller temperature number
Stop: 2 controller side setting 12
bits H-PCP-J
CONNECTION TO LS
H-PCP-A The GOT side station
Data bit: 0 to F 1 to 16
H-PCP-B number setting is the module
SYSTEMS PLC
8 bits, (Hexadecimal) (Decimal)
Z-TIO address setting value +1.
INDUSTRIAL
Parity: - ON OFF -
Z-COM
None,
Data bit The GOT side station
Stop: 1 bit 0 to F 17 to 32
configuration Z-DIO number setting is the module
Data bit: (Hexadecimal) (Decimal)
address setting value +17.
8 bits,
Parity: - OFF ON - 0 to F 33 to 48
The GOT side station 13
Z-CT number setting is the module
Even, (Hexadecimal) (Decimal)
address setting value +33.
CONNECTION TO
Stop: 1 bit
The GOT side station
CONTROLLER
1 to 99 2 to 100
SICK SAFETY
Data bit: X-TIO number setting is the module
(Decimal) (Decimal)
8 bits, address setting value +1.
Parity: - ON ON - CB, FB, RB, The GOT side station
Odd, PF, AG, HA, 1 to 99 1 to 99 number setting is the same
Stop: 1 bit MA, RMC, (Decimal) (Decimal) as the module address
THV, SA, SB1 setting value. 14
(3) DIP switch settings (SW4) The GOT side station
Set the communication specifications and the 1 to 99 1 to 99 number is the module
CONNECTION TO
B400
termination resistor using the DIP switch (SW4). (Decimal) (Decimal) address setting value +1 or
SIEMENS PLC
+2.
Dip switch(SW4)
ON ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
Switch position
HNC CONTROLLER

CONNECTION TO
1 2 3 4
Communication RS-422A OFF OFF -

specification
setting RS485 ON ON -
Enable - ON
16
Termination
resistor setting
MURATEC CONTROLLER
Disable - OFF
CONNECTION TO

number of the temperature controller of which data is to
be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register
(GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Setting range
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13
104 GD14
105 GD15
106 GD16
1 to 99
107 GD17
For the setting other than the above, error
108 GD18
(dedicated device is out of range) will occur.
109 GD19
110 GD20
111 GD21
112 GD22
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
not be monitored. 10
 Setting item
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Item Description
Device
13
Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No.
Network 1 to 99 :To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No.
Station No.
100 to 115 To specify the station No. of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data
register (GD).*1
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register.
14
CONNECTION TO
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range
SIEMENS PLC
100 GD10
101 GD11 1 to 99
(If setting a value outside
: :
the range above, a device
114 GD24 range error occurs.) 15
115 GD25
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
POINT
Device settings of RKC temperature controller
16
Set by a value of "unit address + 1".
MURATEC CONTROLLER
• For unit address 0: Set "1".

• For unit address F: Set "16".
CONNECTION TO

9.6.1 RKC SR Mini HG
Device No.
representation
Bit device
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices ―

Word device
Data (..) ..0000 to ..FFFF Hexadecimal
9.7 Precautions
 Station number setting of the temperature controller system
Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.01 station.

Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of "time adjusting" or "time broad cast"
by GOT clock control will be disabled.
 Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment

By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty
station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual.

9.7 Precautions
10
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO
10.
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
10.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
10.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
10.4 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
10 - 1
10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC

Communicati
on Type
SLC500-20
SLC500-30
SLC500-40 RS-232
SLC5/01
SLC500 10.2.1
SLC5/02
SLC5/03
SLC5/04 RS-232
SLC5/05
1761-L10BWA
1761-L10BWB
1761-L16AWA
1761-L16BWA
1761-L16BWB
MicroLogix1000
1761-L16BBB RS-232
(Digital CPU)
1761-L32AWA
1761-L32BWA
10.2.2
1761-L32BWB
1761-L32BBB
1761-L32AAA
1761-L20AWA-5A
MicroLogix1000
1761-L20BWA-5A RS-232
(Analog CPU)
1761-L20BWB-5A
MicroLogix1200 1762-L24BWA RS-232
MicroLogix1500 1764-LSP RS-232
1756-L
1756-L1M1
1756-L1M2
1756-L1M3
1756-L61
1756-L62
1756-L63 RS-232 10.2.3

ControlLogix
1756-L55M12 Ethernet 10.3.1
1756-L55M13
1756-L55M14
1756-L55M16
1756-L55M22
1756-L55M23
1756-L55M24
10 - 2 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

Communicati 9
Series Model name Clock *1 Refer to
RKC TEMPERATURE
on Type
CONNECTION TO
1769-L31
CONTROLLER
1769-L32E
RS-232 10.2.3
CompactLogix 1769-L32C
Ethernet 10.3.1
1769-L35E
1769-L35CR
1794-L33
10
FlexLogix RS-232 10.2.3
1794-L34
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10 - 3

10.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series
 When connecting to one PLC

AB SLC500, AB 1:N AB SLC500

SLC500
GOT
series
Connection cable

GT09-C30R20701-9S(3m)
15m
SLC500 RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

5)
SLC500 series GOT
DH485 network Connection cable
Adapter

Number of
Cable model
Communicatio Max. connectable
Series *1 Connection diagram Option device Model
Adapter equipment
n Type distance
number
- (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection
SLC500 1770-KF3 RS-232 15m 1 GOT for 1 adapter
diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Allen-Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc. For details of the product, contact Rockwell Automation, Inc.

10.2.2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
MicroLogix
1000/1200/1500 GOT
AB MicroLogix
series
Connection cable 10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Number of
PLC
Commu connectable
Cable model Max.
Series*2 nication Option device Model
11
Connection diagram number distance equipment
Type
1761-CBL-PM02*1
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
GE FANUC PLC
(Series C or later)
15m
MicroLogix1000/ or
RS-232
1200/1500 RS232 connection diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P
15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

1761-CBLPM02 12
*1
CONNECTION TO LS
(Series C or later)
MicroLogix1000/ RS232
RS-232 or + 15m - (Built into GOT)
1200/1500
SYSTEMS PLC
RS232
INDUSTRIAL
*2 For MicroLogix1000 (Digital CPU), it is supported in the series D and later.
 When connecting to multiple PLCs 13
CONNECTION TO
MicroLogix
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
1000/1200/1500 GOT
series
DH485 network Connection cable
14
Adapter
CONNECTION TO
Number of
SIEMENS PLC
Cable model
Communic Max. connectable
Series*2 Adapter*1 Connection diagram Option device Model
equipment
ation Type distance
number
MicroLogix1000/
1770-KF3 RS-232
RS232 connection
15m
- (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for 1 adapter
15
1200/1500
HIRATA CORPORATION
diagram 2)
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2-9P
*2 For MicroLogix1000 (Digital CPU), it is supported in the series C and later.
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

10.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to Control/Compact/FlexLogix Series
Control/
Compact/ GOT
AB Control/CompactLogix
FlexLogix series
Connection cable

1747-CP3*1
1756-CP3*1 - (Built into GOT)
Control/Compact/
RS-232 or 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC
FlexLogix
4) GT15-RS2-9P

10.2.4 Connection Diagram 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
GOT side ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side
CONTROLLER
GOT and the PLC. CD/NC*1 1 1 CD
 RS-232 cable RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD
ER(DTR) 4 4 DTR 10
SG 5 5 SG
GOT side ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
CD/NC*1 1 1 CD
RS(RTS) 7 7 RTS
RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD
CS(CTS) 8 8 CTS
PLC
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD
- 9 - FG
ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR
11
SG 5 5 SG *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC
CONNECTION TO
DR(DSR) 6 4 DTR RS232 connection diagram 5)
GE FANUC PLC
RS(RTS) 7 7 RTS GOT side
(terminal block) ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side
CS(CTS) 8 8 CTS
- 9 - FG SD 2 RXD
RD 3 TXD
12
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC ER 6 DSR
CONNECTION TO LS
RS232 connection diagram 2) DR 4 DTR
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
GOT side ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side SG 5 SG
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG RS 1 CD
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD CS 7 RTS
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD NC 8 CTS 13

ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR NC - FG
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 7 SG
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
DR(DSR) 6 20 DTR GOT side ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side
RS(RTS) 7 4 RTS (terminal block) (Dedicated cable:1761-CBL-PM02)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CTS SD 3 TXD

- 9 8 CD RD 2 RXD
14
ER 1 -
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
RS232 connection diagram 3) DR 4 -
GOT side ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side SG 5 SG
CD/NC*1 1 1 24V RS 7 RTS
15
RD(RXD) 2 7 TXD CS 8 CTS
SD(TXD) 3 4 RXD NC 6 -
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
ER(DTR) 4 5 CD NC 9
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 2 SG
DR(DSR) 6 8 SG
RS(RTS) 7 6 CTS
CS(CTS) 8 3 RTS 16
- 9 - FG
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC

GOT side
(terminal block) ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side
SD 4 RXD
RD 7 TXD
ER 1 24V
DR 5 CD
SG 2 SG
RS 6 CTS
CS 3 RTS
NC 8 SG
NC - FG
(2) Precautions when preparing a cable

(a) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or
less.
(c) ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the ALLEN-
BRADLEY PLC side module.
For details, refer to the ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
user's manual.

10.2.5 GOT Side Settings 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
 Setting communication interface Make the settings according to the usage
CONTROLLER
(Communication settings) environment.

2. 10
CONNECTION TO
POINT
ALLEN-BRADLEY
3. confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
PLC
11
4.
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
(1) AB SLC500, AB 1: Ns
Click!
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
menu.

channel to be used from the list menu.

13
• Manufacturer: AB
CONNECTION TO
• Controller Type: Set either of the followings.
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
AB SLC500
AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Item Description Range
AB Control/CompactLogix
• I/F: Interface to be used Transmission
• Driver: Set either of the followings. Speed
equipment.
9600bps,
19200bps
14
<For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11> (Default: 19200bps)
CONNECTION TO
When connecting to SLC500 Series: AB Specify the adapter address (station
SIEMENS PLC
SLC500, AB 1:N *1
No. of the PLC that the GOT will
Adapter Address 0 to 31
monitor) in the connected network.
When connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1500
(Default: 0)
Series: AB MicroLogix
When connecting to Control/Compact/FlexLogix of the adapter to which the GOT is
15
*1 1 to 31
Series: AB Control/CompactLogix Host Address
connected) in the connected network.
<GT10> (Default: 1)
HIRATA CORPORATION
When connecting to SLC500 Series: AB *1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
SLC500 host address.
When connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1500

Series: AB MicroLogix
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

(2) AB MicroLogix (3) AB Control/CompactLogix
Item Description Range Item Description Range

Set this item when change the Set this item when change the 9600bps,
4800bps,
transmission speed used for transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission 9600bps, Transmission
communication with the connected communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed 19200bps, Speed
equipment. equipment. 57600bps
38400bps
(Default: 19200bps) (Default: 19200bps) 115200bps
Specify the format in which the sum Set this item when change the data
check is performed during length used for communication with
Sum Check Type communication when performing sum BCC, CRC16 the connected equipment.
check. (Default: 8bits)
(Default: BCC) Specify the stop bit length for
Specify the adapter address (station Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
No. of the PLC that the GOT will (Default: 1bit)
Adapter Address*1 0 to 63
monitor) in the connected network. Specify whether or not to perform a
(Default: 0) None
Parity Even
Specify the host address (station No. during communication.
Odd
of the adapter to which the GOT is (Default: None)
Host Address*1 0 to 63
connected) in the connected network. Specify the format in which the sum
(Default: 1) check is performed during
BCC,
*1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and Sum Check Type communication when performing sum
CRC16
host address. check.
(Default: BCC)
Retry 0 to 5times
error occurs.
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
Specify the adapter address (station
Adapter Address 0 to 254
(Default: 0)
of the adapter to which the GOT is
(Default: 0)
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
GOT.
(Default: 0ms)

(4) AB SLC500
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
POINT
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
data.
10
manual.
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
GT User's Manual
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Transmission
Speed
equipment. 19200bps
(Default: 19200bps)
Adapter Address*1
0 to 31 12
CONNECTION TO LS
(Default: 0)
SYSTEMS PLC
of the adapter to which the GOT is
INDUSTRIAL
Host Address*1 1 to 31
(Default: 1)
*1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and
host address.
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

10.2.6 PLC Side Setting
 Connecting to DH485 network via adapter
(1770-KF3) (Setting of Adapter)
POINT Item Setting details

*1 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps
Baud Rate
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC Parity Even
For details of ALLEN-BRADLEY PLCs, refer to the Flow Control Disable (No Handshaking)
following manuals.
DF1 Device
DF1 half-duplex slave, local mode
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC user's Manual Category
Error Detection*2 BCC
 Directly connecting to the CPU DH-485 Baud Rate 19200bps

Maximum Node
1 to 31*3
Setting details Address
Control/ DH-485 Node

MicroLogix 0 to 31*4
Item SLC500 Compact/ Address
1000/1200/
Series FlexLogix *1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed
1500 Series
Series setting on the GOT side.
4800bps, 4800bps,
4800bps, the following.
9600bps, 9600bps,
Baud Rate*1 9600bps, 10.2.5 ■ Communication detail settings
19200bps, 19200bps,
19200bps *2 Set the Error Detection according to the sum check format
38400bps 38400bps
setting on the GOT side.
Parity EVEN NONE NONE For the sum check format setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
Control Line NO HANDSHAKING
Communication *3 For the Maximum Node Address, set the same address as
DF1 HALF-DUPLEX SLAVE
Driver the Maximum Node Address on the DH-485 network.
*4 Set the DH-485 Node Address according to the Host
Duplicate Packet
DISABLE Address on the GOT side.
Detection Set a unique DH-485 Node Address so that it does not
Station Address 0 conflict with the Node Address of the PLC CPU on the DH-
485 network.
Error Detection BCC BCC, CRC*2 BCC, CRC*2 For the Host Address setting on the GOT side, refer to the
following.
*1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed
setting on the GOT side. 10.2.5 ■ Communication detail settings
the following.
*2 Set the Error Detection according to the sum check format
setting on the GOT side.
For the sum check format setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10.3.1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix
10
ControlLogix, EtherNet/IP
communication GOT
CONNECTION TO
CompactLogix
ALLEN-BRADLEY
EtherNet/IP(AB), Gateway
module
Connection cable
PLC
11
Number of
Communi Maximum
CONNECTION TO
EtherNet/IP connectable
segment
GE FANUC PLC
Series *1
cation Cable model*2 Option device Model*4 equipment
communication module
Type length*3
• 10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable The following is
- (Built into GOT) *5
(STP) or unshielded the number of
ControlLogix
1756-ENET(10Mbps)
1756-ENBT(10/100Mbps)
Ethernet
twisted pair cable (UTP) :
Category 3, 4, and 5
100m
GOTs for 1 PLC
TCP: 64
12
CONNECTION TO LS
• 100BASE-TX (recommended to
Shielded twisted pair cable GT15-J71E71-100 16 units or less)
SYSTEMS PLC
(STP) : Category 5 and 5e
INDUSTRIAL
• 10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable The following is
- (Built into GOT) *5
(STP) or unshielded the number of
twisted pair cable (UTP) : GOTs for 1 PLC
CompactLogix - Ethernet 100m
• 100BASE-TX
TCP: 32
(recommended to
13
Shielded twisted pair cable GT15-J71E71-100 16 units or less)
CONNECTION TO
(STP) : Category 5 and 5e
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
system.
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
cascades.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following. 15
GT16 User's Manual
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

2.
3.
4.

(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
Click!
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Mask*1 If the sub network is not used, the
255.255.255.255
menu. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

channel to be used from the list menu. Default 0.0.0.0 to
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255
router)
3. Set the following items. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Manufacturer: AB 1024 to 5010,
• Controller Type: Control/CompactLogix Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
• I/F: Interface to be used Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
• Driver: EtherNet/IP(AB), Gateway No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013, 44818

and 49153)

GOT Set the GOT port No. for the
1024 to 5010,
5014 to 65534
Communication connection with the Ethernet module. (Except for 5011,
Make the settings according to the usage Port No. (Default: 5015) 5012, 5013, 44818
environment. and 49153)
11.3.2 ■ Communication detail settings Set the number of retries to be

timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
POINT Specify the time period from the GOT
startup until GOT starts the
The settings of connecting equipment can be communication with the PLC CPU.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. (Default: 3sec)
For details, refer to the following. Set the time period for a
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
0 to 10000
( 10 ms)
(Default: 0ms)

(2) GT15, GT12
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
Item Description
Range
11
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
GOT IP Address
(Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
router) 0.0.0.0 to 12
If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
INDUSTRIAL
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected.(Only for connection
Gateway 255.255.255.255
via router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
Port No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013, 44818
and 49153)
1024 to 65534,
GOT equipment.
Communication
Port No.
Set the port No. without using the
same No. as the port No. for the
(Except for 5011,
5012, 5013, 44818 14
and 49153)
Ethernet download.
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 5015)
SIEMENS PLC
timeout occurs.
out. 15
(Default: 3times)
HIRATA CORPORATION

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

Startup Time communication with the PLC 3 to 255sec
CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
Timeout Time
16
communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
Set the delay time for reducing
MURATEC CONTROLLER
the load of the network/ 0 to 10000

Delay Time
destination PLC. ( 10 ms)
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 0ms)

10.3.3 PLC side setting
POINT
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
For details of ALLEN-BRADLEY PLCs, refer to the
following manuals.
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC user's Manual
 Parameter setting
Set the following parameters with the software package
Item Description Set value
manufactured by the Allen-Bradley.
The host is displayed.(The host is
Host ―
indicated with an asterisk (*).) Item Setting details
Set the network No. of the connected
Name Sets the name.
N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 239
(Default: blank) IP Address IP address of the connected module*1
Set the station No. of the connected Slots No. for installing the EtherNet/IP communication
Slot
PLC No. Ethernet module. 1 to 64 module
(Default: blank)
*1 For the IP address, make the same setting as that of each
AB(EtherNet/ Ethernet module set on GT Designer3.
Type AB(EtherNet/IP) (fixed) Do not set the same IP Address as those of GOT and
IP) (fixed)
controller on the Ethernet network.
Set the IP address of the connected For the address setting on GT Designer3, refer to the
PLC side IP
IP address Ethernet module. following.
address
(Default: blank) 11.3.2 ■ Communication detail settings
Port No. 44818 (fixed) 44818 (fixed)
Communication
format
TCP (fixed) TCP (fixed) 10.3.4 Precautions
Set the slot No. of the PLC to which
Slot No. the Ethernet module is connected. 0 to 16  When setting IP address
(Default: blank)
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
system.)
POINT The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility Consult with the administrator of the network before
The communication interface setting can be setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
after writing [Communication Settings] of project  When connecting to multiple GOTs
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following (1) Setting PLC No.
manual. When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
GT User's Manual
10.3.2 ■Ethernet setting
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the (2) Setting IP address
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
(3) Setting IP address and port No multiple GOTs.
The same IP address cannot be set for the same A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.
port No.The same IP address can be set for the
different port No.
performance.
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX
(100Mbps)Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
are as follows.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the The ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC device addressing
same series. consists of a file and element.
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Make setting as follows using GT Designer3.
the controller actually used. (1) AB SLC500, AB Micro Logix
(a) When setting a bit address as a bit device
PLC
File type Bit No. 11
 Setting item File No. Bit delimiter
CONNECTION TO
Element delimiter Element No.
GE FANUC PLC
↓
Setting by GT Designer3
12
CONNECTION TO LS
File type File No. Element No. Bit No.
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
File type Bit No.
File No. Bit delimiter
Item Description
Element delimiter Element No.
13
↓
Set the device name, file number, element number, and bit
CONNECTION TO
number.
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word
device.
Importing the tag file created by RSLogix5000,

Device and confirming the tag name is available during File type File No. Element No. Bit No.
device setting.
For importing tag files, refer to the following
14
manual.
CONNECTION TO
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design
SIEMENS PLC
Manual (Fundamentals)
Informa Displays the device type and setting range which are selected
tion in [Device].
Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified

device. 15
HIRATA CORPORATION
Host Select this item when monitoring the host PLC.

HNC CONTROLLER
Network Select this when monitoring the other PLCs.

CONNECTION TO

Other PLC to be monitored.
NWNo.: Set the network No.
Station No.: Set the station No.
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

(b) When setting an element address as a word 10.4.1 AB SLC500
device
Device
File type Element No.
No.
File No. Device name Setting range
represen
Element delimiter tation
↓ B3:0/0 to B3:255/15
Bit (B)
Setting by GT Designer3 B10:0/0 to B255:255/15
Timer (Timing T4:0/14(TT) to T4:255/14(TT)

bit) (T)*2 T10:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
Timer (Timing T4:0/13(DN) to T4:255/13(DN)

bit) (T)*2 T10:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN)
File type File No. Element No.
Counter (Up C5:0/15(CU) to C5:255/15(CU)
Bit device
counter) (C)*2 C10:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU)
Decimal
Counter
File type C5:0/14(CD) to C5:255/14(CD)
(Down
Word delimiter C10:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD)
File No. counter) (C) *2
Element delimiter
Counter
C5:0/13(DN) to C5:255/13(DN)
↓ (Completion
C10:0/13(DN) toC255:255/13(DN)
Setting by GT Designer3 bit) (C)
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)*3
N10:0 to N255:255
B3:0 to B3:255
Word Bit (B)*3
B10:0 to B255:255
Timer (Set T4:0.1(PRE) to T4:255.1(PRE)
value) (T)*1*2 T10:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE)
(2) AB Control/CompactLogix
Timer (Current T4:0.2(ACC) to T4:255.2(ACC)
(a) When setting a bit address as a bit device
Word device
value) (T)*1*2 T10:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
, Counter (Set C5:0.1(PRE) to C5:255.1(PRE) Decimal
File type Bit No. value) (C)*1*2 C10:0.1(PRE) to C255:255.1(PRE)
File No. Element No. Counter

C5:0.2(ACC) to C5:255.2(ACC)
(Current
C10:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
↓ value) (C)*1*2
Setting by GT Designer3 N7:0 to N7:255

Integer (N)*1
N10:0 to N255:255
*1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data.

*2 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device
designation mode.
File type File No. Element No. Bit No.
(b) When setting an element address as a word

device
File type Element No.

File No.
↓

10.4.2 AB MicroLogix1000/1200/ 10.4.3 AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
1500 Series Series (Device extended)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
For details of this communication driver, please contact our
Device company.
No.
represen
Bit (B) B3:0/0 to B255:255/15

tation
10
Timer (Timing 10.4.4 AB Control/CompactLogix
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
T3:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
bit) (T)*3
Timer
(Completion bit) T3:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN) Device
(T)*3
PLC
No.
Bit device
Counter (Up represen

counter) (C)*3
C3:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU) Decimal tation 11
Counter (Down
Bit device
C3:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD)
CONNECTION TO
counter) (C)*3 BOOL BOOL0[0] to BOOL999[31999] Decimal
GE FANUC PLC
Counter
(Completion bit) C3:0/13(DN) to C255:255/13(DN)
INT INT0[0] to INT999[999]
Word device
(C)*3
Integer (N)*4 N3:0/0 to N255:255/15 DINT*1 DINT0[0] to DINT999[999] Decimal
Bit (B) *4 B3:0 to B255:255 REAL*1 REAL0[0] to REAL999[999] 12

Timer (Set
CONNECTION TO LS
T3:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE) *1 Only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed.
value) (T)*1*3
SYSTEMS PLC
Timer (Current
INDUSTRIAL
T3:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
value) (T)*1*3
Word device
Counter (Set
C3:0.1(PRE) to C255:255.1(PRE)
value) (C)*1*3 Decimal
Counter
(Current value) C3:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
13
(C)*1*3
CONNECTION TO
Integer (N)*1 N3:0 to N255:255
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
32bit integer L3:0 to L3:255
(L)*2 L255:0 to L255:255

designation mode. 14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

11
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
11. CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 3
11.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 9
11.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 14 13
11.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 15
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
11.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 17
SICK SAFETY
11.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 17
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
11 - 1
11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC

Communication
Type
IC693CPU311
IC693CPU313
IC693CPU323
IC693CPU350
RS-232
Series90-30 IC693CPU360 11.2.1
RS-422
IC693CPU363
IC693CPU366
IC693CPU367
IC693CPU374
IC697CPU731
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782
IC697CPX928
IC697CPX935
RS-232
Series90-70 IC697CPU780 11.2.2
RS-422
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
IC697CPU788
IC697CPU789
IC697CPM790
IC200UAA003
IC200UAL004
IC200UAL005
IC200UAL006
IC200UAA007
IC200UAR028
IC200UDD110
IC200UDD120
IC200UDD212
IC200UDR005
VersaMax IC200UDR006 RS-232
Micro RS-422 11.2.3
IC200UDR010
IC200UDD064
IC200UDD164
IC200UDR164
IC200UDR064
IC200UAR014
IC200UDD104
IC200UDD112
IC200UDR001
IC200UDR002
IC200UDR003
11 - 2 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
11.2.1 Connecting to Series90-30
POINT 10
Connectable model
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Only the models that are compatible with SNP-X protocol can be connected.
PLC
Power Series Communication
Supplies 90-30 Modules GOT
GE Fanuc Automation 11
(SNP-X)
PS COMM OK
P1 PORT
COPROC US1
P2
Connection cable
CPU 363
US2
CONNECTION TO
ON
OFF
GE FANUC PLC
PORT 1
RS-232
PORT 2
RS-485
FRAME
 For the RS-232 connection

12
Number of
CONNECTION TO LS
Commun Cable model Max.
Power Communication connectable
Model name ication Connection diagram dista Option device Model
SYSTEMS PLC
Supplies*1 Modules*1 equipment
Type number nce
INDUSTRIAL
IC693PWR321
IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 - (Built into GOT)
RS232
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS-232 15m
IC693PWR332
IC693PWR328
IC693CPU323 connection diagram 1)
13
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 - (Built into GOT)
RS232
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS-232 15m 1 PLC for 1 GOT
IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 connection diagram 1)
IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15-RS2-9P
IC693PWR321
14
IC693PWR330 - (Built into GOT)
RS232
CONNECTION TO
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS-232 15m
SIEMENS PLC
IC693PWR332
IC693PWR328 GT15-RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation.

For details of the product, contact GE Fanuc Automation Corporation.
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 - 3

 For the RS-422 connection (connecting to the Communication Modules)
Cable model Number of
Commun connectable
Power Communication Connection Max.
Model name ication Option device Model
Supplies*1 Modules*1 diagram distance equipment
Type
number
RS422
connection 1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
IC693PWR321
IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 1200m*3 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 RS422
IC693PWR328 connection GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 4) 1200m
- (Built into GOT)
RS422
diagram 1)
IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 1200m*3 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
8 PLCs for 1
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 GOT
IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 RS422
IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 connection GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 4) 1200m
- (Built into GOT)
RS422
diagram 1)
IC693PWR321
IC693PWR330 1200m*3 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
IC693PWR332 RS422
IC693PWR328 connection GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 4) 1200m
- (Built into GOT)


9
 For the RS-422 connection (connecting to the Power Supplies)
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Number of
Commu Cable model
Max. connectable
Power Supplies*1 Model name nication Connection diagram Option device Model
equipment
distance
Type number
RS422
10
1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 RS422 GT15-RS4-9S
IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 connection diagram 5) 1200m
PLC
- (Built into GOT)
RS422
8 PLCs for 1 GOT 11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
IC693PWR321
1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
IC693PWR330
IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
IC693PWR332 RS422 GT15-RS4-9S
IC693PWR328 connection diagram 5) 1200m
- (Built into GOT)
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
 For the RS-422 connection (connecting to the PLC)

13
Number of
Communi Cable model connectable
CONNECTION TO
Max.
Power Supplies*1 Model name cation Connection diagram Option device Model
equipment
CONTROLLER
distance
SICK SAFETY
Type number
RS422
IC693PWR321
1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
IC693PWR330
IC693PWR331
IC693CPU363
RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
8 PLC for 14
(CPU port 2) 1 GOT
IC693PWR332 RS422 GT15-RS4-9S
CONNECTION TO
IC693PWR328 connection diagram 5) 1200m
SIEMENS PLC
- (Built into GOT)

*2
*3
Including the cable length of the option devices.
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

11.2.2 Connecting to Series90-70
POINT

Series Communication
90-70 Modules GOT GE Fanuc Automation
(SNP-X)
OK P1 OK
RUN P2 PORT 1
LOGIC POWER
Connection cable
EN P3 PORT 2
MEM PROTECT
COMMUNICATIONS
POWER SUPPLY CENTRAL COPROCESSOR
PROCESSOR
UNIT
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

Number of
Communication Max.
Model name cation Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Modules*1 distance
Type number
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782
IC697CPX928 - (Built into GOT)
IC697CPX935
IC697CPU780
IC697CPU788 IC697CMM711 RS-232 RS232 connection 15m 1 PLC for 1 GOT
IC697CPU789 diagram 1)
IC697CPU731
GT15-RS2-9P
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
IC697CPM790

Series Communication
90-70 Modules
GOT
OK P1 OK OK P1 OK OK P1 OK
RUN P2 PORT 1 RUN P2 PORT 1 RUN P2 PORT 1
LOGIC POWER PORT 2
LOGIC POWER PORT 2
LOGIC POWER PORT 2
EN P3 EN P3 EN P3
MEM PROTECT MEM PROTECT MEM PROTECT
COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS

POWER SUPPLY CENTRAL COPROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY CENTRAL COPROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY CENTRAL COPROCESSOR
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR
UNIT UNIT UNIT
PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE
-----
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
Connection cable

Number of
Communication Max.
PLC cation Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Modules*1 distance
Type number
RS422 connection 1200m - (Built into GOT)

IC697CPX772 diagram 1)
IC697CPX782
IC697CPX928 1200m*2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
IC697CPX935
IC697CPU780 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 Up to 8 PLCs for
IC697CPU788 IC697CMM711 RS-422
1 GOT
IC697CPU789 RS422 connection
IC697CPU731 diagram 4) 1200m - (Built into GOT)
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
IC697CPM790
GT15-RS4-9S


11.2.3 Connecting to VersaMax Micro 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
POINT
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
VersaMax
GOT GE Fanuc Automation
Micro (SNP-X)
PLC
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Cable model Number of connectable
Communication equipment
Model name Connection diagram Max. distance Option device Model
Type
number
IC200UAA003
IC200UAR014 12
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO LS
IC200UDD104
RS232 connection
IC200UDD112 RS-232 15m
diagram 2)
SYSTEMS PLC
IC200UDR001
INDUSTRIAL
IC200UDR002 GT15-RS2-9P
IC200UDR003
IC200UAL004
IC200UAL005
IC200UAL006
IC200UAA007
- (Built into GOT)
13
1 PLC for 1 GOT
IC200UAR028
CONNECTION TO
IC200UDD110
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
IC200UDD120
RS232 connection
IC200UDD212 RS-232 15m
IC200UDR005 diagram 2)
IC200UDR006 GT15-RS2-9P
IC200UDR010
IC200UDD064
IC200UDD164
14
IC200UDR164
CONNECTION TO
IC200UDR064
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

VersaMax
Micro
GOT
-----
Connection cable

Cable model Number of connectable
Communication equipment
PLC Connection diagram Max. distance Option device Model
Type
number
IC200UAL004 RS422 connection

IC200UAL005 diagram 3)
IC200UAL006
IC200UAA007 1200m*1 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
IC200UAR028
IC200UDD110
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
IC200UDD120
Up to 8 PLCs for
IC200UDD212 RS-422
1 GOT
IC200UDR005 RS422 connection
IC200UDR006 diagram 6) 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
IC200UDR010
IC200UDD064
IC200UDD164
IC200UDR164 - (Built into GOT)
IC200UDR064


9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
GOT and the PLC.
11.3.1 RS-232 cable (1) Cable length
10
 Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
RS232 connection diagram 1) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
GOT side Communication Modules
(3) GE FANUC PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the GE FANUC PLC
PLC
CD/NC 1 1 SHILD
side module.
RD(RXD) 2 2 TD For details, refer to the GE FANUC PLC user's manual. 11
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
CONNECTION TO
ER(DTR) 4 4 RTS
GE FANUC PLC
SG 5 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 5 CTS
RS(RTS) 7 8 DCD
CS(CTS) 8 20 DTR 12
CONNECTION TO LS
NC 9
FG -
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
GOT side PLC

*1
13
CD/NC 1
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
TXD
SICK SAFETY
RD(RXD) 2 4
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
ER(DTR) 4 1 RTS
SG GND
14
5 8
DR(DSR) 6 2 CTS
DCD
CONNECTION TO
RS(RTS) 7 5
SIEMENS PLC
CS(CTS) 8 6 DTR
NC 9 7 5V
FG -

15
manual.
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
GE FANUC PLC user's Manual

CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

11.3.2 RS-422 cable
Communication Communication
GOT side Module Terminating resistor120Ω*2 Module
TERM
24 24 TERM
RD(B’)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 25 25 RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 13 13 RD(A’)
SD(B)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 21 21 SD(B)
SD(A)
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 9 9 SD(A)
0V
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 7 7 0V
RTS(A)
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 10 10 RTS(A)
CTS(A’)
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 11 11 CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 22 22 RTS(B)
CTS(B’)
RSA(RTS+) 9 23 23 CTS(B’)
SHLD
RSB(RTS-) 10 1
*1
1 SHLD
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
SHLD 14
Shell *1

*2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station.
GOT side PLC Terminating resistor 120Ω*2 PLC

RT
9 9 RT
RD(B’)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 11 11 RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 10 RD(A’)
SD(B)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 13 13 SD(B)
SD(A)
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 12 12 SD(A)
SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 7 7 SG
RTS(A)
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 6 RTS(A)
CTS(A’)
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 15 15 CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 14 14 RTS(B)
CTS(B’)
RSA(RTS+) 9 8 8 CTS(B’)
RSB(RTS-) 10 *1
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
SHLD 14
Shell *1

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal.

RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
GOT side PLC terminating resistor 120Ω*2 PLC
CONTROLLER
RT
9 9 RT
RD(B’)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 11 11 RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 10 RD(A’)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
SD(B)
13 13 SD(B) 10
SD(A)
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 12 12 SD(A)
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 7 7 SG
RTS(A)
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 6 RTS(A)
CTS(A’)
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 15 15 CTS(A’)
PLC
RTS(B)
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 14 14 RTS(B)
RSA(RTS+) 9
CTS(B’)
8 8 CTS(B’) 11
SHLD
RSB(RTS-) 10 1 1 SHLD
CONNECTION TO
*1
GE FANUC PLC
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
SHLD 14
Shell *1
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Communication terminating resistor Communication
GOT side Module 120Ω*2 Module 13
TERM
24 24 TERM
CONNECTION TO
RD(B’)
SDA 1 25 25 RD(B’
)
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
RD(A’)
SDB 6 13 13 RD(A’
)
SD(B)
RDA 2 21 21 SD(B)
SD(A)
RDB 7 9 9 SD(A)
SG 5
0V
7 7 0V 14
RTS(A)
RSA 3 10 10 RTS(A)
CONNECTION TO
CTS(A’)
CSA
SIEMENS PLC
4 11 11 CTS(A’
)
RTS(B)
RSB 8 22 22 RTS(B)
CTS(B’)
CSB 9 23 23 CTS(B’
)
SHLD
*1 1 *1 1 SHLD
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
*2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station.

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO


RT
9 9 RT
RD(B’)
SDA 1 11 11 RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SDB 6 10 10 RD(A’)
SD(B)
RDA 2 13 13 SD(B)
SD(A)
RDB 7 12 12 SD(A)
SG
SG 5 7 7 SG
RTS(A)
RSA 3 6 6 RTS(A)
CTS(A’)
CSA 4 15 15 CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RSB 8 14 14 RTS(B)
CTS(B’)
CSB 9 8 8 CTS(B’)
*1 *1


RT
9 9 RT
RD(B’)
SDA 1 11 11 RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SDB1 6 10 10 RD(A’)
SD(B)
RDA 2 13 13 SD(B)
SD(A)
RDB 7 12 12 SD(A)
SG
SG 5 7 7 SG
RTS(A)
RSA 3 6 6 RTS(A)
CTS(A’)
CSA 4 15 15 CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RSB 8 14 14 RTS(B)
CTS(B’)
CSB 9 8 8 CTS(B’)
SHLD
*1 1 1 SHLD
*1


9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
(1) Cable length
CONTROLLER
10
(3) GE FANUC PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the GE FANUC PLC
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
side module.
For details, refer to the GE FANUC PLC user's manual.
PLC
(1) GOT side 11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
(b) For GT14, GT11

12
CONNECTION TO LS
to the following.
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
(2) GE FANUC PLC side
When connecting a GE FANUC PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected.
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

settings)
(1) GE Fanuc Automation(SNP-X)
2.
3.

4. Transmission
Speed
Click! (Default: 8bits)
(Default: 1bit)
None
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Parity
Even
Odd
menu. (Default: Odd)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Retry
error occurs.
0 to 5times
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 3times)
3. Set the following items. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
• Manufacturer: GE Fanuc Automation
• Controller Type: GE Fanuc Automation Series 90 of the GOT to which the PLC is
• I/F: Interface to be used connected) in the connected network.
(Default: 00)
• Driver: GE Fanuc Automation(SNP-X)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Delay Time

communication request from the
0 to 300ms
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. GOT. (Default: 5ms)
environment.
POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The communication interface setting can be
POINT data.
manual.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. GT User's Manual
For details, refer to the following. (2) Precedence in communication settings

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
11.5.2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro
POINT
GE FANUC PLC  Communication settings
For details of GE FANUC PLCs, refer to the following Make the communication settings using the 10
manuals. engineering tool.
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Setting item PLC side setting
9600bps, 19200bps,
Data Rate
Model name Refer to 38400bps
PLC
Series 90-30 11.5.1 Bits / Character 7bits, 8bits
PLC CPU
VersaMaxMicro 11.5.2 Parity EVEN, ODD, NONE
Communication IC693CMM311 11.5.3 Stop Bits 1bit, 2bits

11
Modules IC697CMM711 11.5.4 Port Mode*1 SNP
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Port Type*2 Slave
Flow Control NONE
11.5.1 Connecting to Series 90-30 Timeout*3 Long
Turn Around Delay*4 0

 Communication settings SNP ID*5 00 to 31 12
Make the communication settings using the
CONNECTION TO LS
*1 Set to the SNP protocol.
engineering tool. *2 Set to Slave.
*3 Set to Long.
SYSTEMS PLC
When making the settings, set [Configuration Mode] on *4 Set to 0.
INDUSTRIAL
the [Setting] tab of the engineering tool to "SNP only". *5 Set within the range of 00 to 31.
When specifying the station No. from 0 to 9, add "0" before
the number and set it as 00 to 09.
13
*1 SNP
Port Mode
Port Type*2 Slave
Data Rate 9600bps, 19200bps
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Flow Control NONE
SICK SAFETY
Parity EVEN, ODD, NONE
Stop Bits 1bit, 2bits
Timeout*3 Long
Turn Around Delay *4 0 14

*5 00 to 31
SNP ID
CONNECTION TO
Converter Power Consumption*6 0
SIEMENS PLC
*1 Set to SNP.
*2 Set to Slave.
*3 Set to Long.
*4 Set to 0.
*5 Set within the range of 00 to 31.
When specifying the station No. from 0 to 9, add "0" before
the number and set it as 00 to 09. 15
*6 Set to 0.(only when connecting to Port2)
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

11.5.3 Connecting to IC693CMM311 11.5.5 Station number setting
 Communication settings Set each station number so that no station number

Make the communication settings using the overlaps.
engineering tool. The station number can be set without regard to the cable
When making the settings, set [Configuration Mode] on
the [Setting] tab of the engineering tool to "SNP only".
Station Station Station Station
Setting item PLC side setting No.3 No.00 No.15 No.6
SNP Enable*1 YES

GOT
SNP Mode*2 Slave
Interface*3 RS232, RS485

Data Rate 9600bps, 19200bps Examples of station number setting
Parity ODD, NONE, EVEN
Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when
Flow Control*4 NONE setting device.
Turn Around Delay*5 NONE
Specification range
*6 Long
Timeout
00 to 31
*1 Set to YES.
*2 Set to SLAVE.
*3 Set the communication format to be used.
(only when connecting to Port2) POINT
*4 Set to NONE.
*5 Set to NONE.
*6 Set to LONG.
PLC Station No. settings
Make sure to set a 2-digit number for the station No. of
the PLC to be monitored by the GOT.
11.5.4 Connecting to IC697CMM711
Make the communication settings using the
engineering tool.
When making the settings, set [Configuration Mode] on
the [Setting] tab of the engineering tool to "SNP only".

*1 YES
SNP Enable
SNP Mode*2 Slave
Interface*3 RS232, RS485
Data Rate 9600bps, 19200bps

Parity ODD, NONE, EVEN
Flow Control*4 NONE
Turn Around Delay*5 NONE

*6 Long
Timeout
*1 Set to YES.
*2 Set to SLAVE.
*3 Set the communication format to be used.
(only when connecting to Port2)
*4 Set to NONE.
*5 Set to NONE.
*6 Set to LONG.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
are as follows. 11.6.1 GE Fanuc Automation Series
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the 90
The device specifications of controllers may differ 10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device
same series. No.
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Please make the setting according to the specifications of represen
tation
When a non-existent device or a device number outside input (I) I00001 to I12288
PLC
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings output (Q) Q00001 to Q12288
internal (M) M00001 to M12288
11
 Setting item temporary (T) T001 to T256
Bit device
CONNECTION TO
system status (S) S001 to S128 Decimal
GE FANUC PLC
system status (SA) SA001 to SA128
system status (SB) SB001 to SB128
system status (SC) SC001 to SC128
global data (G) G0001 to G7680

12
system register (R) R00001 to R32640
CONNECTION TO LS
Word device
analog input register (AI) AI0001 to AI32640 Decimal
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
analog output register (AQ) AQ0001 to AQ32640
Item Description 13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
word device.
Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are
on selected in [Device].

Network
Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of the
14
No. specified station No.
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
11.7 Precautions
 GOT clock control 15
HIRATA CORPORATION
The PLC clock data cannot be written to or read from

HNC CONTROLLER
the GOT.
CONNECTION TO
The settings of "time adjusting" or "time broadcast"

made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC.
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

11.7 Precautions
12
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO 12.
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 3
12.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
12.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 11
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
12 - 1
12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
SYSTEMS PLC

Communi
Series Model name Clock cation Refer to
Type
K80S K7M-D S(/DC) RS-232

RS-422 12.2.1
K120S K7M-D U
RS-232
K200S K3P-07 S 12.2.2
RS-422
RS-232
K300S K4P-15S 12.2.3
RS-422
12 - 2 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
12.2.1 Connecting to K80S or K120S

Cnet
10
K80S,
K120S I/F GOT LS Industrial Systems
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
module MASTER-K
Connection cable
PLC
Communi Cable model Number of connectable
Max.
CONNECTION TO
Series Cnet I/F module*1 cation Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
GE FANUC PLC
distance
Type number
- (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection
15m
diagram 1)
- RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
12
RS232 connection
CONNECTION TO LS
K80S diagram 3)
1 PLC for 1 GOT
SYSTEMS PLC
K120S
INDUSTRIAL
- (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
15m
diagram 2)
G7L-CUEB RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
RS232 connection
13
diagram 4)
CONNECTION TO
*1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. For details of the product, contact LS Industrial Systems Co.,Ltd.
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 - 3

Cnet Cnet
K80S, K80S,
I/F I/F GOT
K120S K120S
module module
Connection cable 2)
Connection cable 1)
Connection cable Connection cable

PLC Cnet I/F module*1 GOT
1) 2) Number of
Max.
Cable model Commu Cable model connectable
distance
Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment
diagram number Type diagram number
RS422
connection 500m*2 - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4) 31 PLCs for 1 GOT
GT16-C02R4-9S
500m*3
(0.2m)
RS422 RS422 - (Built into GOT) The following number

K80S
connection G7L-CUEC RS-422 connection of PLCs for 1 GOT
K120S
diagram 3) diagram 1) 500m*2 GT16, GT15: 31
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
GT11, GT105 ,
GT104 : 10
GT15-RS4-9S
RS422
connection 500m*2 - (Built into GOT) 10 PLCs for 1 GOT
diagram 2)
*1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact LS Industrial Systems Co.,Ltd.

12.2.2 Connecting to K200S 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Cnet
module MASTER-K
Connection cable 10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
Number of
Cable model
Communic Max. connectable
Series Cnet I/F module*1
ation Type
Connection diagram
number
distance
Option device Model
equipment 11
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
GE FANUC PLC
RS232 connection
15m
diagram 2)
K200S G6L-CUEB RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P 1 PLC for 1 GOT
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
*1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact LS Industrial Systems Co.,Ltd.
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
Cnet Cnet
K200S I/F K200S I/F GOT
module module
13
Connection cable 2)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
Connection cable 1)

1)
Cable model Commu
2)
Cable model
Max.
Number of
connectable
14
distance
Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
RS422
31 PLCs for
diagram 4)
1 GOT
GT16-C02R4-
500m*3
9S(0.2m)
15
HIRATA CORPORATION

HNC CONTROLLER
K200S G6L-CUEC RS-422 of PLCs for 1 GOT

CONNECTION TO
connection connection
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
GT11, GT105 ,
GT104 : 10
GT15-RS4-9S
RS422
10 PLCs for 16
1 GOT
diagram 2)
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO


12.2.3 Connecting to K300S

Cnet
module MASTER-K
Connection cable

Number of
Cable model connectable
Communic Max.
Series Cnet I/F module*1 Connection diagram Option device Model
equipment
ation Type distance
number
- (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection
15m
diagram 2)
K300S G4L-CUEA RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P 1 PLC for 1 GOT
RS232 connection
diagram 4)

Cnet Cnet
K300S I/F K300S I/F GOT
module module
Connection cable 2)
Connection cable 1)

1) 2) Number of
Max.
Cable model Commu Cable model connectable
Cnet I/F distance
Series Connection nication Connection Option device Model equipment
module*1
RS422
diagram 4) 31 PLCs for 1 GOT
GT16-C02R4-
500m*3
9S(0.2m)

K300S connection G4L-CUEA RS-422 connection of PLCs for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
GT11, GT105 ,
GT104 : 10
GT15-RS4-9S
RS422
connection 500m*2 - (Built into GOT) 10 PLCs for 1 GOT
diagram 2)

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
GOT and the PLC.
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM
GOT side (terminal block)
12.3.1 RS-232 cable PLC side
SD 4 RXD2 10
 Connection diagram RD 7 TXD2
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER 1 5V
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM
GOT side DR 2 RXD1
PLC side
SG 5 SG
PLC
CD/NC*1 1 1 5V
RS 3 TXD1
RD(RXD) 2 7 TXD2
CS 6 5V 11
SD(TXD) 3 4 RXD2
8 SG
CONNECTION TO
ER(DTR) 4 2 RXD1
GE FANUC PLC
9 SG
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 3 TXD1
RS(RTS) 7 6 5V LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM
GOT side (terminal block)
PLC side
CS(CTS) 8 8 SG
SD 2 RXD
12
NC SG
CONNECTION TO LS
9 9
RD 3 TXD
SYSTEMS PLC
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC, ER 1 CD
INDUSTRIAL
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
DR 4 DTR
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM SG 5 SG
GOT side
PLC side
CD/NC*1 1 1 CD
RS 6 DSR
RTS
13
CS 7
RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD
CONNECTION TO
8 CTS
CONTROLLER
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD
SICK SAFETY
9 -
ER(DTR) 4 4 DTR
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 6 DSR
RS(RTS) 7 7 RTS
(1) Cable length 14
CS(CTS) 8 8 CTS
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
NC 9 9 -
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
(3) LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the LS
INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module. 15
For details, refer to the user's manual of the LS
HIRATA CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC.

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

12.3.2 RS-422 cable
 Connection diagram GOT side side (terminal block)
RS422 connection diagram 1) SDA1 1 RDA

LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC SDB1 2 RDB
GOT side side (terminal block) *1
RDA1 3 SDA
SDA 1 RDA RDB1 4 SDB
SDB 6 RDB SDA2 5 SG
RDA 2 SDA SDB2 6 FG
RDB 7 SDB RDA2 7
SG 5 SG RDB2 8
RSA 3 FG RSA 9
RSB 8
RSB 10
CSA 4
CSA 11
CSB 9
CSB 12
SG 13
*1 For the system terminal, connect a 120 (1/2W)
terminating resistor across RDA and RDB, and across NC 14
SDA and SDB respectively.
GOT side LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC  Precautions when preparing a cable

(terminal block) side (terminal block) *1
(1) Cable length
SDA RDA The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.
SDB RDB (2) GOT side connector
RDA SDA For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RDB SDB
SG SG (3) LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector

Use the connector compatible with the LS
RSA FG
INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module.
RSB For details, refer to the user's manual of the LS
INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC.
CSA
CSB  Connecting terminating resistors

*1 For the system terminal, connect a 120 (1/2W)
(1) GOT side
terminating resistor across RDA and RDB, and across When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
SDA and SDB respectively. resistor must be connected to the GOT.
RS422 connection diagram 3) (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
side (terminal block) *1 side (terminal block) *1 GOT main unit to "Disable".
(b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
RDA RDA
RDB RDB
SDA SDA to the following.
SDB SDB 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
SG SG (2) LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side
FG FG When connecting an LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected.
*1 For the system terminal, connect a 120 (1/2W) 12.3.2 RS-422 cable ■ Connection diagram
terminating resistor across RDA and RDB, and across
SDA and SDB respectively.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
settings)
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
2.
PLC
11
3.
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Transmission
4. Speed
equipment.
38400bps,
57600bps,
12
CONNECTION TO LS
(Default: 8bits)
SYSTEMS PLC
Click!
INDUSTRIAL
(Default: 1bit)
None
Parity Even
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: None)
Odd
13
menu.
CONNECTION TO
Retry 0 to 5times
error occurs.
2.
CONTROLLER
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
SICK SAFETY
(Default: 3times)
channel to be used from the list menu. Set the time period for a
3. Set the following items. (Default: 3sec)
• Manufacturer: LS Industrial Systems
• Controller Type: LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K Host Address
of the PLC to which the GOT is
connected) in the network of the 0 to 31
14
• I/F: Interface to be used GOT.
(Default: 0)
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K
4. SIEMENS PLC
The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. GOT.
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: 0ms)
environment.
15
POINT
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
manual.
16
GT User's Manual
MURATEC CONTROLLER
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings

CONNECTION TO


12.5.1 Connecting to PLC CPU

POINT
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC  Settings of the communication specifications
For details of LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLCs, refer There is no item to be set using the hardware.
to the following manual. Set the items using the engineering software for
User's Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL MASTER-K.
SYSTEMS PLC
Item Setting details
Station No. 0 to 31
Model name Refer to
Communication
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600bps
K80S speed
K120S
Data bit 7 or 8
PLC CPU 12.5.1
K200S
Parity bit None, Even, Odd
K300S
Stop bit 1 or 2
G7L-CUEB
*1 For the setting method of the engineering software, refer to
G7L-CUEC the following.
Cnet I/F module G6L-CUEB 12.5.2 User's Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS
PLC
G6L-CUEC
G4L-CUEA
12.5.2 Connecting to Cnet I/F module
 Settings of the communication specifications

There is no item to be set using the hardware.
Set the items using the engineering software for
MASTER-K.

Communication protocol Dedicated protocol
Data bit 7 or 8
Communication Stop bit 1 or 2

format Start bit 1
Parity bit Even/Odd/None
Stand-alone mode/Interlocking
Channel selection
mode
Synchronization Asynchronous
300/600/1200/2400/4800/
Transmission RS-232C
9600/19200/38400
speed
300/600/1200/2400/4800/
(bps) RS-422/485
9600/19200/38400/76800
*1 For the setting method of the engineering software, refer to

the following.
User's Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS
PLC

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
are as follows.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of LS IS PLC
10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the (1) When setting bit device (except timer and
same series. counter)
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Set the bit device using the decimal number (three
the controller actually used. digits) and the hexadecimal number.
PLC
may not be monitored. Device number
Device name HEX 11
 Setting item DEC
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12.6.1 LS Industrial Systems
MASTER-K
12
CONNECTION TO LS
Device
SYSTEMS PLC
No.
INDUSTRIAL
represent
ation
I/O relay (P) P0000 to P063F
Auxiliary relay (M) M0000 to M191F

Item Description
Keep relay (K) K0000 to K031F
Decimal +
Hexadeci
13
Bit device

Link relay (L) L0000 to L063F mal
CONNECTION TO
word device. *1 F0000 to F063F
CONTROLLER
Special relay (F)
SICK SAFETY
Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are
Timer contact (T) T0 to T255
on selected in [Device]. Decimal
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255
I/O relay (P) P000 to P063
Monitors the PLC of the specified station No.
0 to 31 : To monitor the PLC of the specified Auxiliary relay (M) M000 to M191 14
Network Station station No. Keep relay (K) K000 to K031
No. 100 to 115 : To specify the station No. of the PLC
CONNECTION TO
Link relay (L) L000 to L063
Word device
to be monitored by the value of GOT
SIEMENS PLC
data register (GD).*1 Special relay (F)*1 F000 to F063 Decimal
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of Timer current value (T) T0 to T255
the PLC and the GOT data register.
Counter current value (C) C0 to C255
Statio
n No.
GOT data register (GD) Setting range Step controller (S)
Data register (D)

S0 to S99
D0 to D9999
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
100 GD10
0 to 31 *1 Only reading is possible.
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
101 GD11 (If setting a value

outside the range
: :
above, a device
114 GD24 range error
occurs.)
115 GD25
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

13
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
CONTROLLER
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
13.6 Device Range That Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
13 - 1
13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
CONTROLLER

Communication
Type
FX3-CPU000000
Flexi Soft RS-232 13.2.1
FX3-CPU130002

13.2.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft
Flexi Soft GOT

SICK Flexi Soft
Connection cable

Communic Cable model Max. Number of connectable equipment
Series Option device Model
- (Built into GOT)

Part Number:6021195(2m)*1
3m
GT15-RS2-9P
Flexi Soft RS-232 1 PLC for 1 GOT
*1
Part Number:6021195(2m)
+ 3.3m - (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
diagram 1)
*1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc. For details of the product, contact SICK Inc.
13 - 2 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
GOT and the PLC.
13.3.1 RS-232 cable

10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
GOT side SICK cable(male) side
(terminal block) (D-Sub9-pin)
PLC
SD 3
RD 2
11
ER
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
DR
SG 5
RS
CS
NC 12
CONNECTION TO LS
NC
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 30cm or less. 13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
(3) SICK PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the SICK PLC side
module.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the SICK PLC. 14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 - 3

settings)
Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) SICK Flexi Soft
2.
3.
4.

Transmission
Click! Speed
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Retry
error occurs.
0 to 5times
menu.
(Default: 3times)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the time period for a
channel to be used from the list menu. Timeout Time communication to time out. 1 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
3. Set the following items. Set this item to adjust the
• Manufacturer: SICK transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms)
• Controller Type: SICK Flexi Soft
GOT.
• I/F: Interface to be used (Default: 5ms)
• Driver: SICK Flexi Soft
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, POINT

Make the settings according to the usage (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
environment. The communication interface setting can be
13.4.2 Communication detail settings changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. data.
manual.
POINT
GT User's Manual
The settings of connecting equipment can be (2) Precedence in communication settings
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
For details, refer to the following. Utility, the latest setting is effective.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
POINT
SICK PLC
For details of SICK PLCs, refer to the following 10
manual.
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
User's Manual of the SICK PLC
PLC
13.5.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft
11
CONNECTION TO
Communication settings are not required, since the
GE FANUC PLC
following contents are fixed.
Setting item Controller Side Settings

Communication speed 115200bps (Fixed)
Data bit
Parity bit
8bits (Fixed)
Without (Fixed)
12
CONNECTION TO LS
Stop bit 1bit (Fixed)
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

13.6 Device Range That Can Be Set
are as follows. (d) EFI output (EQ)
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device Byte number (0 to 2)
same series. name
EFI number (1 to 3)
the controller actually used. (2) Engineering software for SICK and device
When a non-existent device or a device number outside representation of GT Designer3
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings The engineering software for SICK and the device
may not be monitored. representation of GT Designer3 are different. Set
the device by referring to the following table.
 Setting item Device GT Designer3 Engineering software for SICK
[ ].I
I . : I/O model name
I*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
(1-8): Input position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
(1-8): Input position
[ ].Q
Q . : I/O model name
Q*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
(1-8): Output position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
(1-8): Output position
Item Description .
LQ .
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. *1 : "Result"
LQ (0-3): Byte number
Device The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of (0-3): Byte number
(0-7): Bit position
word device. (0-7): Bit position
Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [0] . .
Information LI .
[Device]. : CPU type(CPU0, CPU1)
*1
LI (0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
(0-7): Bit position
(0-7): Bit position
POINT [0].EFI : ,Byte
EI
: CPU type(CPU0, CPU1)
(1-2): EFI number
(1) Device settings of SICK Safety controller EI*1 (1-2): EFI number
(1-3): Device number
(a) Input (I), Output (Q) (0-3): Byte number
(1-3): Device number
(0-3): Byte number
[0].EFI :1,Byte
EQ
: CPU type(CPU0, CPU1)
EQ*1 (1-2): EFI number
(1-2): EFI number
(0-2): Byte number
Device Input position (1 to 8) (0-2): Byte number
name D RS232 data
Module number (1 to 12) D
(0-99(Dec)): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
(b) Logic result (LQ), Logic input (LI) W
(0-49(Dec)): Word number
Word virtualization of D GOT independent device
W
device (Not available)
W0= (D1(Upper bits),
Device Bit position (0 to 7) D0(Lower bits))
name LD RS232 data
Byte number (0 to 3) LD
(0-3): Byte number (RS232 to safety controller)
(c) EFI input (EI) LW
(0-1): Word number
Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device
LW
device (Not available)
LW0= (LD1(Upper bits),
LD0(Lower bits))
Device Byte number (0 to 3)
name *1 When the mapping position is changed by the engineering
Device number (1 to 3)
software for SICK, a mismatch occurs between virtual
EFI number (1 to 2) devices on GOT and SICK safety controller mapping
devices.
When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices.

(3) When using offset specification (f) EFI output (EQ) 9
When setting devices using the offset function, the
RKC TEMPERATURE
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 to +15
device values are as follows.
CONNECTION TO
+0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12
CONTROLLER
(a) Input (I) +16 Fixed to 0
: Fixed to 0
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+240
+0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8
+256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error
+16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8
+272 Device range error
+32
+48
I3.1
I4.1
I3.2
I4.2
I3.3
I4.3
I3.4
I4.4
I3.5
I4.5
I3.6
I4.6
I3.7
I4.7
I3.8
I4.8
10
+64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
+80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8 Fixed to 0
+96
+112
I7.1
I8.1
I7.2
I8.2
I7.3
I8.3
I7.4
I8.4
I7.5
I8.5
I7.6
I8.6
I7.7
I8.7
I7.8
I8.8
(OFF)
13.6.1 SICK Safety Controller (SICK
+128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.7 I9.8 Flexi Soft)
PLC
+144 I10.1 I10.2 I10.3 I10.4 I10.5 I10.6 I10.7 I10.8
+160 I11.1 I11.2 I11.3 I11.4 I11.5 I11.6 I11.7 I11.8
+176 I12.1 I12.2 I12.3 I12.4 I12.5 I12.6 I12.7 I12.8
Device Setting range
Device
No. 11
+192 Device range error represent
ation
CONNECTION TO
(b) Output (Q)
GE FANUC PLC
Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Decimal
+0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8
Bit device
Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 +Decimal
+16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8
+32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8
Logic input (LI) LI0.0 to LI3.7
+48
+64
Q4.1
Q5.1
Q4.2
Q5.2
Q4.3
Q5.3
Q4.4
Q5.4
Q4.5
Q5.5
Q4.6
Q5.6
Q4.7
Q5.7
Q4.8
Q5.8
Word device bit
-
12
CONNECTION TO LS
+80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8 Data (byte)(D) D0 to D99
Fixed to 0 Decimal
+96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8 (OFF) Data (word)(W) W0 to W49
SYSTEMS PLC
+112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 Q8.8 Decimal
INDUSTRIAL
Word device
+128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8 EFI input (byte)(EI) EI110 to EI233 +Decimal
+144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8 +Decimal
+160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8 Decimal
EFI output (byte)(EQ) EQ10 to EQ22
+176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8 +Decimal
+192 Device range error Logic input (byte)(LD) LD0 to LD3 Decimal 13
Logic input (word)(LW) LW0 to LW1 Decimal
(c) Logic result (LQ)
CONNECTION TO
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
+0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7
POINT
Device of SICK Flexi Soft
Only reading is possible for all devices. 14
(d) Logic input (LI)
CONNECTION TO
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
SIEMENS PLC
+0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7
(e) EFI input (EI) 15

HIRATA CORPORATION
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +8 to +15
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
+0 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113

+16 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123
+32 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133
+48 Fixed to 0
: Fixed to 0
+240
+256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 16
+272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223
+288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 Device range error
MURATEC CONTROLLER

CONNECTION TO

14
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
14.
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
14.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
14.4 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 14
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
14 - 1
14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

Series Clock Communication Type *2 Refer to
SIMATIC S7-200 RS-232 14.2.2
SIMATIC S7-300 RS-232 14.2.1

*1
SIMATIC S7-400 Ethernet 14.3.1
*1 Not available with the Ethernet connection.

14 - 2 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
14.2.1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-300/400 series

SIMATIC
10
S7-300/400 HMI Adapter GOT
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS S7-300/400
ALLEN-BRADLEY
series
Connection cable
PLC
Number of
Commu Cable model connectable
Max.
CONNECTION TO
Series HMI Adapter*1 nication Connection diagram Option device Model
GE FANUC PLC
distance equipment
Type number
GT09-C30R20801-9S
(3m) - (Built into GOT)
or 15m
SIMATIC
S7-300/400
MLFB:
6ES7 972-0CA11-0XA0
RS-232 RS232 connection
diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT for 1 HMI
Adapter 12
CONNECTION TO LS
RS232 connection
SYSTEMS PLC
diagram 2)
INDUSTRIAL
*1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG. For details of this product, contact Siemens AG.

13
SIMATIC S7-300/400 series HMI Adapter GOT
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
PROFIBUS Connection cable
14
Number of
CONNECTION TO
Commu Cable model
Max. connectable
Series HMI Adapter*1 nication Connection diagram Option device Model
SIEMENS PLC
distance equipment
Type number
GT09-C30R20801-9S
(3m) - (Built into GOT)
or 15m
SIMATIC MLFB:
RS-232 RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1 HMI 15
S7-300/400 6ES7 972-0CA11-0XA0 Adapter
HIRATA CORPORATION
diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 - 3

14.2.2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-200
SIMATIC
GOT
S7-200 SIEMENS S7-200
Connection cable

Communicati Cable model
Series Max. distance Option device Model equipment
on Type Connection diagram number
- (Built into GOT)

6ES7 901-3BF20-0XA0*1 15m
SIMATIC S7-200 RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P
6ES7 901-3BF20-0XA0*1 +
RS232 connection 15m*2 - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)

14.2.3 Connection Diagram 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
GOT and the PLC.
GOT side SIEMENS PLC side
 RS-232 cable SD SD(TXD)

10
3
(1) Connection diagram RD 2 RD(RXD)
CONNECTION TO
ER 1 -
ALLEN-BRADLEY
GOT side SIEMENS PLC side DR 4 -
CD/NC*1 1 1 CD SG 5 SG(GND)
PLC
RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD RS 6 -
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD CS 7 -
11
ER(DTR) 4 6 DSR NC 8 -
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 5 SG NC 9 -
GE FANUC PLC
DR(DSR) 6 4 DTR
RS(RTS) 7 8 CTS (2) Precautions when preparing a cable

CS(CTS) 8 7 RTS (a) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or
- 9 9 FG less. 12
CONNECTION TO LS
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12: NC, GT11: NC, For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
(c) SIEMENS PLC side connector
GOT side SIEMENS PLC side Use the connector compatible with the SIEMENS
PLC side.
SD 2 RXD
RD 3 TXD
For details, refer to the SIEMENS PLC user's
manual.
13
ER 6 DSR
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
DR 4 DTR
SG 5 SG
RS 8 CTS
14
CS 7 RTS
NC 1 CD
CONNECTION TO
NC 9 FG
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO


(Communication settings)  Communication detail settings
Set the channel of the connected equipment. Make the settings according to the usage environment.
(1) SIEMENS S7-300/400

2.
3.
4.

Transmission
Click! communication with the connected 19200bps,
Speed*2
equipment. 38400bps
(Default: 38400bps)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the length used for communication with
menu. Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
(Default: 8bit)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Specify the stop bit length for
channel to be used from the list menu. Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
(Default: 1bit)
• Manufacturer: SIEMENS parity check, and how it is performed
• Controller Type: Set either of the following. Parity
Odd (fixed)
S7-300/400 (Default: Odd)
S7-200 Specify the adapter address (station
• I/F: Interface to be used No. of the adapter to which the GOT
Adapter
• Driver: Set either of the following. is connected) in the connected 1 to 31
Address*1*2
When connecting to SIEMENS S7-300/400: network.
SIEMENS S7-300/400 (Default: 1)
When connecting to SIEMENS S7-200: Specify the host address (station No.
SIEMENS S7-200 of the PLC that the GOT will monitor)
Host Address*1*2 1 to 31
in the connected network.
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 2)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. *1 Set the address without overlapping the address of other
Make the settings according to the usage units.
*2 The GOT automatically sets the values of Transmission
environment. Speed, Adapter Address, and Host Address to the HMI
Adapter.
14.2.4 Communication detail settings
POINT

(2) SIEMENS S7-200 14.2.5 PLC Side Setting 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
POINT
SIEMENS PLC
For details of SIEMENS PLCs, refer to the following
manuals. 10
SIEMENS PLC user's Manual
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Model name Refer to
PLC CPU S7-200 14.2.7
PLC
Item Description Range HMI Adapter 6ES7 972-0CA11-0XA0 14.2.6
Transmission
9600bps,
19200bps,
PC/PPI cable 6ES7 901-3BF20-0XA0 14.2.7
11
Speed
14.2.6 Connecting to HMI Adapter
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
Data Bit
7bits/8bits
The following communication settings are made at the
(Default: 8bits)
communication detail settings of the GOT side.
Stop Bit
communications. 1bit/2bits
For details, refer to the following. 12
CONNECTION TO LS
(Default: 1bit) 14.2.4 Communication detail settings
SYSTEMS PLC
None
parity check, and how it is performed Setting item PLC side setting
INDUSTRIAL
Parity Even
during communication. Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Odd
(Default: Even)
Parity bit Odd (fixed)
No. of the adapter to which the GOT
Adapter Address is connected) in the connected 0 to 31 Stop bit 1bit (fixed) 13
network. Adapter address 1 to 31
(Default: 0)
CONNECTION TO
Host address 1 to 31
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
of the PLC that the GOT will monitor)
in the connected network.
(Default: 2)
POINT 14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
data.
manual. 15
GT User's Manual
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER

CONNECTION TO

16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

14.2.7 Connecting to SIMATIC S7- 14.2.8 Precautions
200
 GOT alarm list (system alarm) function
 Communication settings Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is
Set the communication settings of PLC and PC/PPI connected to a SIEMENS PLC.
cable. (The error information on the PLC CPU side can be
monitored.)
(1) PLC settings
For details on the alarm list (system alarm), refer to the
Set the communication settings of PLC by operating
following manual:
the SIEMENS programming tool(STEP7-WIN32).
Setting item PLC Side Setting
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps  At system startup

Data bit 8bits (fixed) (1) When powering ON the system
Parity bit Even (fixed) Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT.
Stop bit 1bit (fixed) If the GOT is turned ON before power-up of the PLC
CPUs, restart the GOT.
Host address*2 1 to 31
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. (2) When powering OFF a PLC CPU at another station
*2 Set the address without overlapping the address of other When a PLC CPU at another station (the PLC CPU to
units.
which the HMI Adapter is not connected) is turned OFF,
(2) PC/PPI cable settings monitoring by the GOT is stopped.
Set the transmission speed by operating the DIP switch To resume the monitoring, restart the GOT.
on the PC/PPI cable. (Monitoring will not be resumed on GOT even if the
PLC CPU is turned ON again.)
DIP switch
(down side:0, upper side:1)
1
RS-232
0
PC/PPI cable
0
1 2 3 4 5
SWITCH 123 RS-485
S7-200 CPU
SWITCH 4
SWITCH 5
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH Transmission

1 2 3 4 5 speed
0 0 1 0 0 19200bps*1
0 1 0 0 0 9600bps*1
*1 Adjust with GOT settings.

9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
14.3.1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7-300/400 series
10
SIMATIC Ethernet
S7-300/400 Module GOT
series Ethernet(SIEMENS S7), Gateway
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
Ethernet
Maximum Number of connectable 11
Series Cable model*1 segment Option device Model*3 equipment
Connection*4
length*2
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
CP343-1 IT - (Built into GOT) *6 When PLC: GOT is N: 1
• 10BASE-T
SIMATIC CP343-1 The number of PLCs for
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or 100m
S7-300 CP343-1 Lean 1 GOT 5 or less
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): GT15-J71E71-100
CP343-1 Advanced When PLC: GOT is 1: N
*6
The number of GOTs for
• 100BASE-TX - (Built into GOT)
SIMATIC CP443-1 IT
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): 100m
1 PLC 32 or less*5
(recommended to 16
12
S7-400 CP443-1
Category 5 and 5e GT15-J71E71-100
CONNECTION TO LS
units or less)
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
system.
13
CONNECTION TO
cascades.
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
*4
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
Product manufactured by Siemens AG. For details of the product, contact Siemens AG. 14
*5 If the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes highloaded, and it may affect the communication performance.
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

2.
3.
4.
(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 254
(Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Click!
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask*1
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 255.255.255.0)
menu. Set the router address of the default
Default
0.0.0.0 to
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255
channel to be used from the list menu. router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
3. Set the following items. 1024 to 5010,
• Manufacturer: SIEMENS Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5023 to 65534
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
• Controller Type: SIEMENS S7(Ethernet)
No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013, and
• I/F: Interface to be used 49153)
• Driver: Ethernet(SIEMENS S7), Gateway 1024 to 5010,
GOT 5023 to 65534
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Communication
connection with the Ethernet
(Except for 5011,
module.
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Port No. 5012, 5013, and
(Default: 5023)
Make the settings according to the usage 49153)
environment. Specify the time period from the
14.3.2 Communication detail settings Startup Time
3 to 255 sec
(Default: 3sec)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90 sec
(Default: 3sec)
POINT Set the delay time for reducing the
0 to 10000
The settings of connecting equipment can be ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

(2) GT15
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PLC
Item Description
Range
11
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
GOT PLC No. 1 to 254
(Default: 1)
Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
GOT IP Address
(Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
router) 0.0.0.0 to 12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
INDUSTRIAL
Default 0.0.0.0 to
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
13
CONNECTION TO
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013, and
49153)
1024 to 5010,
GOT 5023 to 65534
Port No.
equipment.
(Default: 5023)
5012, 5013, and
49153)
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
Startup Time 3 to 255 sec
(Default: 3sec)
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90 sec
(Default: 3sec)
0 to 10000
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

14.3.3 PLC side setting
POINT
SIEMENS PLC
For details of SIEMENS PLCs, refer to the following
manuals.
SIEMENS PLC user's Manual
Item Description Set value

The host is displayed. (The host is  Parameter settings
Host ―
indicated with an asterisk (*).) Set the following parameters with the SIEMENS
Set the network No. of the software package.
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239
(Default: blank) (1) Settings of IP address and subnet mask
Set the station No. of the connected
PLC No. Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank) IP Address PLC side IP address
SIEMENS S7 Parameters Subnet
Type SIEMENS S7 (fixed) PLC side subnet mask
(fixed) mask
Set the IP address of the connected
PLC side IP
IP Address Ethernet module.
address (2) Fetch port setting
(Default: blank)
Set the FETCH port No. of the Item Setting details
FETCH Port
connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
No. Options Mode Select [Fetch passive].
(Default: 2000)
Local PLC side IP address
For the WRITE port No. of the IP(dec)
connected Ethernet module, the Remote GOT side IP address
Addresses
value that the FETCH port No. is PORT Local PLC side port No.
WRITE Port No. 1025 to 65535
incremented by one is set (dec) Remote GOT side port No.
automatically.
(Default: 2001)
Communication TCP (fixed) TCP (fixed) (3) Write port setting
POINT Options Mode Select [Write passive].

Local PLC side IP address
IP(dec)
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility Remote GOT side IP address
Addresses
The communication interface setting can be PORT Local PLC side port No.
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] (dec) Remote GOT side port No.
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following (4) Precautions for setting
manual. The Keep Alive function of the Siemens CP Module is
not supported. Specify 0 for [Keep Alive].
GT User's Manual

14.3.4 Precautions 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to multiple GOTs
CONTROLLER
(1) Setting PLC No.
When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
14.3.2 Ethernet setting 10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
multiple GOTs.
A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.
PLC
 When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. 11
CONNECTION TO
system.)
GE FANUC PLC
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
 When connecting to the multiple network 12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
performance.
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) 13
CONNECTION TO
 When monitoring a nonexistent or turned-off
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
station
If a time-out occurs with the initial communication by
monitoring a nonexistent or turned-off station, the time-
out can delay the communication with the normally
operating station.
14
CONNECTION TO
 Timing to start GOT communication
SIEMENS PLC
After the PLC starts up, start the GOT communication.
When the GOT starts communication before the PLC
starts up, a communication timeout occurs.
 Operations during communication 15

During normal communication, any operation which
HIRATA CORPORATION
makes the GOT restart (including writing a project and

HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
changing utility data)may display the system alarm,

"402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication
pathway or modules.", when the GOT restarts.
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO

The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT (2) When setting a bit device as a word device
are as follows. Set the device number.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the For the device name setting, enter "W" after the bit
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. memory device name.
same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of Device name Device number
the controller actually used. (W added) (Setting with even number)
When a non-existent device or a device number outside (3) When setting a data register
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Set the device using the format of data block (DB)
may not be monitored. + data word (DW).
 Setting item
(a) S7-300/400 series and S7(Ethernet)
Device name Data word (DW) number
Data block (DB) number
(4) Precautions when setting devices
(a) Notation method of the bit device
The difference in bit memory notation
between GOT and PLC is as follows.
Notation of GOT Notation of PLC
Q0007 Q0.7
(b) Preparing to set a data register

It is necessary to define the data block using a
peripheral software and sequence program,
before using a data register.
Item Description Setting more than one data block cannot be
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. done for the data register.
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of (c) Object that cannot be set Timer (current
word device. value) (T)
Information
Displays the device type and setting range which are Only one device can be set for the write target
selected in [Device]. of this device.
Set the monitor target of the set device. Therefore, multiple devices, such as, using
Host
Select this item to monitor the controller specified the recipe function, etc., cannot be used.
as the host station in the GOT utility (setup). (d) Notation method of the data registers with the
Select this item to monitor a controller other than bit specification
the one specified as the host station. The notation of the data registers with the bit
Network • SIEMENS S7-300/400
specification differs between the GOT and the
Set the MPI address of the controller
Other PLC.
monitored.
• SIEMENS S7(Ethernet)
The following shows the correspondence
Set the network number and the station table.
number of the controller monitored. Notation in GOT Notation in PLC
DB1.DBW0.b0 DB1.DBX1.0
POINT : :
Device settings of SIEMENS PLC (S7-300/400 series, DB1.DBW0.b8 DB1.DBX0.0
S7(Ethernet)) : :
(1) When setting a bit device as a bit device DB1.DBW0.b15 DB1.DBX0.7
Set the device using the format of byte address DB1.DBW2.b0 DB1.DBX3.0
(DEC) + bit address (0 to 7). : :
: :
Device name Device number : :
Bit address (0 to 7)
Byte address (DEC)

(b) S7-200 Series 14.4.2 SIEMENS S7-200 Series 9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Device
No.
represen
tation
variable memory(V) V0 to V51197
Input relay (I) I0 to I77 10
*3 Q0 to Q77
Output relay (Q)
Bit device
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Bit memory (M) M0 to M317
Item Description Decimal
special memory (SM) SM0 to SM1947
Timer (T)*1 T0 to T255
word device. Counter (C)*1 C0 to C255
PLC
Displays the device type and setting range which are sequence control relay (S) S0 to S317
Description
selected in [Device]. variable memory(VW)
Input relay (IW)
VW0 to VW5118
IW0 to IW6
11
Output relay (QW)*3 QW0 to QW6
POINT
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
analog input(AIW)*1 AIW0 to AIW30
Device settings of SIEMENS PLC (S7-200 series) analog output (AQW)*3 AQW0 to AQW30
Word device
(1) When setting bit devices (except Timer and Bit memory (MW) MW0 to MW30
Decimal
Counter) special memory (SMW) SMW0 to SMW192
Set the device using the byte address (DEC) and
the bit address (0 to 7).
Timer (T)*4
Counter (C)*4
T0 to T255
C0 to C255
12
CONNECTION TO LS
High-speed counter (HC)*2 HC0 to HC2
sequence control relay
SYSTEMS PLC
SW0 to SW30
INDUSTRIAL
(SW)
Bit address (0 to 7)
Device name Byte address (DEC) *1 Only reading is possible.
*2 Only reading 32-bit (two-word data) designation is allowed.
*3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running.
14.4.1 SIEMENS S7-300/400 Series 13
14.4.3 SIEMENS S7(Ethernet)
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
Device
SICK SAFETY
No. Device
represen No.
tation Device name Setting range
represen
Input relay (I) I0000 to I5117 tation
Output relay (Q) Q0000 to Q5117 Decimal
14
Bit device
Input relay (I) I0000 to I1277

Bit memory (M) M00000 to M20477 Output relay (Q) Q0000 to Q1277 Decimal
Bit device

Word device bit*2 ― Bit memory (M) M0000 to M2557
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
Input relay (IW) IW0 to IW510
Word device bit following word devices ―
Output relay (QW) QW0 to QW510
Data register
Bit memory (MW) MW0 to MW2046
Input relay (IW) IW0 to IW126
Timer (Current value) (T)*1 T0 to T511
Output relay (QW) QW0 to QW126
Counter (Current value)
(C)
C0 to C511 Bit memory (MW) MW0 to MW254
15
Timer (Current value) (T)*1 T0 to T255
HIRATA CORPORATION
Word device
DB1.DBW0 to
DB1.DBW65534 Counter (Current value) (C) C0 to C255
HNC CONTROLLER
Decimal
CONNECTION TO
DB2.DBW0 to DB1.DBW0 to
Word device
DB2.DBW65534 DB1.DBW2046
DB2.DBW0 to Decimal
.
Data register (DB)
. DB2.DBW2046
DB4094.DBW0 to .
Data register (DB)
DB4094.DBW65534
DB4095.DBW0 to
.
DB254.DBW0 to
16
DB4095.DBW65534 DB254.DBW2046
MURATEC CONTROLLER
*1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device DB255.DBW0 to

designation mode. DB255.DBW2046
CONNECTION TO

designation mode.

15
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO HIRATA
15.
CORPORATION HNC
PLC
11
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
13
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
15.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
15 - 1
15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA
CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER
For the connection to the HNC controller manufactured by Hirata Corporation, please contact our company.
15 - 2 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER

16
9
RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
10
CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY
CONNECTION TO MURATEC
16.
CONTROLLER
PLC
11
CONNECTION TO
GE FANUC PLC
12
CONNECTION TO LS
SYSTEMS PLC
INDUSTRIAL
16.5 MURATEC Controller Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 2
CONNECTION TO
CONTROLLER
SICK SAFETY
14
CONNECTION TO
SIEMENS PLC
15
HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16
MURATEC CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO
16 - 1
16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC
CONTROLLER
For the connection to the MURATEC controller, please contact our company.
16.5 MURATEC Controller Side Setting
16 - 2 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER

INDEX
[A] Connection diagram
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC............... 7-6
INDEX
Control/Compact/FlexLogix.................... 10-6,10-13 CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC ........ 10-1
MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series .................. 10-5 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC .......................... 4-1
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ................... 11-1
SLC500 Series................................................. 10-4
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION
HNC CONTROLLER ................................... 15-1,16-1
[C] CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC .................. 2-1
Coaxial cable ....................................................... 1-30 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC ......................... 3-1
Communication module....................................... 1-18 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
Connectable Model List SYSTEMS PLC.................................................... 12-1
CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC .... 10-2 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC....................... 5-2 CONTROLLER ...................................................... 9-1
CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
CONTROLLER .................................................... 13-1
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ...................... 5-2
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC ..................... 14-1
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ............... 11-2 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC...................... 6-1
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC .................. 7-1
CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER............ 15-2 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC............... 2-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .......................... 8-1
CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC ..................... 3-2 Controller Type ...................................................... 1-5
CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL Conversion cable ................................................. 1-19
SYSTEMS PLC................................................ 12-2
CONNECTION TO MURATEC [D]
CONTROLLER ................................................ 16-2 Device Range that Can Be Set
CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC... 10-17
CONTROLLER .................................................. 9-2 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC..................... 4-20
CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS
CONTROLLER ................................................ 13-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .................... 5-18
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC.................. 14-2 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ............. 11-17
CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC .................. 6-2 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC .............. 7-2 HNC CONTROLLER........................................ 15-2
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC............. 2-10
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ...................... 8-2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC...................... 3-9
Connection Diagram CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC .... 10-7 SYSTEMS PLC .............................................. 12-11
CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC..................... 4-11 CONNECTION TO MURATEC
CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS CONTROLLER................................................. 16-2
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ...................... 5-6 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ............... 11-9 CONTROLLER................................................. 9-51
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER............ 15-2 CONTROLLER................................................. 13-6
CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC............... 2-5 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC................ 14-14
CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC ..................... 3-5 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC ................ 6-31
CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC............. 7-22
SYSTEMS PLC................................................ 12-7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
CONNECTION TO MURATEC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .................... 8-37
CONTROLLER ................................................ 16-2
CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE
[F]
CONTROLLER ................................................ 9-27
CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY FUJI FA PLC
CONTROLLER ................................................ 13-3 MICREX-F120S/140S/15□S .............................. 4-8
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC.................. 14-5 MICREX-F55...................................................... 4-3
CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC ................ 6-10 MICREX-F70...................................................... 4-5
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
PXG4, PXG5, PXG9, PXH9 ............................... 5-4
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .................... 8-10
PXR3, PXR4, PXR5, PXR9................................ 5-3
Index-1
[G] CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC ............... 2-9
GE FANUC PLC CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC...................... 3-8
Series90-30...................................................... 11-3 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
Series90-70...................................................... 11-6 SYSTEMS PLC .............................................. 12-10
VersaMax Micro ............................................... 11-7 CONNECTION TO MURATEC
GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-27 CONTROLLER................................................. 16-2
GOT Side Settings Precautions
CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC ..................... 4-22
PLC ........................................................ 10-9,10-14 CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC..................... 4-14 CONTROLLER................................................. 5-19
CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC.............. 11-17
CONTROLLER................................................. 5-11 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ............. 11-14 CONTROLLER................................................. 9-52
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER ............ 15-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER..................... 8-38
CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC............... 2-7 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC...................... 3-7 MONITORING ....................................................... 1-1
CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
SYSTEMS PLC ................................................ 12-9 [R]
CONNECTION TO MURATEC RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER................................................. 16-2 CB Series ......................................................... 9-13
CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE FB series .......................................................... 9-14
CONTROLLER................................................. 9-39 H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B............................................ 9-7
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC.................. 14-6 H-PCP-J ............................................................. 9-4
CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC ........ 6-14,6-20 PF900/901, HA400/401, HA900/901................ 9-18
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA RB Series ......................................................... 9-17
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .................... 8-31 RMC500, MA900/901, AG500 ......................... 9-18
GOT side settings SA100/200 ....................................................... 9-18
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC....... 7-8,7-17 SRX .................................................................. 9-23
SRZ .................................................................... 9-9
[H] THV-A1 ............................................................ 9-20
HITACHI IES PLC
Connecting to H-200 to 252 series, H series [S]
board type or EH-150 series .............................. 2-4 SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER
Connection to large-sized H series .................... 2-3 Flexi Soft .......................................................... 13-2
HITACHI PLC SIEMENS PLC
S10mini .............................................................. 3-4 SIMATIC S7-200 .............................................. 14-4
S10V .................................................................. 3-3 SIMATIC S7-300/400 Series ............................ 14-3
Station No. settings
[I] CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC ..................... 4-19
I/F .......................................................................... 1-9 CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
I/F communication setting.................................... 1-13 CONTROLLER................................................. 5-17
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC.............. 11-16
[L] CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER................................................. 9-49
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
K200S .............................................................. 12-5
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER..................... 8-36
K300S .............................................................. 12-6
System Configuration
K80S, K120S ................................................... 12-3 CONNECTION TO
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC .......................... 10-4,10-13
[O] CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC ....................... 4-3
Option unit ........................................................... 1-19 CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER................................................... 5-3
[P] CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC................ 11-3
CONNECTION TO HIRATA
PLC Side Setting
CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC..................... 4-15 CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER ............ 15-2
CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC ............. 11-15 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC ............... 2-3
CONNECTION TO HIRATA CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC...................... 3-3
CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER ............ 15-2
Index-2
CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL
SYSTEMS PLC................................................ 12-3
CONNECTION TO MURATEC
CONTROLLER ................................................ 16-2
CONTROLLER .................................................. 9-4
INDEX
CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
CONTROLLER ................................................ 13-2
CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC.................. 14-3
CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC .......... 6-3,6-19
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC ...... 7-3,7-16
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ...................... 8-3
[T]
Temperature Controller Side Setting
CONTROLLER ................................................ 9-40
CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-31
[Y]
YASKAWA PLC
CP-312............................................................. 6-19
CP-317............................................................... 6-8
CP-9200SH................................................ 6-8,6-19
GL120, GL130 ................................................... 6-3
GL60S, GL60H, GL70H ..................................... 6-4
MP2200, MP2300 ...................................... 6-9,6-19
MP-920 ...................................................... 6-5,6-19
MP-920/930, CP-9300MS/9200(H) ,
PROGIC-8.......................................................... 6-5
MP-940 .............................................................. 6-7
YOKOGAWA PLC
FA500 ................................................................ 7-5
FA-M3 ........................................................ 7-3,7-16
STARDOM ......................................................... 7-5
YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
GREEN Series ................................................... 8-3
UT100 Series ..................................................... 8-5
UT2000 Series ................................................... 8-6
UTAdvanced Series ........................................... 8-7
Index-3
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080870ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.01B
Jan., 2010 SH(NA)-080870ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.10L

• Correction of writing errors
• Station monitoring function (Ethernet multiple connection compatible, temperature controller connection
compatible), compatibility with RKC temperature controller (FB series compatible, RB series compatible), and
Connection to Hirata Corporation HNC controller
Jun., 2010 SH(NA)-080870ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.17T

• GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, and GT1662-VN are added.
• SICK safety controller connection compatible
Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080870ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.19V

• RKC temperature controller (RB500, RB700) compatible
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080870ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.23Z

• YAMATAKE temperature controller (DMC50) compatible
• RKC temperature controller (PF, HA, RMC, MA, AG, THV) compatible
Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080870ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.28E

• YASKAWA PLC (CP-317) compatible
• RKC temperature controller (Z-CT, SRX, SA) compatible
• Ethernet connection with SIEMENS PLC (SIMATIC S7-300/400 series) compatible
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080870ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.31H

• YOKOGAWA temperature controller (UTAdvanced series) compatible
• MURATEC controller connection compatible
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080870ENG-H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.37P

• GT14, GT12 are added.
Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080870ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.40S

• "I/F Communication Setting" is compatible with "5V power supply".
• AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series (Device extended) compatible
• Connectable model GT14 is added for the following:
FUJI FA PLC, FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor is added.
Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080870ENG-J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.45X

• Connectable model GT14 is added.
Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080870ENG-K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.54G

• Description of the temperature controller manufactured by Azbil (former Yamatake) Corporation is moved from
this manual to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1).
• Ping test at the GT14 compatible
Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080870ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.58L

• YOKOGAWA PLC (F3SP71-4N) compatible
Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.63R

• Ethernet connection with YASKAWA PLC (CP-317) compatible
Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080870ENG-M
• RKC temperature controller (SB1, B400) compatible
• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result
of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 1
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-080870ENG-M
Series
Connection Manual
(Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3
MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON3)-E
MODEL 1D7MC4
CODE
SH(NA)-080870ENG-M(1211)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in Japan, November 2012.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Straße 89 99, Paola Hill Ul. Zhambyla 28
Gothaer Straße 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-100017 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 I.C. SYSTEMS LTD. EGYPT
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS 23 Al-Saad-Al-Alee St.
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 EG-Sarayat, Maadi, Cairo
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +20 (0) 2 / 235 98 548
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +20 (0) 2 / 235 96 625
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
INEA RBT d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Lebanon - Beirut
BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL
Viale Colleoni 7 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia PT - 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Telefono: +351 (0)234 / 303 900
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA RBT d.o.o. CROATIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA Private Bag 2016
Poland Branch Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 ZA-1600 Isando
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770
PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA RBT d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA Technologická 374/6 Izletnicka 10
52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-113000 Smederevo
RU-115054 Мoscow Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 615 401
Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 615 401
Fax: +7 495 721-2071
Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Lykkegårdsvej 17 Jána Derku 1671
Spanish Branch DK-4000 Roskilde SK-911 01 Trencín
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA PROCONT, spol. s r.o. Prešov SLOVAKIA
Pärnu mnt.160i Kúpelná 1/A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK EE-11317 Tallinn SK-080 01 Prešov
UK Branch Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +421 (0)51 7580 611
Travellers Lane Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +421 (0)51 7580 650
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Peltoie 37 Stegne 11
FIN-28400 Ulvila SI-1000 Ljubljana
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 540 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116
Office Tower “Z” 14 F Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 541 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 5, Mavrogenous Str. Box 426
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 GR-18542 Piraeus SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 MELTRADE Kft. HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fertő utca 14. Im Schörli 5
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 HU-1107 Budapest CH-8600 Dübendorf
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY
Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
LV-1058 Riga TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Savanoriu Pr. 187 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
LT-02300 Vilnius UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com

Manual de Comunicacion GT1030 Allan Bradley

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual de Comunicacion GT1030 Allan Bradley

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Comunicacion GT1030 Allan Bradley

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

● Correctly connect the battery connector.

● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

● Dispose of used battery promptly.

[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

3.CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC

4.CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC

5.CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

6.CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

7.CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

8.CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

9.CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

10.CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

11.CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC

13.CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER

14.CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

15.CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER

16.CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

 Screen creation software manuals

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

 Extended and option function manuals

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

 Transferring data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD

GOT1000 GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name

5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z2